Home

TC 3-04.33 (H-60 ATM). - Army Aviation Support Facility #1 NYARNG

1. 2 10 Table 2 8 Maintenance test pilot task 1 2 11 Table 4 1 Suggested format of a crew mission briefing 4 7 Table 4 2 Landing zone sequence example sese 4 63 Table 4 3 Suggested format for a crew level after action review checklist 4 109 Table 4 4 Scatterable minefield warning format sse 4 165 Table 6 1 Examples of standard words and 6 5 Table 1 Rated crewmember flight tasks for H 60L series qualification A 1 Table A 2 Flight tasks for H 60L series maintenance test pilot maintenance test pilot evaluator qualifiGatigri eee coectetuer ceste ire Concrete eun A 2 Publication Date TC 3 04 33 v FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Contents Table A 3 Rated crewmember flight tasks for H 60A L series qualification A 2 Table 4 Nonrated crewmember flight tasks for H 60A L series qualification A 3 Table A 5 Flight tasks for 60 nonrated crewmember series qualification A 4 Table B 1 Heads up display qualification esee B 1 Table B 2 Extended range fuel system academic training for crewmembers
2. 4 61 ii TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Contents Task 1058 Perform Visual Meteorological Conditions Approach 4 65 Task 1062 Perform Slope Operations sse 4 69 Task 1064 Perform a Roll On Landing 4 71 Task 1068 Perform Go Around sse ener nentes nnne ns 4 73 Task 1070 Respond to 4 75 Task 1082 Perform neiere Eaa 4 77 Task 1142 Perform Digital Communications sse 4 80 Task 1155 Negotiate Wire Obstacles 4 81 Task 1162 Perform Emergency 4 82 Task 1166 Perform Instrument Maneuvers essen ener 4 84 Task 1167 Perform Flight Maneuvers Using Standby Flight Instrument Sysyem H GOM E 4 86 Task 1168 Perform Command Instrument System 4 87 Task 1169 Perform Flight Director Operations H 60M 4 88 Task 1170 Perform Instrument Takeoff ssssesssssseeeeeeneneeenennen 4 90 Task
3. B 2 Table B 3 Flight tasks for initial extended range fuel system qualification B 2 Table B 4 Volcano academic training seseeeeenenen nennen B 3 Table B 5 Volcano flight training nennen B 3 vi TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Preface Training circular TC 3 04 33 standardizes aircrew training programs and flight evaluation procedures This aircrew training manual ATM provides specific guidelines for executing H 60 aircrew training It is based on the battle focused training principles outlined in field manual FM 7 1 It establishes crewmember qualification refresher mission and continuation training and evaluation requirements This manual applies to all H 60 series crewmembers and their commanders This is not a stand alone document All the requirements of Army regulations ARs and TC 3 04 11 must be met Implementing this manual conforms to AR 95 1 and TC 3 04 11 This manual in conjunction with the ARs and TC 3 04 11 will help aviation commanders at all levels develop a comprehensive aircrew training program By using this ATM commanders ensure that individual crewmember and aircrew proficiency is commensurate with their units mission and that aircrews routinely employ standard techniques and procedures Crewmembers will use this manual as a how to source for performing crewmember duti
4. enne 4 114 Task 2022 Transmit Tactical 4 115 Task 2024 Perform Terrain Flight Navigation 4 116 Task 2026 Perform Terrain kana eene 4 118 Task 2034 Perform Masking And Unmasking esee 4 120 Task 2036 Perform Terrain Flight Deceleration eee 4 122 Task 2040 Perform Evasive Maneuvers essen eene 4 123 Task 2042 Perform Actions on Contact nennen 4 127 Task 2048 Perform Sling Load Operations ssssssseeeeeee 4 130 Task 2050 Develop an Emergency Global Positioning System Recovery Procedure 4 134 Task 2052 Perform Water Bucket 4 140 Publication Date TC 3 04 33 iii FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Contents Task 2054 Perform Fast Rope Insertion And Extraction Operations 4 144 Task 2056 Perform Rappelling Operations sse 4 147 Task 2058 Perform Special Patrol Infiltration Exfiltration System Operations 4 150 Task 2060 Perform Rescue Hoist 4 153 Task 2061 Operate Forward Looking Infrared System 4 155
5. by the drag multiplying factor and then double c Step 3 Add or subtract the value in step 2 to from the uncorrected clean or high drag cruise torque value recorded in step 2 above do not exceed the single engine transmission torque limit Record the adjusted single engine CRUISE TORQUE d Step 4 Enter the CRUISE chart at the selected IAS in item 30 above Move left or right as appropriate to the MCP line and adjust for the ETF of the weakest engine e Step 5 Move straight down do not follow the slant of the line to the TORQUE PER ENGINE to read the CONT TORQUE Record the CONT TORQUE AVAILABLE SINGLE ENGINE Item 33 CRUISE FUEL FLOW SINGLE ENGINE 1 Cruise chart method Use the appropriate CRUISE chart a Step 1 Enter the bottom of the chart at the torque value computed in item 32 above CRUISE TORQUE SINGLE ENGINE b Step 2 Move up to TOTAL FUEL FLOW 100 LB HR and read the cruise fuel flow Divide the cruise fuel flow value in half Record the CRUISE FUEL FLOW SINGLE ENGINE Note Adjust as required for FAT and or planned use of engine bleed air accessories anti ice cockpit cabin heaters AMOGS OBOGS according to the operator s manual 2 Engine fuel flow chart method Use the SINGLE DUAL ENGINE FUEL FLOW chart a Step 1 Enter the chart at the INDICATED TORQUE PER ENGINE for the cruise torque value computed in item 32 above CRUISE TORQUE SINGLE ENGINE b Step 2 Move ri
6. OVERWATER CONSIDERATIONS Overwater flight at any altitude is characterized by a lack of visual cues and therefore has the potential of causing visual illusions Be alert to any unannounced changes in the flight profile and be prepared to take immediate corrective actions The radar altimeter low bug should be set to assist in altitude control Operations become increasing more hazardous as references are reduced open water versus a small lake water state increases calm to chop to breaking condition with increasing wave height and visibility decreases horizon becomes same color as water water spray or rain on windshield sunny midday versus twilight NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLE NVG CONSIDERATIONS 1 During water bucket operations the P s attention will be divided between the aircraft instruments altitude and ground speed and the outside It is critical during night vision goggle NVG operations that the P s and NCM s focus be primarily outside to provide warning to the P of obstacles or hazards during the entire operation 2 Spatial disorientation can be overwhelming during overwater operations at night Proper scanning techniques are necessary to avoid spatial disorientation If there are visible lights on the horizon or if the shoreline can be seen the pilot may opt to approach and hover the aircraft so it is pointed toward these references if the wind permits If no other references exist deploy chemlights to assist
7. Actions on contact e Volcano operations e Internal load operations e Maneuvering flight e CBRN operations Publication Date TC 3 04 33 3 5 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 Chapter 3 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 9 e Fire support Weapon system operation and employment FM 3 04 126 FM 3 04 140 M60D M240H operator s manual appropriate aircraft operator s manual and unit SOP Topics in this subject area are 10 e Weapons initialization arming and safety e Range estimation Operation and function of the M60D M240H e Duties of the door gunner e Visual search and target detection e Fire control fire commands e Weapons employment during night and NVD operations e Techniques of fire and employment Night vision goggle operations FM 3 04 93 FM 3 04 203 appropriate aircraft operator s manual operator s manual and unit SOP Topics in this subject area are 11 NVG nomenclature characteristics limitations and operations e Hemispherical illumination e NVG ground and air safety NVG aircraft modifications Use of internal and external lights NVG effects on distance estimation and depth perception ANVIS HUD operations NVG tactical operations to include lighting e NVG terrain interpretation map preparation and navigation ME and MP topics DA Pam 738 751 Interactive Electronics Technical Manual IETM EM 0271 applicable mainte
8. Aircraft survivability equipment ASE e Servicing parking and mooring e Cargo handling systems e Mission equipment e Armament Avionics Operating limitations and restrictions appropriate aircraft operator s manual Topics in this subject area are 4 e Wind limitations e Rotor limitations Power limitations e Engine limitations e Aircraft system limitations e Airspeed limitations e Temperature limitations e Loading limitations e Performance planning e Weather environmental limitations restrictions e Maneuvering limits e Weapon system limitations Aircraft emergency procedures and malfunction analysis appropriate aircraft operator s manual Topics in this subject area are e Emergency terms and their definitions e Emergency exits and equipment e Engine malfunctions e Chip detectors e Fires e Fuel system malfunctions e Hydraulic system malfunctions e Electrical system malfunctions e Landing and ditching procedures e Flight control malfunctions e Stabilator malfunctions e AFCS malfunctions e Rotor transmission and drive system malfunctions TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Evaluation e Mission equipment 5 Aeromedical factors AR 40 8 and FM 3 04 93 Topics in this subject area are e Flight restrictions due to exogenous factors e Hypoxia e St
9. Chapter 4 d When utilizing two NCM s one NCM will make specific calls and inform the pilots One NCM will clear the tail while the other assists the P on placement over the insertion point Both NCMs will perform airspace surveillance and obstacle avoidance at all times constant scanning is required One NCM will be responsible for passing the 10 6 and 1 minute calls to the passengers One NCM will be responsible for making the rope calls this does not prevent the other NCM from providing additional guidance e The NCM will use pre established procedures and communications including hand and arm signals between each other and the rope master The NCM will control when ropes are deployed released or retrieved NCMs must verify with the other NCM via hand and arm signals or ICS before releasing rappelling rope s The rope master controls personnel movement and exiting of rappellers f The NCM will inform PC once rappeller s are clear of the aircraft rope s have been retrieved back into the aircraft or rope s are secured by belay man 2 Procedures Make the approach into the wind if possible and plan to arrive over the insertion point at an altitude that will clear the highest obstacle Select an appropriate reference point to maintain heading and position over the ground P announces the rappelling execution command ROPES ROPES ROPES The NCM will announce ROPES OUT upon the first rope leaving the aircraft T
10. MTFs e Tasks may require extra time altitude and analysis at night Use of supplemental lighting will aid in identifying switches position control positions and engine power control levers Use additional crew member to record data as required Use proper scanning techniques to minimize the probability of spatial disorientation 2 Considerations Hover Checks e Select an area with good visual references and room to maneuver during checks Use landing and search lights as required 3 Considerations In Flight Checks Due to the airspeeds involved while performing several of these checks select an altitude appropriate for the task e Utilize airfields and improved landing environments when available g Training and evaluation requirements Some of the tasks incorporate more than one check from the applicable aircraft MTF manual For initial MP and readiness level RL progressions all tasks listed in Table 2 8 will be evaluated For annual proficiency and readiness test APART the minimum evaluated tasks will be 4001 4200 4202 4220 4228 4236 and 4254 Other tasks checks may be evaluated at the discretion of the ME Tasks that involve dual systems such as stability augmentation system SAS or engines require that only one system be evaluated Training and evaluation requirements define whether the task will be trained or evaluated in the aircraft simulator or academic environment If one o
11. slide left or slide right Also indicates that ground personnel are authorized to approach the aircraft Clear Command to change altitude up or down normally used to control masking and Come up down unmasking operations 1 Establish communication with followed by the name of the element 2 Sensor contact at the stated position Contact 3 Acknowledges sighting of a specified reference point either visually or via sensor 4 Individual radar return within a GROUP or ARM Controls Refers to aircraft flight controls Deadeye Laser designator system inoperative Driftin An alert of the unintentional or undirected movement of the aircraft will be 9 followed by the word right left backward or forward Egress Command to make an emergency exit from the aircraft will be repeated three 9 times in row Execute Initiate an action Expect Anticipate further instructions or guidance Firing Announcement that a specific weapon is to be fired Fly headin Command to fly an assigned compass heading This term generally used in 9 low level or contour flight operations Go ahead Proceed with your message Go AJ Directive to activate antijam communications Go plain red Directive to discontinue secure operations Go secure green Directive to activate secure communications Hold Command to maintain present position Publication Date TC 3 04 33 6 5 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT Se
12. 2 For an instrument landing system ILS approach intercept and maintain the localizer course within 2 5 degrees of course centerline and glide slope within 0 5 degree of glide slope center 3 For a precision approach radar PAR approach make immediate heading and altitude changes issued by air traffic control ATC and maintain heading 5 degrees for final approach maintain glide slope as directed by ATC 4 Comply with the published decision altitude or decision height DH prescribed for the approach 5 Perform the correct missed approach procedure as published or per ATC instructions upon reaching the decision altitude DH if landing cannot be done per AR 95 1 6 When coupled flight is selected program flight director display control panel FD DCP for the appropriate approach and monitor for correct aircraft response DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a The pilot in command PC is responsible for ensuring that the approach is reviewed and is briefed to all crewmembers before initiating the procedure The PC will confirm with the crew the specific approach to be flown that the correct navigational aid NAVAID communication frequencies are set b A L The horizontal situation indicator vertical situation indicator HSI VST mode select panel and command instrument system CIS are selected as required The PC may assign other crewmembers to perform these duties c Ei Select the appropriate navigation source and bearing pointer
13. MAX ALLOWABLE GWT OGE IGE GO NO GO TORQUE OGE IGE MAX HOVER HEIGHT IGE PREDICTED HOVER TORQUE MIN SE AIRSPEED IAS WO W STORES EMER SE IAS MAX TORQUE AVAILABLE MIN MAX IAS CRUISE SPEED IAS TAS CRUISE TORQUE CONT TORQUE AVAI CRUISE FUEL FLOW MAX RANGE IAS TORQUE MAX ENDURANCE IAS TORQUE CRITICAL TORQUE MAX ALLOWABLE GWT OPTIMUM IAS AT MAX ALLOWABLE GWT MAX RIC IAS TORQUE DA FORM 5701 60 R PAGE 1 OF 2 DA Form 5701 60 R page 1 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 ARRIVAL MAX TORQUE AVAILABLE PREDICTED HOVER TORQUE MAX ALLOWABLE GWT IGE MAX HOVER HEIGHT IGE MIN SE AIRSPEED IAS WO W STORES TORQUE RATIO MAX TORQUE AVAILABLE PREDICTED HOVER TORQUE MAX ALLOWABLE GWT IGE MAX HOVER HEIGHT IGE MIN SE AIRSPEED IAS WO W STORES DA FORM 5701 60 R PAGE 2 OF 2 DA Form 5701 60 R page 2 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36
14. TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training Training may be conducted in the aircraft or simulator 2 Evaluation Evaluation may be conducted in the aircraft or simulator REFERENCES Appropriate common references Publication Date TC 3 04 33 4 105 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 TASK 1254 Operate Multifunction Display CONDITION In an H 60 helicopter STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 Operate the installed multifunction display MFD as per the appropriate aircraft operator s manual 2 Select the appropriate display to obtain the desired information for the current mission profile DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions The pilot on the controls P will focus primarily outside the aircraft and respond to information given by the pilot not on the controls P 2 Procedures Perform the turn on and then select the desired display for each aircraft MFD Understand factors and emergencies adversely affecting the MFDs which could result in degraded mission performance or the mission being aborted Perform the proper shutdown procedures in accordance with the appropriate operator s manual NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLE NVG CONSIDERATIONS Ensure the MFD lighting adjustment is set at an acceptable level for night or night vision goggle NVG operations TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training Training may b
15. 2 Alternative or sling load configuration a Step 1 Enter the CRUISE chart at the OPTIMUM IAS AT MAX ALLOWABLE GWT step 3 above Read left or right to the curved dashed line then move up to read A TRQ FOR DRAG AREA OF 10 SQ FT of AF b Step 2 Multiply the A TRQ by the drag multiplying factor Subtract the result from the uncorrected clean or high drag configuration maximum torque available noted in step 2 above c Step 3 Reenter the bottom of the CRUISE chart at the adjusted torque value from step 2 then move up to the intersection of MAX END AND line and read maximum allowable gross weight Record the MAX ALLOWABLE GWT DUAL ENGINE Read left or right for optimum TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Instructions for Manual Computation of Department of the Army Form 5701 60 R IAS KTS at maximum allowable gross weight Record the OPTIMUM IAS AT MAX GWT DUAL ENGINE If the maximum torque available line is right of the GW 1 000 LB line enter MAX ALLOWABLE GWT according to the appropriate aircraft operator s manual chapter 5 and then read left or right from the respective value for OPTIMUM IAS AT MAX ALLOWABLE GWT DUAL ENGINE l Item 27 MAX R C IAS TORQUE DUAL ENGINE Use the appropriate CRUISE chart to compute maximum rate of climb indicated airspeed and torque as described below 1 Clean and high drag configuration a Step 1 Enter th
16. 5 feet and heading 20 degrees 2 Nonrated a Prepare the aircraft crew and passengers for an emergency landing Ensure passenger seat belts are on and crew shoulder harnesses are locked b Look for a suitable landing area and alert the crew to the landing area s location c Assist in evacuating passengers to designated assembly area according to the crew briefing DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a Any crewmember detecting an emergency will immediately announce the emergency to the other crewmembers If time permits lock shoulder harnesses make a mayday call and tune transponder to emergency as appropriate b The pilot on the controls P will perform the underlined and non underlined steps as appropriate depending on the environmental or aircraft conditions for the pilot on the controls that is non circled items as per the appropriate aircraft operator s manual CL and initiate the appropriate type of landing During visual meteorological conditions VMC the P will focus primarily outside the aircraft to maintain aircraft control and to provide adequate clearance from traffic or obstacles During instrument meteorological condition IMC the P will remain focused inside the aircraft on the flight instruments to maintain aircraft control c The pilot not on the controls P will perform as directed or briefed The P will perform the underlined and non underlined steps for the pilot not on the controls that is circled it
17. 90 and 1 0 interpolate value per the example in figure 4 3 page 4 25 Note The maximum torque available is also referred to as intermediate rated power IRP 30 minute limit T700 and T701 or maximum rated power MRP 10 minute limit T701 Note Certain temperature and PA combinations will exceed the aircraft operator s manual chapter 5 torque limitations This item represents actual maximum torque available values During normal aircraft operations the aircraft operator s manual chapter 5 torque limitations shall not be exceeded Note Adjust the maximum torque available as required for planned use of engine anti ice and cockpit heater according to the operator s manual Note If the blade erosion kit is installed adjust the maximum torque available according to the aircraft operator s manual 4 24 TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 MAXIMUM TORQUE AVAILABLE 10 MINUTE LIMIT ANTI ICE OFF T700 GE 701C AND T700 GE 701D CC ENGINE FREE AIR TEMPERATURE 601 MAXIMUM TORQUE AVAILABLE IS LIMITED TO 120 BELOW 80 KIAS AND 1009 TORQUE ABOVE 80 KIAS H 60A MAXIMUM TORQUE AVAILABLE IS LIMITED TO 100 BELOW 80 KIAS AND PLACARD LIMITS ABOVE 80 KIAS Figure 4 3 Example maximum torque available chart e MAX ALLOWABLE GWT OGE Use MAXIMUM OGE HOVER WEIGHT AND TORQUE REQUIRED ANTI ICE OFF T700 or T701 as appropriate figures 4 and
18. ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 References FM 4 20 197 Multiservice Helicopter Sling Load Basic Operations and Equipment 20 July 2006 FM 10 67 1 Concepts and Equipment of Petroleum Operations 02 April 1998 FM 17 95 Cavalry Operations 24 December 1996 FM 21 60 Visual Signals 30 September 1987 FM 55 450 2 Army Helicopter Internal Load Operations 05 June 1992 STP 8 68W 13 SM TG Soldier s Manual and Trainer s Guide MOS 68W Health Care Specialist Skill Levels 1 2 and 3 15 April 2009 TC 3 04 11 Commander s Aircrew Training Program for Individual Crew and Collective Training 19 November 2009 TC 3 04 93 Aero Medical Training for Flight Personnel 31 August 2009 TC 8 800 Medical Education and Demonstration of Individual Competence MEDIC 06 May 2009 TC 21 24 Rappelling 09 January 2008 TM 1 1500 250 23 Aviation Unit and Aviation Intermediate Maintenance for General Tie Down and Mooring on all Series Army Models AH 64 UH 60 CH MH 47 UH 1 AH 1 OH 58 Helicopters including C1 4 24 August 1990 TM 1 1500 328 23 Technical Manual Aeronautical Equipment Maintenance Management Policies and Procedures 25 April 2012 TM 1 1520 237 10 Operator s Manual for UH 60A Helicopter UH 60L Helicopter EH 60A Helicopter 25 September 2009 TM 1 1520 237 MTF Maintenance Test Flight Manual for UH 60A Helicopter UH 60L Helicopter EH 60A Helicopter 25 September 2009 TM 1 1520 253 10 Operator s Manual for Ar
19. FAC 3 or instrument annual proficiency and readiness test APART is allowed in the simulator REFERENCES Appropriate common references 4 42 TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 TASK 1032 Perform Radio Communication Procedures CONDITIONS In an H 60 helicopter STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 Rated a Program check and operate aircraft avionics b Establish radio contact with the desired unit or air traffic control ATC facility When communicating with ATC facilities use correct radio communication procedures and phraseology per the Department of Defense flight information publication DOD FLIP and Department of Transportation Federal Aviation Administration DOT FAA 7110 65 c Operate intercommunication system d Explain two way radio failure procedures per the DOD FLIP or host nation regulations 2 Nonrated a Operate intercommunication system b Use the appropriate radio to communicate with the desired facility as required for nonrated crewmembers NCMs DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a The pilot in command PC will determine radio frequencies per mission requirements during the crew briefing and will indicate whether the pilot on the controls P or pilot not on the controls P will establish and maintain primary communications b The P will announce information not m
20. Item 30 CRUISE SPEED IAS SINGLE ENGINE Select a CRUISE SPEED IAS that falls within the range of MIN MAX IAS SINGLE ENGINE item 29 above Record CRUISE SPEED IAS SINGLE ENGINE Enter the CRUISE chart at cruise speed IAS SINGLE ENGINE and move laterally to the TRUE AIRSPEED KTS scale Record CRUISE SPEED TAS SINGLE ENGINE D 12 TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Instructions for Manual Computation of Department of the Army Form 5701 60 R p Item 31 MAX TORQUE AVAILABLE SINGLE ENGINE Maximum torque available single engine is derived from the CRUISE chart by referencing the TORQUE AVAILABLE SE 30 MIN T700 or SE 2 5 MIN T701 ETF 1 0 line If the ETF is between 1 0 and 0 85 interpolation is required to determine actual maximum torque available Note 1 The maximum torque available may exceed the transmission torque limit During normal aircraft operations the aircraft operator s manual chapter 5 torque limitations shall not be exceeded Note 2 Max torque is derived from the cruise charts and takes into account the effect of ram air on engine performance at a selected airspeed Torque values may vary when flying at airspeeds other than the planned cruise airspeed 1 Step 1 Enter the CRUISE chart at the selected IAS in item 30 above Move left or right as appropriate to the TORQUE AVAILABLE SE 30 MIN T700 or SE 2 5 MIN T701 line and ad
21. NG 1188 j Operate Aircraft Survivability Equipment X S 1190 Perform Hand And Arm Signals X S 1194 Perform Refueling Operations X 1253 Operate Flight Management System Central Display X S Unit 1254 Operate Multifunction Display X S 1260 Operate Digital Map H 60M X S 1262 Participate in a Crew Level After Action Review X S Base tasks requiring specialized equipment do not apply to aircraft that do not have the equipment Task only applies to SPs IPs IEs MEs Task only applies to SPs IPs IEs MEs UTs Performance tasks are in bold type Technical tasks are in plain type 2 8 TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Training Table 2 5 Nonrated crewmember 15T 68W base task list Legend Day Day mode of flight Night Night unaided mode of flight NVG NVG mode of flight Eval Maneuver listed is required to be evaluated on the list evaluation S Standardization flight evaluation NG NVG annual NVG PFE Task Task Title Day Night NVG Eval 1000 Participate in a Crew Mission Briefing X S NG 1001 Administer Flight Evaluation S NG 1003 Conduct Flight Instruction S NG 1014 Operate Aviation Life Support Equipment S 1016 Perform Internal Load Operations S NG 1020 1022 Prepare Aircraft for Mission Perform Preflight Inspection Perform Before Starting Engine through Before Leaving Helicopter
22. Training considerations establish specific actions and standards used in the training environment 1 Night and NVD Wires and other hazards are much more difficult to detect and must be accurately marked and plotted on maps Crewmembers use proper scanning techniques to detect traffic and obstacles and to avoid spatial disorientation The P should make all internal checks for example computations and frequency changes Visual barriers areas so dimly viewable that a determination cannot be made if they contain barriers or obstacles will be treated as physical obstacles Altitude and ground speed are difficult to detect and using artificial illumination may sometimes be necessary Crewmembers determine the need for artificial lighting prior to descending below barriers and adjust search landing light for best illumination angle without causing excessive reflection into the cockpit Entering IMC with artificial illumination may induce spatial disorientation Cockpit controls will be more difficult to locate and identify Crewmembers take special precautions to identify and confirm the correct switches and levers 2 Night unaided The P should not view white lights weapons flash or ordnance explosions directly as they will impair night vision The P allows time for dark adaptation or if necessary adjusts altitude and airspeed until adapted The P will exercise added caution when performing flight tasks before reaching full dark adaptation Di
23. X under the mode of flight for performance tasks specifies the mode for progression and annual task iteration requirements Technical tasks may be performed in any mode of flight b Mission Additional tasks Table 2 7 lists the performance and technical mission tasks for RCMs and NCMs The commander will select mission and any additional tasks that support the unit s METL Once a performance task is selected by the commander an X under the mode of flight column denotes the task is mandatory for RL progression in that mode of flight c Maintenance test pilot tasks Table 2 8 lists the maintenance test pilot tasks AII tasks listed in this table will be evaluated during initial MP progression and initial ME evaluations d Task groups 1 Performance tasks These tasks measure the crewmember s ability to perform manipulate the controls and respond to tasks that are affected by the conditions and mode of flight These tasks are significantly affected by the conditions and mode of flight therefore the condition and mode of flight under which the task must be performed must be specified The base tasks listed as performance tasks in tables 2 4 through 2 6 already have the applicable conditions and modes of flight specified The mission tasks listed as performance tasks in table 2 7 must have the conditions and modes or flight specified by the commander based on the unit METL These specified conditions and modes of flight will be outli
24. and digital map TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training Training may be conducted in the aircraft or simulator 2 Evaluation Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft REFERENCES Appropriate common references Publication Date TC 3 04 33 4 57 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 TASK 1048 Perform Fuel Management Procedures WARNING Failure to monitor fuel balancing operations could result in engine flameout because of fuel starvation CONDITIONS In an H 60 helicopter with a CPU 26A P computer or calculator STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 Rated a The pilot in command PC will verify that the required amount of fuel is onboard at the time of takeoff b Initiate an alternate course of action if the actual fuel consumption varies from the planned value and the flight cannot be completed without the planned use of the required reserve c Balance manage fuel tank levels to maintain aircraft within center of gravity CG limits 2 Rated nonrated a Initiate an in flight fuel consumption check within 10 minutes of leveling off or within 10 minutes of entering into the mission profile b Within 15 to 30 minutes after taking the initial readings compute the fuel consumption rate 50 pounds per hour and complete the fuel consumption check c Monitor the remaining fuel quantity and the continuing rate
25. conduct these surveys are point route and course leg a Point technique The procedure for using the point technique depends on the situation When the situation permits readings are taken by dismounting from the aircraft When the situation does not permit the ground dose is estimated by using the air ground correlation factor and an aerial dose rate reading b Route technique The route technique involves the pilot on the controls P flying between two checkpoints following a route or a prominent terrain feature such as a road c Course leg technique The course leg technique involves the P flying a straight line course between two checkpoints The procedure for obtaining dose rate information between two checkpoints is the same for both the route and the course leg techniques 2 The crew must select a specific location in the aircraft for the survey meter All dose rate readings must be made with the meter in that location Dose rate readings are used to determine the air ground correlation factor The air ground correlation factor is the ratio of a ground dose rate to a reading taken at approximately the same time in an aircraft over the same spot on the ground 3 Information obtained by using the point technique is recorded on DA Form 1971 R Information obtained by using the route or course leg technique is recorded on DA Form 1971 1 R Information collected during the survey is delivered to the control party by physical drop or electronic
26. configuration differs significantly from the clean or high drag configuration drag compensations will be made This configuration is referred to as the alternative or sling load configuration and the appropriate drag compensation is described Note Figures 4 1 and 4 2 page 4 14 provide examples of an H 60 PPC H 60 PERFORMANCE PLANNING CARD For use of this form see TC 3 04 33 the proponent agency is TRADOC DEPARTURE 1 1 2 c 2 NETS TORQUE RATIO MAX TORQUE AVAILABLE 8 MAX ALLOWABLE GWT OGE IGE 9 b 9 b GO NO GO TORQUE IGE 10 10 MAX HOVER HEIGHT IGE 11 PREDICTED HOVER TORQUE 12 MIN SE AIRSPEED IAS Wow STORES 3 13 EMER SE IAS CRUISE ANGLE 36 Vnetas 37 puat enone E qu E MAX TORQUE AVAILABLE 31 MIN MAX IAS 18 Q9 Q9 kts CRUISE SPEED IAS TAS 19 30 30 kts CRUISE TORQUE CONT TORQUE AVAILABLE 21 21 G2 G2 CRUISE FUEL FLOW Q2 pph 33 pph MAX RANGE IAS TORQUE MAX ENDURANCE IAS TORQUE CRITICAL TORQUE Q5 96 MAX ALLOWABLE GWT 26 Ib 34 Ib OPTIMUM IAS AT MAX ALLOWABLE GWT 26 kts 34 kts MAX Ric IAS TORQUE e s EET MAX ALTITUDE MSL MAX ENDURANCE IAS DA FORM 5701 60 R PAGE 1 OF 2 Figure 4 1 Sample DA Form 5701 60 R page 1 Publication Date TC 3 04 33 4 13 FINAL APPROVED DRAF
27. maintain hover altitude 10 feet and do not allow drift to exceed 5 feet 2 Nonrated DESCR a Ensure that the aircraft is prepared for SPIES operations per TC 21 24 and the unit standing operating procedure SOP b Manage and control door straps and cargo doors IPTION 1 Crew actions a The pilot in command PC will conduct a crew and passenger briefing and ensure personnel understand their responsibilities during SPIES operations including aircraft safety and actions in the event of an emergency The PC will also emphasize procedural techniques for personnel infiltration extraction and jettison of ropes The NCM will inspect the rigging to ensure that the aircraft is configured for SPIES operations The PC will verify the aircraft is rigged for SPIES operations b The pilot on the controls P will remain focused primarily outside the aircraft throughout the maneuver for aircraft control and obstacle avoidance The P will announce the intended point of extraction and remain centered over the point with corrections from the other pilot the NCM and SPIES master as required c The pilot not on the controls P and nonrated crewmember NCM will assist in clearing the aircraft and will provide adequate warning of obstacles They will assist the P during the pickup phase of the operation They will advise the P when the slack is out of the rope s and when the SPIES team 4 150 TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED
28. visually clear the aircraft for hazards and obstacles inclusive of what is ahead above below and to the left and right of the aircraft c Prior to performing a descending flight maneuver it may sometimes be desirable to perform clearing S turns to the left or right The clearing S turns will provide the aircrew with a greater visual scan area d During a hover or hovering flight inform the P of any unannounced drift or altitude changes When landing the crew will confirm the suitability of the area NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLE NVG CONSIDERATIONS Using proper scanning techniques will assist in detecting traffic and obstacles and in avoiding spatial disorientation Hazards such as wires are difficult to detect Publication Date TC 3 04 33 4 39 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training Training may be conducted in the aircraft or simulator 2 Evaluation Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft REFERENCES Appropriate common references 4 40 TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 TASK 1028 Perform Hover Power Check CONDITIONS In an H 60 helicopter at an appropriate hover height and with performance planning information available STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 Determine whe
29. 0 Cumulative 1 0 2 0 3 0 1 0 indicates 1 0 hours of time may be logged in a HUD modified SFTS Publication Date TC 3 04 33 B 1 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Appendix B B 4 EXTENDED RANGE FUEL SYSTEM QUALIFICATION TRAINING The ERFS TSP outlines procedures that units will use for initial ERFS qualification The TSP may be obtained by writing to Commander U S Army Aviation Center ATTN ATZQ TDS T Fort Rucker Alabama 36362 5000 ERFS qualification will consist of the following training a Academic training The crewmember will receive training and demonstrate a working knowledge of the topics in table B 2 Table B 2 Extended range fuel system academic training for crewmembers ERFS Academic Instruction Hours ERFS familiarization 1 0 ERFS preflight system test and operation 2 0 ERFS fault analysis 1 0 ERFS airworthiness limitations handling qualities 2 0 ERFS emergency procedures 1 0 ERFS performance planning and weight and balance 1 0 Total Hours 8 0 This applies to RCMs only b Flight training The crewmember will receive a minimum of 1 hour of flight training in the aircraft At a minimum the crewmember will perform the tasks listed in table B 3 Flight training will be conducted with the appropriate amount of fuel in the main and internal external fuel tanks to demonstrate the performance and handling qualities of the aircraf
30. 1174 Perform Holding Procedures eseeeeeeen 4 91 Task 1176 Perform Nonprecision 2 4 92 Task 1178 Perform Precision 4 94 Task 1180 Perform Emergency Global Positioning System Recovery Procedure 4 96 Task 1182 Perform Unusual Attitude 4 98 Task 1184 Respond to Inadvertent Instrument Meteorological Conditions 4 100 Task 1188 Operate Aircraft Survivability 4 102 Task 1190 Perform Hand And Arm Signals sse 4 103 Task 1194 Perform Refueling Operations sse 4 104 Task 1253 Operate Flight Management System Central Display Unit 4 105 Task 1254 Operate Multifunction Display sse 4 106 Task 1260 Operate Digital Map H 60M sess 4 107 Task 1262 Participate In A Crew Level After Action 4 108 Task 2010 Perform Multiaircraft 4 110 Task 2012 Perform Tactical Flight Mission Planning eeeeeene 4 112 Task 2014 Perform Electronic Countermeasures Electronic Counter Countermeasures
31. 2 Nonrated DESCR a Ensure that the aircraft is configured for FRIES operations per TC 21 24 USSOCOM 350 6 and the appropriate airworthiness release AWR b When briefed make timing calls informing passengers of status to insertion point c Make rope calls informing pilots of status of ropes and passengers d Assist the P to maintain proper clearance on the approach and during the maneuver e Assist the P to maintain the aircraft over the intended delivery point and ensure all passengers are safely on the objective and secured in the aircraft prior to rope release and or aircraft departure f Manage and control door straps and cargo doors IPTION 1 Crew actions a The pilot in command PC will conduct a crew and passenger briefing and ensure personnel are familiar with operating limitations and restrictions normal emergency procedures of the FRIES system The NCM will verify rope lengths and inform the PC prior to takeoff The NCM will inspect the rigging to ensure that the aircraft is configured for FRIES operations The PC will verify the aircraft is rigged for FRIES operations b The pilot on the controls P will remain focused primarily outside the aircraft throughout the maneuver and will announce when he or she begins the maneuver The P will also announce the intended point of insertion and pass the FRIES execution command to the nonrated crewmember NCM NCM will relay the FRIES execution command to the fa
32. 2 TC 1 201 the appropriate aircraft operator s manual CL and the unit SOP The P will perform the appropriate steps for the pilot on the controls per the appropriate aircraft operator s manual CL and initiate the appropriate type of landing Publication Date TC 3 04 33 4 153 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 Note The P should be in the right seat which allows the P in the left seat to visually monitor the entire operation 2 Procedures a General recovery procedures over land Crewmembers should be alerted approximately 5 minutes before arriving at pickup site Crewmembers complete all required checks such as rescue hoist control panel switches set hoist circuit breakers set intercommunication system ICS selector switches set and crewmembers reposition for hoist operations Make the approach into the wind if possible and plan to terminate the approach at an altitude that will clear the highest obstacle Select an appropriate reference point to maintain heading and position over the ground Once stabilized over pickup site perform hoist operations according to FM 4 02 2 TC 1 201 the appropriate aircraft operator s manual CL and the unit SOP b Inert patient recovery General format is the same as over land except the medical officer MO is lowered on the hoist and secures the patient to the recovery device Prior to deploying all crewmembers will be briefed on method
33. 20120522 Chapter 4 TASK 2056 Perform Rappelling Operations WARNING Ensure that the rappel master and crewmembers are wearing safety harnesses secured to tie down rings anytime the cabin doors are open Also ensure that all rappellers are on the ground before any rappel ropes are released CONDITIONS In an H 60 helicopter with rappelling equipment installed STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modification 1 Rated a Conduct a crew and passenger safety briefing b Maintain appropriate hover altitude 5 feet allowing at least 20 feet of rope to remain on the ground c Do not allow drift to exceed 5 feet from the intended hover point d Maintain ropes in continuous contact with the ground e Use terminology IAW the unit SOP 2 Nonrated a Ensure that the aircraft is configured for rappelling operations per TC 21 24 and USSOCOM 350 6 when Special Operations Forces SOF personnel are supported b When briefed make timing calls informing passengers of status to insertion point c Make rope calls informing pilots of status of ropes and passengers d Assist the P to maintain proper clearance on the approach and during the maneuver e Assist the P to maintain the aircraft over the intended delivery point and ensure all passengers are safely on the objective or secured in the aircraft prior to rope release and or aircraft departure f Manage and control door straps and cargo doors g
34. 30 Task 1014 Operate Aviation Life Support Equipment 4 31 Task 1016 Perform Internal Load Operations ssssssssseeeeneeene 4 32 Task 1020 Prepare Aircraft for Mission nennen 4 34 Task 1022 Perform Preflight Inspection sseeeeee ene 4 35 Task 1024 Perform Before Starting Engine through Before Leaving Helicopter iz 4 36 Task 1025 Operate Integrated Vehicle Health Monitoring 4 38 Task 1026 Maintain Airspace Surveillance ssssssseeeneeenen 4 39 Task 1028 Perform Hover Power Check sese 4 41 Task 1032 Perform Radio Communication 4 43 Task 1034 Perform Ground Taxi eene 4 45 Task 1038 Perform Hovering Flight sese nennen 4 47 Task 1040 Perform Visual Meteorological Conditions 4 50 Task 1044 Navigate By Pilotage And Dead 4 56 Task 1046 Perform Electronically Aided Navigation 4 57 Task 1048 Perform Fuel Management Procedures seen 4 58 Task 1052 Perform Visual Meteorological Conditions Flight Maneuvers 4 60 Task 1054 Select Landing Zone Pickup Zone Holding
35. 4 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 3 Sling loads For missions requiring sling loads at or near maximum gross weight of the helicopter select larger LZs where barriers have minimum vertical development 4 Surface conditions Consider slopes blowing sand snow or dust Be aware that vegetation may conceal surface hazards for example large rocks ruts or stumps Areas selected should also be free of sources of rotor wash signature 5 Obstacles Hazards within the LZ that cannot be eliminated must be plotted Plan approach and departure routes over lowest obstacles c Meteorological 1 Ceiling and visibility Ceiling and visibility are critical when operating near threat elements Inadvertent instrument meteorological condition IMC recovery can expose the aircraft and crew to radar guided and heat seeking weapons with few options for detection and avoidance If one aircrew of a multiship operation must respond to inadvertent IMC the element of surprise will be lost the assets onboard will not be available for the mission and the entire mission may be at risk 2 Winds Determine approach and departure paths 3 Pressure altitude PA High PA may limit loads and therefore require more sorties Note Avoid planning approach or departure routes into a rising or setting sun or moon Table 4 2 Landing zone sequence example 1 Identify Landing Zone a Altimeter 29 92 Temp PA b Suitability Size slope surface lo
36. 4 Maximum out of ground effect hover weight and torque required chart Publication Date TC 3 04 33 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 4 27 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 MAXIMUM TORQUE AVAILABLE 30 MINUTE LIMIT ANTI ICE OFF T700 GE 700 ENGINE CONTINUED Pressure Altitude PA ATF If the aircraft ATF is between 0 9 and 1 0 Interpolate the maximum torque available as described below Free air temperature FAT EXAMPLE UH 60A Q 8000 0 96 FAT 10 C 96 is 6 10 of the difference between ATF 90 0 9 and 1 00 1 0 Maximum Torque Available 85 81 4 4 X 6 10 2 4 TRQ 1 2 4 83 4 maximum torque available Figure 4 5 Maximum out of ground effect hover weight and torque required chart continued TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training Training will be conducted in the aircraft or academically 2 Evaluation Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft or academically REFERENCES Appropriate common references DD Form 365 4 DA Form 5701 60 R and Task 1012 4 28 TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 TASK 1012 Verify Aircraft Weight and Balance CONDITIONS Given crew data aircraft configuration mission cargo passenger data the appropriate aircraft operator s manual and completed DD Form s 365 4 Weight and Balance Clearance Form F Tactical
37. 5 Altitudes Minimum decision altitude MDA FAF IF IAF MSA Holding pattern altitude Note All WPTs IAF IF FAF MAP and MAHF will be verified by two separate GPS navigation systems such as DGNS EGI PLGR At least one will have PPS If unable to complete a suitability fly ability check due to the operational environment the commander should consider an elevated risk when using this recovery procedure TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training may be conducted in the aircraft 2 Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft REFERENCES Appropriate common references FAA handbook 8260 3 FAA Order 8460 42A and FAA Order 7130 3 Publication Date TC 3 04 33 4 139 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 TASK 2052 Perform Water Bucket Operations WARNING Never dump water onto ground personnel as the water impact could result in injury Minimize hovering or flying slowly over fires The rotor wash fans the flames which may cause more hazards to ground crews When performing this task with cabin doors open ensure that any personnel in the cabin area are wearing safety harnesses secured to tie down rings or are seated in seats with seat belts on Note The water bucket when loaded is a high density load with favorable flight characteristics Reduced velocity to never exceed airspeed V and bank angle limits must be kept in mind Much of the mission prof
38. APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 5 TASK 4000 Perform Prior To Maintenance Test Flight Checks CONDITION In an H 60 helicopter STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 Perform the preflight inspection according to the appropriate aircraft operator s manual checklist CL 2 Determine the suitability of the aircraft for flight and the mission to be performed 3 Determine the maneuvers checks and tasks required during the test flight 4 Ensure logbook entries are made according to DA Pam 738 751 DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a The maintenance test pilot MP should direct assistance from the rated crewmember RCM and nonrated crewmember NCM as necessary b The RCM NCM should assist the MP as directed 2 Procedures a Review the aircraft forms and records to determine the necessary checks and tasks to be performed Use additional publications and references as necessary b Ensure a thorough preflight inspection is conducted with special emphasis on areas or systems where maintenance was performed c Verify all test equipment is installed and secured as required d The MP will conduct the final walk around e Conduct a thorough crew briefing TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training Training may be conducted in the aircraft or academically 2 Evaluation Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft REFERENC
39. AR 95 1 b FM 3 04 203 c FM 1 230 d Appropriate aircraft operator s manual CL MTFs e DOD FLIP f Federal Aviation regulations FARs host nation regulations g Unit local SOPs h Aircraft logbook i FM 3 04 93 2 All instrument tasks a AR 95 1 b FM 3 04 240 c FAA Instrument Flying Handbook FAA H 8083 15A d FAA Instrument Procedures Handbook FAA H 8261 1A e DOD FLIP Ye wm 7 4 4 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 f Aeronautical Information Manual 3 All tasks with environmental considerations FM 3 04 203 4 tasks used in a tactical situation a TC 21 24 b FM3 04 113 c FM 3 04 140 d FM 3 04 111 e FM 90 4 5 medical tasks a FM 4 02 2 b TC 8 800 c Appropriate aircraft operator s manual d Unit SOP and treatment protocol 4 2 TASK LIST The following numbered tasks are H 60 tasks Publication Date TC 3 04 33 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 TASK 1000 Participate in a Crew Mission Briefing CONDITIONS Before flight in an H 60 helicopter given a DA Form 5484 Mission Schedule Brief information and a unit approved crew briefing checklist STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 The pilot in command PC will acknowledge an understanding of
40. Appropriate common standards and transmit the appropriate report using the current signal operating instructions SOD DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a The pilot on the controls P and nonrated crewmember NCM will focus primarily outside the aircraft to clear the aircraft and provide adequate warning of traffic or obstacles The P will announce any maneuver or movement before execution b The pilot not on the controls P will assemble and transmit the report The P will use the correct format as specified in the SOI and transmit the report to the appropriate agency The NCM s must also be able to transmit the report if the P is unable to do so 2 Procedures To save time minimize confusion and ensure completeness report information in an established format Assemble the report in the correct format and transmit it to the appropriate agency Standard formats may be found in the SOI or other sources Note Encryption is required only if information is transmitted by nonsecure means TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training Training may be conducted in the aircraft simulator or academically 2 Evaluation Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft REFERENCES Appropriate common references FM 2 0 and SOI Publication Date TC 3 04 33 4 115 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 TASK 2024 Perform Terrain Flight Navigation CONDITIONS In an H 60 helicopter
41. Certifying Officers 8 July 1998 DOD FLIPS Flight Information Handbook DOD FLIPs are available from Director U S Army Aeromedical Services Agency ATTN ATAS AI 9325 Gunston Road Suite N319 Fort Belvoir VA 22060 5582 NIMA Digital Aeronautical Flight Information File HYPERLINK is available at the following website http 164 214 2 62 products digitalaero index html STANDARDIZATION AGREEMENTS STANAG 3114 Edition 8 Aeromedical Training of Flight Personnel OTHER PUBLICATIONS Air Force Tactics Techniques and Procedures AFTTP 3 3 24 Combat Aircraft Fundamentals HH 60G 25 December 2003 Defense Logistics Agency Manual DLAM 8210 1 Contractor s Flight and Ground Operations 13 November 2002 These publications are available from DLAM ATTN AMCOPS CA 5001 Eisenhower Avenue Alexandria VA 22333 0001 or at the following website http www navair navy mil safety documents DCMA_INST8210_1 htm FAA Order 7110 65 Air Traffic Control 19 February 2004 FAA Order 7130 3 Holding Pattern Criteria 28 April 2003 FAA Order 8260 3 Terminal Instrument Procedures TERPS Handbook FAA Order 84260 42A Helicopter Global Positioning System Non Precision Approach Criteria FAA H 8083 9A Aviation Instructor s Handbook 2008 FAA H 8083 15 Instrument Flying Handbook FAA H 8261 1 Instrument Procedures Handbook These publications are available at the following website www faa gov NAVAIR 00 80T 106 LHA LHD NATOPS Manual 1
42. DCU and advise the P and P of DCU settings prior to mine dispensing In addition the NCM will advise the P of any DCU faults or failures 2 Procedures a Preflight 1 The pilot in command PC will analyze the mission using mission enemy terrain and weather troops and support available time available civil considerations METT TC and determine the number of canisters required to conduct the mission and the initial profile to be used 4 164 TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 Chapter 4 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 during the mine emplacement The PC will select or have designated one or more of the following control measures during mine emplacement e Visual identification start stop markers on the ground e Time lapse tables to determine the minefield length e Canister countdown e Doppler GPS navigation system start stop coordinates 2 The NCMs will ensure the Volcano System is installed all installation checks are completed and the mine canister pallets are loaded per direction of the PC or standing operating procedure SOP 3 The crew will conduct the ground checks according to the appropriate operator s manual CL to confirm the proper operation of the Volcano prior to takeoff b Prior to arrival at target area 1 T 5 minutes Turn the DCU power switch ON and verify no malfunctions indicated during initial built in test BIT 2 T 2 minutes Place the DC
43. DD Form 365 4 from the aircraft logbook to record ZERO FUEL WEIGHT 1 The zero fuel weight on the DD Form 365 4 is computed using standard average or estimated weight for personnel equipment and fuel Actual mission weight could vary from that on the D 4 TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Instructions for Manual Computation of Department of the Army Form 5701 60 R D 2 DD Form 365 4 The method to determine adjusted zero fuel weight is described below If the load configuration is different than that on the 365 4 the PC has two methods available to determine aircraft ZERO FUEL WEIGHT a Method 1 Use the appropriate DD Form 365 4 from the aircraft logbook and add additional weights of cargo and personnel then subtract indicating fuel Record the ZERO FUEL WEIGHT b Method 2 This method is completed in the aircraft and described below Note The PC must adjust for certain hover conditions such as wind and surface condition 2 The zero fuel weight on the DD Form 365 4 is computed using standard average or estimated weight for personnel equipment and fuel Actual weights may vary greatly from those on the DD Form 365 4 Special consideration must be given to the actual weights of any items placed on the helicopter If the PC feels that an accurate weight cannot be estimated compute an adjusted ZERO FUEL WEIGHT The method to determine adjusted zero fuel
44. Do not jink as this will delay departure from the barrage 3 Countering curtain fire Turn to avoid flying into curtain fire when possible When engaged by accurate curtain fire depart the area of fire as quickly as possible via the most direct path 4 Tanks Generally the unguided weapons countermeasures listed above are appropriate defenses against tank fire Additionally tank fire control systems and turret slew rates in azimuth and elevation combined with the limited field of view on the tank gunner s weapon sight make it very difficult to track aircraft with high relative velocity Tank gunners are particularly vulnerable to aircraft displacing in the vertical plane If engaged with a semiautomatic command to line of sight SACLOS missile fired from a tank refer to the procedure listed in paragraph 9c below 5 Artillery countermeasures procedure Artillery can pose a threat to slow speed helicopters particularly operating at a readily identifiable firing position Artillery takes time to shift fires this time interval can be used by helicopters to stay ahead of the enemy s ability to target shift fires onto them If two or more unexplained explosions occur within 500 meters of the aircraft suspect enemy artillery and proceed as follows a Depart the impact area by 500 meters b Reposition every 20 seconds to avoid enemy adjusting shifting fire onto your new location c Report receiving enemy artillery mortar fi
45. Evaluate tasks to ATM standards 3 Conduct debrief and determine status of the aviator as required 4 Determine appropriate entries are made on DA Form 7122 R as required DESCRIPTION The evaluator undergoing the evaluation will receive a scenario in which a flight evaluation is required The evaluated trainer will complete an evaluation using role reversal in order to demonstrate knowledge of the procedures in the ATM The evaluated trainer will conduct an evaluation in accordance with ATM and determine the pilot s level of knowledge in the appropriate subject areas and ATM tasks During the evaluation the evaluated trainer will apply the principles of flight instruction in chapter 3 Once the training is completed the evaluated trainer will debrief the maneuver procedures satisfactorily or unsatisfactory determine recommendations to the commander on the aviator s status in the ATP and formulate a training plan as required The evaluated trainer will determine appropriate entries for the DA Form 7122 R as required TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training Training will be conducted academically in the aircraft or simulator 2 Evaluation Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft or simulator REFERENCES Appropriate common references 4 8 TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 TASK 1003 Conduct Flight Instruction CONDITIONS A unit trai
46. FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 TASK 2034 Perform Masking And Unmasking CONDITIONS In an H 60 helicopter STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 Rated a Perform a thorough map reconnaissance of the desired observation area b Mask the aircraft from enemy visual and electronic detection c Ensure that aircraft exposure time does not exceed 10 seconds during the unmasking d Observe assigned scan sector during unmasking e Maintain a sufficient distance behind obstacles to allow for safe maneuvering f Move to a new location before subsequent unmasking g Report observations if required 2 Nonrated a Scan assigned sector b Announce if or when the lateral sides of the aircraft are exposed or unmasked DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a The pilot in command PC will assign scanning sectors to all crewmembers to maximize the area scanned during the time unmasked b The pilot on the controls P will focus primarily outside the aircraft to clear the aircraft throughout the maneuver The P will announce the type of unmasking before executing the maneuver c The pilot not on the controls P and nonrated crewmember NCM will focus primarily outside the aircraft d They will warn the P of obstacles and unusual or unanticipated drift and altitude changes The NCM s will announce when the sides of the aircraft are exposed or unm
47. IGE was determined in item 9 using maximum PA and temperature When the departure temperature is less than maximum the torque required to hover at a given gross weight is less During the hover power check exceeding the GO NO GO torque value prior to the WHEEL HEIGHT FT used in step 4 above indicates the aircraft is heavier than the MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE GWT OGE IGE as applicable determined in item 9 and will be incapable of OGE IGE operations as applicable when maximum PA and FAT conditions are encountered Note 2 If MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE GWT OGE IGE item 9 was limited by the maximum gross weight per the aircraft operator s manual chapter 5 exceeding this torque value prior to the WHEEL HEIGHT FT used in step 4 above indicates the aircraft is above the maximum structural weight limit k Item 11 MAX HOVER HEIGHT IGE If OGE capability does not exist use the appropriate HOVER chart to compute the MAX HOVER HEIGHT IGE as described below 1 Step 1 Enter the HOVER chart at the appropriate FREE AIR TEMP C and move right to the appropriate PRESSURE ALTITUDE 1 000 FT then move down to the AIRCRAFT GWT 1 000 LB item 3 then move left to the WHEEL HEIGHT FT lines 2 Step 2 Reenter the bottom of the HOVER chart at the TORQUE PER ENGINE IGE at the dual engine MAX TORQUE AVAILABLE item 8 then up to the intersection from step above Interpolate hover height as required Record the MAX HOVER HEIGHT IGE Note 1 If OGE capa
48. LB at the AIRCRAFT GWT item 3 departure data the aircraft cannot maintain single engine level flight for the conditions As fuel is consumed single engine capability may become possible 2 Alternative or external load configuration Note 1 The torque change to compensate for drag alternative or external load configuration at minimum indicated airspeed is often negligible and not computed Note 2 The maximum indicated airspeed single engine is adjusted for alternate or external load configuration as follows a Step 1 Enter the CRUISE chart at MAX IAS SINGLE ENGINE in step 3 above then move left or right to the curved dashed line Move up to read ATRQ FOR DRAG AREA OF 10 SQFT AF b Step 2 Multiply the ATRQ times the drag multiplying factor Subtract one half the result from the maximum torque available value used initially in step 1 above c Step 3 Reenter the bottom of the CRUISE chart at the adjusted torque value and follow the slant of the line up to the second intersection of the GW 1 000 LB at the AIRCRAFT GWT item 3 departure data Read left or right for MAX IAS SINGLE ENGINE Record the adjusted MAX IAS SINGLE ENGINE Note If the adjusted torque value is to the left of does not intersect the GW 1 000 LB at the AIRCRAFT GWT item 3 departure data the aircraft cannot maintain single engine level flight for the conditions As fuel is consumed single engine capability may become possible
49. Note 1 Compare the CRUISE TORQUE in step 2 with the CONT TORQUE from step 4 to determine whether the aircraft will be operating in a time limited condition above maximum continuous power for this IAS Note 2 The continuous torque available may exceed the transmission torque limit During normal aircraft operations the aircraft operator s manual chapter 5 torque limitations shall not be exceeded Note 3 Adjust the continuous torque available as required for planned use of engine bleed air accessories anti ice cockpit cabin heaters AMOGS OBOGS etc according to the operator s manual Note 4 For alternative or external load configurations refer to the operator s manual chapter 7 7 section VI DRAG Determine and add together the appropriate drag multiplying factors 2 Alternative or external load configuration a Step 1 Enter the appropriate cruise chart at the cruise speed IAS in item 4 above b Step 2 Move left or right as appropriate to the ATRQ FOR DRAG AREA OF 10 SQ FT OF AF dashed line and then up to find the change in torque percent for each 10 square feet of drag c Step 3 Multiply the ATRQ times the drag multiplying factor d Step 4 Add or subtract the value in step 2 to from the uncorrected clean or high drag cruise torque value recorded in step 2 above Do not exceed the dual engine transmission torque limit Record adjusted CRUISE TORQUE DUAL ENGINE Note 1 If the new torque value exc
50. Training will be conducted in the aircraft 2 Evaluation Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft REFERENCES Appropriate common references and the appropriate airworthiness releases 4 34 TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 TASK 1022 Perform Preflight Inspection CONDITIONS With an H 60 helicopter and given the appropriate aircraft operator s manual checklist CL STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 Rated a Perform the preflight inspection per the appropriate aircraft operator s manual CL b Review aircraft logbook for service intervals and deficiencies c Enter appropriate information on DA Form 2408 13 Aircraft Status Information Record and DA Form 2408 13 1 Aircraft Inspection and Maintenance Record per DA Pam 738 751 if required 2 Nonrated Assist in all before preflight and preflight duties per the appropriate aircraft operator s manual CL unit standing operating procedure SOP and for the designated duty position DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a The pilot in command PC is responsible for ensuring that a preflight inspection is conducted using the appropriate aircraft operator s manual CL The PC may direct other crewmembers to complete elements of the preflight inspection as applicable and will verify that all checks have been completed according to the appropriate
51. UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 6 Aircrew Coordination This chapter describes the background of aircrew coordination development It also describes the aircrew coordination principles and objectives as found in the Army Aircrew Coordination Enhancement Training Program Note Digitization of the crew compartments has expanded and redefined the lines of responsibility for each crewmember The enhanced ability for either pilot to perform most aircraft system functions from his or her crew station breaks down the standard delineation of duties and has added capabilities and potential distractions in training and in combat This could mean that during an unforeseen event one pilot may attempt to resolve the situation rather than seeking assistance from or even communicating that action with the other crewmember It is essential for the pilot in command PC to brief specific duties prior to stepping into the aircraft Effective sharing of tasks relies on good crew coordination and information management 6 1 BACKGROUND AND PLANNING STRATEGY An analysis of U S Army aviation accidents revealed that a significant percentage of aircraft accidents resulted from one or more aircrew coordination errors committed during and even before the flight mission Often an accident was the result of a sequence of undetected crew errors that combined to produce a catastrophic result Additional research showed that even when crews actually avoided potential accidents
52. Use terminology IAW the unit SOP DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a The pilot in command PC will conduct a crew and passenger briefing and ensure personnel understand their responsibilities during rappelling operations including aircraft safety and actions in the event of an emergency The PC will also emphasize procedural techniques for clearing recovery and jettison of ropes The NCM will inspect the rigging to ensure that the aircraft is configured for rappelling operations The PC will verify the aircraft is rigged for rappelling operations The NCM will verify rope lengths and inform the PC prior to takeoff b The pilot on the controls P will remain focused primarily outside the aircraft and will announce when he begins the maneuver The P will announce the intended point of insertion and pass the rappelling execution command to the nonrated crewmember NCM The NCM will relay the rappelling execution command to the rope master RM and remain centered over the target with corrections from the NCM or rappel master as required c The pilot not on the controls P and NCM will assist in clearing the aircraft and will provide adequate warning of obstacles They will also assist the P in maintaining a stable hover by providing the P with information regarding drift of the aircraft The P will also monitor cockpit indications Publication Date TC 3 04 33 4 147 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522
53. accordance with TC 8 800 MEDIC and STP 8 91 W15 SM TG b Use all medical equipment required for appropriate patient treatment and monitoring per the manufacturer s instructions c Coordinate loading procedures 2 Movement to aircraft a Direct escort ambulatory patients to seats and ensure they have been briefed Load and secure litter patients medical equipment and baggage as required Advise the PC when prepared for departure Note If aircraft is equipped with extended range fuel system ERFS tanks loading and unloading of patients should be performed from both sides of the aircraft because the litter support unit may need to be places at a 45 degree angle from the load position b Additional patient restraint Always try to identify the need to restrain a patient before loading If possible have the requesting agency chemically restrain the patient Restraining a patient in flight is difficult and dangerous Tell the patient gently and repeatedly why the devices are being used that they are for the patient s safety and to prevent further injury whether the patient seems able to respond or not Reassure the patient that someone will always be near to help and care for them The normal reaction of a confused patient is to resist restriction of movement Restrain the patient according to current patient treatment protocols Note Physical restraints pose potential risk for injury to the patient in the form of musculos
54. aircraft are allowed to depart their assigned altitude missed approach procedure with aircraft in the holding pattern frequencies and command control procedures TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training Training may be conducted in the aircraft or simulator 2 Evaluation Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft REFERENCES Appropriate common references and the unit SOP Publication Date TC 3 04 33 4 97 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 TASK 1182 Perform Unusual Attitude Recovery CONDITION In an H 60 helicopter STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 Analyze aircraft attitude 2 Without delay use correct recovery procedures a Attitude level the wings on the attitude indicator b Heading maintain heading turn only to avoid known obstacles c Torque adjust torque as necessary d Trim trim aircraft as necessary Airspeed adjust airspeed as necessary DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a The trainer or evaluator will place the aircraft in unusual attitude and transfer aircraft controls to the pilot not on the controls P The P will acknowledge the transfer of controls the unusual attitude and recover the aircraft as pilot on the controls P b The P will remain focused inside the aircraft during this maneuver and will acknowledge the unusual attitude recovery and transfer of aircraft co
55. aircraft operator s manual CL The PC will report any aircraft discrepancies that may affect the mission and will ensure that the appropriate information is entered on DA Form 2408 13 and DA Form 2408 13 1 b The crewmembers will complete the assigned elements and report the results to the PC 2 Procedures a Ensure the preflight inspection is conducted per the appropriate aircraft operator s manual CL If circumstances permit accomplish preflight inspection during daylight hours b The nonrated crewmember if available will ensure all cowlings and equipment are secured upon completing the preflight NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLE NVG CONSIDERATIONS If performing the preflight inspection during the hours of darkness a flashlight with an unfiltered lens to supplement available lighting should be used Hydraulic leaks oil leaks and other defects are difficult to see using a flashlight with a colored lens FM 3 04 203 contains details on preflight inspection at night TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training Training will be conducted at the aircraft 2 Evaluation Evaluation will be conducted at the aircraft REFERENCES Appropriate common references and DA Pam 738 751 Publication Date TC 3 04 33 4 35 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 TASK 1024 Perform Before Starting Engine through Before Leaving Helicopter Checks CONDITIONS In an H 60 helicopte
56. and cargo DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a The pilot in command PC will conduct a thorough crew briefing and ensure all crewmembers and support personnel are familiar with fat hawk operations emergency procedures and communication procedures The PC will confirm that required power is available by comparing the information from the performance planning card PPC to the hover power check b The pilot not on the controls P and nonrated crewmember NCM will assist refuel rearm teams in loading and unloading the aircraft They act as fire safety guards during refuel operations as directed or briefed 2 Procedures a Preflight After receiving a mission briefing ensure that required fuel and ammunition is on hand Ensure that it is installed secured inventoried and operational before flight according to the unit standing operating procedure SOP Conduct a thorough crew and support team briefing covering as a minimum the following landing direction frequencies and call signs emergency procedures execution security setup refuel rearm recovery dispersal plan alternate setup location site layout and loads b Arrival The designated primary rearming refueling aircraft will set up first The secondary rearming refueling aircraft will carry a duplicate two point FARE for backup The secondary aircraft will loiter outside the weapon s surface danger area and no closer than 150 feet from the rearm refuel site The security team wil
57. and given a mission briefing and required maps and materials STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 Rated a During nap of the earth NOE flight surface to 25 feet above highest obstacle AHO know the en route location within 200 meters b During contour flight 25 to 80 feet AHO or low level flight 80 to 200 AHO know the en route location within 500 meters c Locate each objective within 100 meters d Arrive at each objective at the planned time 1 minute if an objective arrival time was given in the mission briefing 2 Nonrated Announce significant terrain features to aid in navigation DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a The pilot on the controls P will remain focused outside the aircraft and respond to navigation instructions and cues given by the pilot not on the controls P The P will acknowledge commands issued by the P for heading and airspeed changes necessary to navigate the desired course The P and NCM will announce significant terrain features to assist the P in navigation b The P will furnish the P with the information required to remain on course The P will announce all plotted wires before approaching their location The P will use rally terms and terrain features to convey instructions to the P Examples of these terms are Turn left to your 10 o clock Stop turn and Turn down the valley to the left If using the horizontal situation indicato
58. are clear of the main landing gear TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training Training may be conducted in the aircraft or simulator 2 Evaluation Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft REFERENCES Appropriate common references 5 10 TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Maintenance Test Pilot Tasks TASK 4113 Perform Integrated Vehicle Health Monitoring System Operations H 60M CONDITION In an H 60M helicopter STANDARDS Appropriate common standards DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a The maintenance test pilot MP will direct assistance from the rated crewmember nonrated crewmember RCM NCM as required b The RCM and NCM will assist the MP as directed 2 Procedures Enter the IVHMS screen and configure IVHMS for the required usage e IVHMS main e IVHMS maintenance e IVHMS administration e Mechanical diagnostics e Vibration diagnostics e Rotor tuning Exceedances e Usage TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training Training may be conducted in the aircraft or simulator 2 Evaluation Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft or simulator REFERENCES Appropriate common references Publication Date TC 3 04 33 5 11 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 5 TASK 4156 Perform Hover Checks CONDITION In an H 60 helicopter STANDARDS Appropriate
59. clearing the barriers depending on aircraft weight speed surface composition and size of the takeoff area Some situations requiring this maneuver will usually result in very marginal single engine characteristics This increased risk factor will be addressed during the mission risk assessment process c Rolling takeoff A rolling takeoff may be used when hover power for takeoff is marginal or insufficient and a takeoff must be made or as an alternate method of takeoff when sufficient power is available dissipate dust reduce rotor downwash Use the rotor system thrust to accelerate the aircraft to a more efficient speed for flight Note For training use 10 percent torque below the aircraft 10 foot hover torque to simulate the maximum torque available 1 Verify that the takeoff surface is suitable for the maneuver to include abort stopping distance and select ground reference points 2 With appropriate crew actions completed select ground reference points for longitudinal alignment with the desired takeoff direction Maintain aircraft position with neutral cyclic and increase the collective to establish the aircraft light on the wheels The amount of percentage torque will depend on gross weight Begin accelerating the aircraft forward by smoothly applying forward cyclic while progressively increasing the collective to a power setting that will ensure that the main landing gear wheels remain in contact with the surface unt
60. created by vehicle motion to increase the air pressure inside of the engine Maximum airspeed in level flight with maximum continuous power being applied velocity never exceed airspeed limit TC 3 04 33 Glossary 7 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 _33 UH60 FAD 20120522 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 References These publications are sources for additional information on the topics in this TC Most JPs are found at http www dtic mil doctrine doctrine htm Most Army publications are found online at http www apd army mil SOURCES USED These are the sources quoted or paraphrased in this publication JOINT AND MULTISERVICE PUBLICATIONS JP 3 04 Joint Shipboard Helicopter Operations 30 September 08 ARMY PUBLICATIONS AR 40 8 Temporary Flying Restrictions Due to Exogenous Factors 16 May 2007 AR 70 62 Airworthiness Qualification of Aircraft Systems 21 May 2007 AR 95 1 Flight Regulations 12 November 2008 AR 95 20 Contractor s Flight and Ground Operations 1 March 2007 AR 95 27 Operational Procedures for Aircraft Carrying Hazardous Materials 11 November 1994 AR 600 105 Aviation Service of Rated Army Officers 22 June 2010 AR 600 106 Flying Status for Nonrated Army Aviation Personnel 08 December 1998 ATTP 3 18 04 Special Reconnaissance Tactics Techniques and Procedures for Special Forces 5 January 2011 ATTP 3 18 11 Special Forces Military Fr
61. criteria Monitor the flight controls Monitor the master warning FIRE light e Noting the engine gas generator speed Ng SPEED at the time the ENG OUT light extinguishes b Prior to checks confirm the following Tail wheel is locked The parking brake set Other cockpit crewmember has the controls The rotor disk area 15 clear Personnel are clear of the main landing gear TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training Training may be conducted in the aircraft or simulator 2 Evaluation Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft REFERENCES Appropriate common references Publication Date TC 3 04 33 5 9 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 5 TASK 4090 Perform Engine Run Up And Systems Checks CONDITION In an H 60 helicopter at 100 percent RPM R STANDARDS Appropriate common standards DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a The maintenance test pilot MP will direct assistance from the rated crewmember RCM and nonrated crewmember NCM as necessary b The RCM NCM and any ground support personnel will assist the MP as directed 2 Procedures Perform the following checks according to the applicable maintenance test flight MTF manual Prior to initiation of each procedure confirm the following e Tail wheel is locked e The parking brake is set Other cockpit crewmember has the controls e The rotor disk area is clear Personnel
62. demonstrate crew coordination and airspace surveillance proficiency in all other tasks listed in the DAY and NIGHT column of chapter 2 table 2 4 page 2 7 Technical tasks listed in chapter 2 table 2 4 and table 2 6 will be completed regardless of flight mode Flight training consists of 10 flight hours This must consist of at least 1 hour of night unaided flight time The evaluation may be a continual evaluation The commander may reduce the total flight time to no less than 6 0 hours based on a recommendation from the SP IP SI or FI concerning the crewmember s proficiency This recommendation will be annotated in the remarks section of the crewmembers DA Form 7122 R If the commander has selected CBRN requirements as part of the units METL all tasks with an X marked under the CBRN column will also be trained evaluated as required 2 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Appendix D Instructions for Manual Computation of Department of the D 1 Army Form 5701 60 R DEPARTURE DATA a Item 1 PA Record forecast maximum pressure altitude PA for the mission location and current PA for time and location of departure b Item 2 FAT Record forecast maximum free air temperature FAT for the mission location and FAT for time and location of departure Note Maximum PA and temperature will be used when computing all items in the departure section except for PREDIC
63. desired required information Use the correct radio call sign when acknowledging each communication When advised to change frequencies acknowledge instructions Select the new frequency as soon as possible unless instructed to do so at a specific time fix or Publication Date TC 3 04 33 4 43 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 altitude Use radio communication procedures and phraseology as appropriate for the area of operations Use standard terms and phraseology for all intercommunications b Procedure for two way radio failure Attempt to identify and correct the malfunctioning radio and announce the results If two way radio failure is confirmed comply with procedure outlined in the Flight Information Handbook TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training Training may be conducted academically 2 Evaluation Evaluation may be conducted in the aircraft or simulator Additionally two way radio failure may be conducted academically REFERENCES Appropriate common references and Department of Transportation Federal Aviation Administration DOT FAA 7110 65 4 44 TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 TASK 1034 Perform Ground Taxi CONDITIONS In an H 60 helicopter and the aircraft cleared STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications Maintain speed approp
64. during elevator training 2 Procedures To perform a FRIES operation execute a terrain flight approach to the insertion point On final adjust airspeed and altitude during the approach to stop over the insertion point at a predetermined hover height not to exceed rope length At a stabilized hover P announces the fast rope execution command ROPES ROPES ROPES NCM will announce ROPES OUT upon the first rope leaving the aircraft NCM will announce ROPERS AWAY upon the first roper exiting the aircraft NCM will announce ROPES CLEAR only when all ropers are safely on the insertion point and the ropes are either released or retrieved inside the aircraft P will remain over the insertion point at a stabilized hover until all ropers and ropes are clear NCM will announce to the P CLEARED FOR FLIGHT upon verifying all ropes and ropers are clear NCM will announce TAIL UP if contact is likely NCM will ensure approximately 5 feet of fast rope remains in contact with the insertion point during FRIES operations Note An OGE hover especially at night may cause the loss of all normal visual hover cues NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLE NVG CONSIDERATIONS When hovering above 25 feet the P may have difficulty in maintaining altitude and position Use the radar altimeter to assist in maintaining altitude Use references such as lights tops of trees or manmade objects above and to the sides of the aircraft By e
65. from the P or according to the crew briefing d The P and NCM will assist in clearing the aircraft and will provide adequate warning of obstacles They will announce when their attention is focused inside and again when attention is reestablished outside e The NCM will remain primarily focused on the bucket The NCM will guide the P during the bucket pickup advise of the bucket condition in flight provide directions and assistance when to dump the water and direct the P when setting down the bucket f The NCM will advise the P of any water bucket faults or failures g Sling load procedures according to Task 2048 will be used for normal sling load techniques and load call outs The NCM will advise the P when the water bucket is in the water filling full water deploying and empty The NCM will instruct the P as necessary to keep the electrical attachment assembly from entering the water 2 Procedures a Preflight 1 The PC will analyze the mission using mission enemy terrain and weather troops and support available time available civil considerations METT TC and determine the amount of water required to conduct the mission and the initial profile to be used during the water emplacement 2 The NCM s will ensure the water bucket is installed all installation checks are completed according to unit standing operating procedure SOP and the water bucket operator s manual 3 The crew will conduct the ground c
66. given at night by an IP SP FI or SI as appropriate 2 H 60 aircraft NVG qualification Each crewmember must complete the requirements outlined in paragraph 2 1b 1 with the following exception during flight training RCMs will not have the 10 hour flight requirement but must demonstrate proficiency in the tasks outlined in table 2 1 page 2 2 Publication Date TC 3 04 33 2 1 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 2 2 2 Table 2 1 Flight tasks for initial night vision goggle qualification night vision goggle refresher training 2086 Operate Aviator s Night Vision Imaging System Heads Up Display c Aircraft series qualification Aircraft series qualifications will be accomplished according to the approved USAACE POI and this ATM appendix B as applicable d Initial IP MP IE FI MOS validation Initial validation of a crewmember s qualifications following a MOS producing course of instruction school H 60 Instructor Pilot Course Maintenance Test Pilot Course Instrument Flight Examiners Course and Nonrated Instructor Course will be conducted in the aircraft upon return from that course and in the aircraft at each new duty station e Additional system qualifications Systems that require qualification are listed in appendix B Qualification will be annotated on the DA Form 7122 R Crew Member Training Record and DA Form 759 Individual Flight Record and Flight Certi
67. however DSP can also occur during taxi and down slope landings Publication Date TC 3 04 33 4 45 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLE NVG CONSIDERATIONS The landing light should be used for unaided ground taxi and the searchlight with installed infrared IR bypass filter when wearing night vision goggles NVG Using proper scanning techniques will help detect obstacles that must be avoided SNOW SAND DUST CONSIDERATIONS If ground reference is lost because of blowing snow sand dust lower the collective neutralize the flight controls and apply wheel brakes until visual reference is reestablished When initiating ground taxi apply pressure and counterpressure to the pedals to ensure the wheels skis are not frozen to the ground if appropriate Use caution when taxiing near other maneuvering aircraft because of limited visual references and possible relative motion illusion Note Because of decreased visual references and relative motion illusions limit ground speed to a safe rate Note At night use of the landing search or anti collision lights may cause spatial disorientation in blowing snow sand dust TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training Training may be conducted in the aircraft or simulator 2 Evaluation Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft or simulator REFERENCES Appropriate common references 4 46 TC 3 04 33 Publi
68. in maintaining a stable hover during the water pickup TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training Training will be conducted in the aircraft 2 Evaluation Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft REFERENCES Appropriate common references AR 70 62 FM 4 20 197 FM 3 34 210 and the Water Bucket airworthiness release Publication Date TC 3 04 33 4 143 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 Chapter ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 4 TASK 2054 Perform Fast Rope Insertion And Extraction System Operations WARNING Ensure that crewmembers in the cabin area are wearing safety harnesses secured to tie down rings anytime the cabin doors are open Also ensure that all ropers are on the ground before any ropes are released CONDITIONS In an H 60 helicopter with fast rope insertion and extraction system FRIES equipment installed STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 Rated a Conduct a crew and passenger briefing b Maintain entry altitude as directed 10 feet c Maintain maximum entry airspeed of 80 knots indicated airspeed KIAS 5 KGS or as appropriate for conditions d Maintain track aligned with landing direction e Perform a smooth controlled termination to a hover over the insertion point f Maintain appropriate hover height 5 feet not to exceed rope height g Do not allow drift to exceed 5 feet from the intended hover point
69. light if required and perform appropriate emergency procedure d MO determines the appropriate amount of oxygen O2 to be delivered MO opens desired station sets and verifies flow rate Place mask on patient and administer O2 MO installs fitting to keep material out of suction pump if pump becomes contaminated See the appropriate aircraft operator s manual f The CE or MO will select the appropriate mode of operation for the environmental control system ECS 2 Complete the loading of litter and ambulatory patients Adjust litter lifts as required to facilitate loading patients Ensure proper en route care is provided Select appropriate mode heat air conditioning or vent on the ECS to maintain a comfortable cabin temperature TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training Training may be conducted in the aircraft 2 Evaluation Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft REFERENCES Appropriate common references and the medical equipment manufacturer s instructions Publication Date TC 3 04 33 4 183 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 TASK 2127 Perform Combat Maneuvering Flight CONDITIONS In an H60 helicopter in a simulated or actual tactical environment STANDARDS Establish entry altitude 100 feet Establish entry airspeed 10 knots indicated airspeed KIAS Maintain aircraft within operating limits and flight envelope Perform cr
70. listed evaluation M Required for annual maintenance evaluation 4000 Perform Prior To Maintenance Test Flight Checks Respond To Critical Situations During Test Flight X X Maneuvers 4081 Perform Before Starting Engine Checks X 4088 Perform Starting Engine Checks 4090 Perform Engine Run Up and Systems Checks X 4113 Perform Integrated Vehicle Health Monitoring System Operations H 60M petomMowrchecks X X X ams petomim igmCheks X X X 4200 Perform Backup Tail Rotor Servo Check X X X M 2 ostetoroe Redeem Shock Disable Low Rotor Revolutions Per Minute Check 4204 Perform Compasses Turn Rate And Vertical x x x Publication Date TC 3 04 33 2 11 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 Cha ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 pter 2 Table 2 8 Maintenance test pilot task list Legend Day Day mode of flight Night Night unaided mode of flight NVG Night Vision Goggle mode of flight Eval Maneuver listed is required to be evaluated on the M listed evaluation Required for annual maintenance evaluation Task Title Day Night Gyros Checks A L Perform Maximum Power Check 1 LX X X M Perform Vibration Absorber Check And Tuning i Px x xXj M Perform Autorotation Revolutions Per Minute Check Perform Vn Check 4284 Perform Engine Shutdown Checks 4288 Perform Gust Lock Rotor B
71. o clock position to allow the ability to visual monitor the 3 or 9 o clock blade Have additional outside personnel monitor the tail rotor d Trim system checks Note Maintain collective at mid position for the duration of these checks 1 Cyclic force gradient check Center the cyclic Perform the check according to the applicable MTF manual with the following additional information Without releasing trim sequentially displace and then release the cyclic forward aft left and right approximately 2 inches to verify that a force gradient exists The trim should remain engaged and no caution or failure advisory lights should appear Repeat in all four quadrants 2 Yaw pedal force gradient check Perform the check according to the applicable MTF manual with the following additional information a Pedals centered without disengaging trim attempt to displace each pedal and confirm that a force gradient exists b Depress the left pedal trim switch only and displace the pedal Release the trim switch Confirm that trim maintains the new reference position by attempting to displace the pedal without releasing trim Continue checking by re referencing pedals through full range of travel Repeat for the right pedal e Stabilator check Publication Date TC 3 04 33 5 7 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 5 Note Keep the stabilator area clear throughout the checks Verbally con
72. of consumption DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a Prior to takeoff the crew will verify the required amount of fuel is onboard at the time of takeoff The pilot not on the controls P or nonrated crewmember NCM will record the initial fuel figures fuel flow computation burnout and reserve times The P or NCM will announce when initiating the fuel check and when completing the fuel check The P or NCM also will announce the results of the fuel check b The pilot on the controls P will acknowledge the results of the fuel check c The pilot in command PC will confirm the results of the fuel check d If applicable the P will announce when the fuel transfer switch or fuel selector lever s are repositioned and when the fuel transfer balancing operation is completed e The NCM will acknowledge and monitor the fuel transfer balancing operation until the operation is completed 2 Procedures a When performing the before takeoff check determine the total fuel onboard and compare it with fuel required for the mission If the fuel onboard is inadequate add sufficient fuel or abort or revise the mission b Initial airborne fuel reading Within 10 minutes after leveling off or within 10 minutes of entering into the mission profile record the total fuel quantity and the time of reading Complete the fuel consumption check 15 to 30 minutes after taking the initial airborne fuel reading Determine whether the remaining fuel is sufficient to com
73. operations per air traffic control ATC directives local standing operating procedure SOP and FM 3 04 203 NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLE NVG CONSIDERATIONS The P will focus primarily outside the aircraft and should concentrate on obstacle avoidance and aircraft control The P will make all internal cockpit checks TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training Training may be conducted in aircraft or simulator 2 Evaluation Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft REFERENCES Appropriate common references 4 60 TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 TASK 1054 Select Landing Zone Pickup Zone Holding Area WARNING Not all hazards will be shown on a map When using a map reconnaissance to determine suitability the added risk of unknown hazards must be addressed during the mission risk assessment process CONDITIONS IN AN H 60 HELICOPTER GIVEN A MAP OR PHOTO DATA STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 Perform map photo or visual reconnaissance 2 Determine that the landing zone LZ pickup zone PZ or holding area is suitable for operations and provide accurate and detailed information to supported unit if applicable 3 For power critical landings Establish altitude airspeed and flight path for conducting a high reconnaissance commensurate with terrain and environmenta
74. organic ASE having received simulated enemy fire STANDARDS APPROPRIATE COMMON STANDARDS AND THE FOLLOWING 1 Perform appropriate evasive maneuver EVM communications 2 Perform appropriate EVM for the type of threat 3 Evaluate any damage to aircraft 4 Recommend or execute a course of action DESCRIPTION 1 EVMs consist of a combination of classified and unclassified TTP used to defeat enemy surface to air fire SAFIRE and aircraft threats A complete discussion of EVM requires aircrews to consult critical additional classified information When specific strengths and weaknesses of U S aircraft and survivability equipment are tied to a specific threat weapon system the information is classified SECRET NOFORN 2 Consult with local TACOPS officer for latest area of operations AOR threat systems If the enemy cannot be avoided through tactical flight procedures then EVMs are used to avoid or minimize exposure in the enemy s weapon engagement zone WEZ The WEZ is defined by the four dimensions of the weapon s maximum range R MAX minimum range R MIN maximum altitude minimum altitude and the weapons time of flight TOF Traditionally Army helicopters employ tactical flight mission planning tactical flight procedures and standoff to avoid the enemy WEZ by staying outside R MAX Where the enemy locations are unpredictable other aspects of the WEZ must be exploited to improve aircraft survivability Once engaged the crew s
75. pattern obstacles and MSA It also includes the terms e FOR VFR TRAINING and EMERGENCY USE ONLY twice e PPS REQUIRED c Minimums section The minimums section will include the following The minimum descent altitude visibility and the height above landing HAL Use figure 4 13 to compute the landing visibility minimum based on HAL d Landing area sketch The landing area sketch includes a drawing diagram of the landing area and the elevation of the highest obstacle within the landing area if applicable e Prior to publication the diagram will include as a minimum all items included in the example diagram HAL 250 475 feet 476 712 feet 713 950 feet Landing Visibility Minimum SM Figure 4 13 Height above landing diagram 4 138 TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 b Flight Check Complete a flight check under VMC in an aircraft to finalize the procedure and validate the diagram Once a successful flyability suitability check has been completed the diagram will be validated by the developer in the lower marginal data area Once validated by the developer the procedure must be approved by the appropriate authority in the lower marginal data area prior to publication The flight should validate the following 1 Locations IAF IF FAF MAP and MAHF 2 Obstacles 3 Approach course 4 Obstacle clearance
76. pilot on the controls P will announce the intention to perform a specific maneuver and will remain focused outside the aircraft The P is responsible for clearing the aircraft and obstacle avoidance c The pilot not on the controls P and nonrated crewmember NCM as duties permit will assist in clearing the aircraft and will provide adequate warning of obstacles unusual drift or altitude changes The P and NCM will announce when attention is focused inside the aircraft and again when attention is reestablished outside d When landing the crew will confirm the suitability of the area and that the aircraft is clear of barriers 2 Procedures a Maintain close surveillance of the surrounding airspace Keep the aircraft clear from other aircraft and obstacles by maintaining visual surveillance close mid and far areas of the surrounding airspace Inform the crew immediately of air traffic or obstacles that pose a threat to the aircraft Call out the location of traffic or obstacles by the clock altitude and distance method The 12 o clock position is at the nose of the aircraft Give distance in miles or fractions of miles for air traffic and in feet for ground obstacles When reporting air traffic specify the type of aircraft fixed wing or helicopter and if known the model The altitude of the air traffic should be reported as the same altitude higher or lower than the altitude at which you are flying b Prior to changing altitude
77. primary goal should be to limit enemy weapon effectiveness and exit the WEZ as quickly as possible by applying the appropriate EVM and suppress the system if able Aircrews should anticipate the possibility of multiple weapons systems arrayed with interlocking fields of fire when conducting EVM Aircrews must also be aware of the difference between cover and concealment during tactical flight 3 Considerations When tactics are insufficient the crew will select and apply the appropriate EVM Any EVM must be used in concert with aircraft survivability equipment ASE onboard weapon systems and other TTP to minimize the SAFIRE threats to the aircraft EVM are broadly categorized by whether the enemy weapon is guided or unguided Generally the aircrew must defeat the weapon system for guided weapons and defeat the gunner for unguided weapons Both guided and unguided weapons require time to get to the target based on weapon to target range and projectile velocity At some ranges the TOF can be exploited to allow the pilot to maneuver the aircraft out of danger However the time required varies greatly depending on the type of weapon and TOF Tank main gun rounds and automatic antiaircraft AAA cannons have extremely high velocities and very short TOF whereas Rocket Propelled Grenades RPG and certain antitank guided missiles ATGMs have comparatively slow TOF 4 Communication Intra cockpit and inter flight communication during a SAFIRE or air at
78. rendezvous point 4 Actions to be performed by P P and NCM 5 General crew duties Announce when focused inside time limit appropriate for conditions when VMC a Pilot on the controls P 1 Fly the aircraft primary focus outside when VMC inside when IMC 2 Cross check systems and instruments 3 Monitor transmit on radios as directed by the PC b Pilot not on the controls 1 Tune radios and set transponder 2 Navigate 3 Copy clearances ATIS and other information 4 Cross check systems and instruments 5 Monitor transmit on radios as directed by the PC 6 Read and complete checklist items as required 7 Set adjust switches and systems as required c Crew chief medic and other assigned crewmembers 1 Secure passengers and cargo 2 Perform other duties assigned by the PC 7 Time and place for crew level after action review 8 Crewmembers questions comments and acknowledgment of mission briefing Publication Date TC 3 04 33 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 TASK 1001 Administer Flight Evaluation CONDITIONS An evaluator unit trainer UT in an H 60 helicopter with an evaluator SP IP IE ME SI FI and an evaluation scenario given by the evaluator to the evaluatee STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 Conduct an evaluation in accordance with chapter 3 2
79. response and aircraft center of gravity CG b Hovering flight Adjust the cyclic to maintain a stationary hover or to move in the desired direction Control heading with the pedals and maintain altitude with the collective The rate of movement and altitude should be appropriate for existing conditions To return to a stationary hover apply cyclic in the opposite direction while maintaining altitude with the collective and heading with the pedals Coupled hovering flight Engage coupled hover mode by either pressing Z axis on the cyclic trim beeper or manually selecting HVR on the flight director display control panel FD DCP Directional flight is achieved by moving the cyclic trim beeper in the direction of desired travel until desired rate of movement is established The rate of movement and altitude should be appropriate for existing conditions Change altitude by adjusting either the collective trim beeper or the RALT P SYNC knob on the FD DCP Note Air taxi is the preferred method for ground movements on airports provided ground operations and conditions permit Unless otherwise requested or instructed pilots are expected to remain below 100 feet above ground level AGL However if a higher than normal airspeed or altitude is desired the request should be made prior to lift off The pilot is solely responsible for selecting a safe airspeed for the altitude operation being conducted Using air taxi enables the pi
80. ship Do not allow the rotor to dip down to a low position as it could be fatal to deck crews and those entering or exiting the aircraft CONDITIONS In an H 60 helicopter STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 Rated a Comply with arrival and departure and landing signal enlisted LSE controller instructions b Set the parking brakes before landing c Ensure a green deck before landing d Perform a visual meteorological conditions VMC approach e Perform a VMC takeoff 2 Nonrated a Ensure aircraft remains clear of the ship during approach and takeoff b Ensure tail wheel is cleared on deck c Ensure aircraft is chained or moored before exiting when required d Use terminology IAW SOP DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a The pilot on the controls P will focus primarily outside the aircraft to provide obstacle clearance throughout the maneuver The P will announce when beginning the approach and whether the approach will terminate to a hover or to the surface The P also will announce the intended point of landing and any deviation to the approach to include go around The P will announce his or her intentions to takeoff b The pilot not on the controls P will call out altitude and airspeed and will complete the before landing check The nonrated crewmember calls out CROSSING THE WAKE and the P will ensure that the parking brakes are set and the
81. smell and volume Dust from moving vehicles can be observed at great distances q Movement and light Movements during daylight and light at night are the most easily detectable signs of enemy activity Movement may include disturbance of foliage snow soil or birds r Obvious sightings The enemy is skillful in the art of camouflage The aircrew must be aware that obvious sightings may be intentional because of high concentrations of antiaircraft weapons s Systematic methods for conducting visual aerial observation include the motive and stationary techniques The technique used depends on the altitude flown and the terrain encountered t Motive technique This technique is used when the aircraft is operating at terrain flight altitudes and generally at airspeeds of 10 knots indicated airspeed KIAS or faster In using the motive technique the observer looks forward of the aircraft and through the center of the acquisition sector for obvious sightings The observer then scans through the acquisition sector gradually working back toward the aircraft The entire area on either side of the aircraft is divided into two major sectors the nonobservation sector and the observation work sector The nonobservation sector is the area where the aircrew s field of vision is restricted by the physical configuration of the aircraft v The observation work sector is that portion of the field of vision to which search activity is confined The ob
82. the MAX ALTITUDE MSL SINGLE ENGINE Note If level flight cannot be maintained either with or without stores record na in MAX ALTITUDE MSL SINGLE ENGINE block u Item 36 MAX ANGLE Value derived from the AIRSPEED FOR ONSET OF BLADE STALL chart in the aircraft operator s manual chapter 5 While not a limitation the value provides the level flight angle of bank at which blade stall will begin to occur as a function of airspeed gross weight PA and temperature v Item 37 ne IAS Value derived from the AIRSPEED OPERATING LIMITATIONS chart in the aircraft operator s manual chapter 5 The value defines the maximum allowable airspeed as a function of altitude temperature and gross weight 3 Arrival data Complete this section in its entirety if arrival conditions at destination have increased from departure data in any of the following by the minimum amount 5 degrees Celsius 1 000 feet PA or 500 pounds Note If mission requirements dictate the need for additional arrival information complete the second arrival section as described below using applicable PA FAT and landing gross weight data Additional copies of page 2 may be attached for multiple arrivals a Item 38 PA Forecast PA for time of arrival b Item 39 FAT Forecast FAT for time of arrival If unavailable use maximum forecast FAT for the mission c Item 40 LANDING GWT Estimated gross weight for arrival d Item 41 TORQUE RATIO Torque ratios for du
83. the collective If the area is suitable lower the collective to the full down position and neutralize the cyclic and pedals TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training Training may be conducted in the aircraft or simulator 2 Evaluation The evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft REFERENCES Appropriate common references 4 68 TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 TASK 1062 Perform Slope Operations CONDITIONS In an H 60 helicopter with aircraft cleared and given a slope area STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 Rated a Select a suitable landing area b Set the parking brake before landing c Perform a smooth and controlled descent and touchdown d Maintain heading 5 degrees e Do not allow aircraft to drift 3 feet until touchdown Then no drift allowed f Perform a smooth and controlled ascent from the surface 2 Nonrated a Confirm suitable landing area b Confirm parking brake set before landing c Announce drift and altitude DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a The pilot on the controls P will announce his or her intent to perform a slope operation and establish the helicopter over the slope The P will ensure the brakes are set and will announce his or her intended landing area and any deviation from the intended maneuver P should be aware of the common tendenc
84. these same errors could result in degraded performance that jeopardized mission success A systematic analysis of these error patterns identified specific areas where crew level training could reduce the occurrence of such faults and break the chain of errors leading to accidents and poor mission performance a Aircrew coordination patterns begin with the accomplishment of crew level pre mission planning rehearsal and after action reviews Pre mission planning includes all preparatory tasks associated with accomplishing the mission This would include assigning crewmember responsibilities and conducting all required briefings and brief backs Pre mission rehearsal involves the crew collectively visualizing and discussing expected and potential unexpected events for the entire mission Through this process all crewmembers discuss and think through contingencies and actions for difficult segments equipment limitations and failures or unusual events associated with the mission and develop strategies to cope with possible contingencies METT TC b Each crewmember must actively participate in the mission planning process to ensure a common understanding of mission intent and operational sequence The PC prioritizes planning activities so that critical items are addressed within the available planning time Crewmembers must then mentally rehearse the entire mission by visualizing and discussing potential problems contingencies and assigned responsib
85. weight is described below Note Use the HOVER chart from the CL to compute the adjusted ZERO FUEL WEIGHT a Step 1 Note FAT PA and total indicated fuel weight b Step 2 While at a hover note wheel height and hover torque c Step 3 Enter the HOVER chart at the noted FREE AIR TEMP C Move down to the noted PRESSURE ALTITUDE 1 000 FT then left to the GROSS WEIGHT 1 000 LB chart d Step 4 Reenter the HOVER chart at the TORQUE PER ENGINE IGE at the noted hover torque Move right to the WHEEL HEIGHT FT to the noted hover height then move down to the intersection of step 3 above Note aircraft gross weight e Step 5 Subtract the noted total indicated internal and external fuel weight from the gross weight computed in step 4 above Record the ZERO FUEL WEIGHT Note Although data needed to compute ZERO FUEL WEIGHT is noted at a hover the calculation should be made when practical Item 15 REMARKS Record appropriate mission information Examples of these may include drag factors fuel requirements for the mission GO NO GO for sling loads and EMER SE IAS 1 The EMER SE IAS is the emergency single engine airspeed based on the mission and briefed to the crew for the purpose of crew coordination This airspeed is selected from the MIN MAX IAS SINGLE ENGINE range computed in item 29 CRUISE data and is used immediately following an emergency that requires adjustment to a single engine airspeed When an aircr
86. 000 feet c Gross weight 500 pounds d Engine torque factor ETF 0 05 4 When manual calculations are required calculate PPC values per the appropriate operator s manual and per the instructions in appendix D Compute values within following parameters a Torque values 2 percent b Weight values 500 pounds c Fuel flow 100 pounds per hour d Airspeeds 5 knots 5 Correlate planning information to determine aircraft and mission capabilities DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a The pilot in command PC will compute or direct other members of the crew to compute or obtain the aircraft performance data using one of the following procedures b Most current AMCOM approved electronic PPC software c Performance data computed using the appropriate operator s manual d The PC will verify that the aircraft meets the performance requirements for the mission and will brief the other crewmembers on the performance planning data 2 Procedures a Use of the PPC is mandatory to organize performance planning data required for the mission 4 12 TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 b Determine and have available aircraft performance data required to complete the mission Note The data presented in the performance charts in the aircraft operator s manual are primarily derived for either a clean or high drag aircraft When the external equipment or
87. 2 5 TASK LISIS iei ctetu 2 6 2 6 Currency 2 12 2 7 Annual Nuclear Biological and Chemical Requirements 2 12 Chapter 3 EVALUATION 3 1 3 1 Evaluation nennen 3 1 3 2 Grading Considerations 3 1 3 3 Crewmember Evaluation 3 2 3 4 Evaluation Sequence 3 3 3 5 Hands On Performance Evaluations eese 3 7 Chapter 4 CREWMEMBER TASKS enn nnn ntn nn nasa sana natn nuns 4 1 4 1 Task Contehts eruere reiecit er eser 4 1 4 2 Task List eee a a ecd aeternus 4 5 Chapter 5 MAINTENANCE TEST PILOT nennen nnn 5 1 5 1 Task Conterits E T 5 1 5 2 Task NI 5 3 Chapter 6 AIRCREW 6 1 6 1 Aircrew Coordination Background and Planning Strategy 6 1 6 2 Principles rase 6 2 Distribution Restriction Approved for public release distribution is unlimited This publication supersedes TC 1 23
88. 3 04 33 4 189 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 _33 UH60 FAD 20120522 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 5 Maintenance Test Pilot Tasks This chapter describes the tasks essential for maintaining maintenance crewmember skills It defines the task title number conditions and standards by which performance is measured A description of crew actions and training and evaluation requirements is also provided This chapter contains tasks to be performed by qualified H 60 maintenance test pilots in accordance with AR 95 1 This chapter also contains tasks and procedures to be used by contractor maintenance test pilots in accordance with AR 95 20 If discrepancies are found between this chapter and appropriate TMs and MTF the appropriate TMs and MTF takes precedence 5 1 TASK CONTENTS a Task number Each aircrew training manual ATM task is identified by a number that corresponds to the maintenance test pilot tasks listed in chapter 2 table 2 8 b Task title This identifies a clearly defined and measurable activity Task titles may be the same in many ATMs but task content will vary with the airframe c Conditions The conditions specify the common wartime or training evaluation conditions under which the maintenance test pilot MP tasks will be performed d Standards The standards describe the minimum degree of proficiency or standard of performance to which the ta
89. 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 TASK 1070 Respond To Emergencies CONDITION In an H 60 helicopter given a specific emergency condition or the indications of a specific malfunction and given a suitable landing area Note Emergency procedures training should focus on emergencies which can reasonably be expected to occur Disabling systems for other than the emergencies listed below will not be performed in the aircraft and should be done in the SFTS when available Note For standardization evaluations and readiness level RL progressions the following emergency procedures will be evaluated e Single engine failure at altitude and at a hover Decreasing RPM R to include performing electronic control unit ECU digital electronic control unit DECU lockout in flight e Degraded AFCS with stability augmentation system SAS 1 SAS 2 TRIM FPS and BOOST switches off e Degraded AFCS with TRIM FPS and SAS BOOST switches off Stabilator malfunctions STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 Rated a Identify the malfunction determine the appropriate emergency procedure and perform or describe the appropriate immediate action procedures outlined in the appropriate aircraft operator s manual checklist CL b Select a suitable landing area c For AFCS OFF when a hover is required maintain altitude
90. 33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 Missed Approach Obstacle Clearance Missed Approach Segment Obstacles cannot penetrate the surface area See NOTE A Distance from the obstacle to the 3 nm point and multiply by 304 20 1 Example tower 3 nm away _ 3 x 304 912 2 7 7 2 nm 4 Note This computation must be completed for all obstacles within the above area If the obstacles penetrate the surface area establish a higher climb gradient a higher MDA move the MAP or turn the missed approach Figure 4 8 Missed approach segment e Intermediate Approach Segment figure 4 9 1 The intermediate segment begins at the IF and ends at the FAF 2 Determine the IF The minimum distance is 3 NM and the MAX distance is 5 NM from the IF to the FAF The width is 4 NM 2 NM on either side Final Approach Fix FAF Altitude Intermediate Approach Segment 3 nm past MAP 3 10 nm MAP 4 nm 2 nm on either side A Highest obstacle within this area A Determine highest obstacle from 1 nm before IF to FAF and 2 nm laterally A Figure 4 9 Intermediate approach segment f Initial Approach Segment figure 4 10 page 4 137 1 The initial approach segment begins at the IAF and ends at the IF 2 Determine the IAF Up to three IAFs are allowed The minimum distance is 3 NM from the IF and the MAX distance is 10 NM The width is 4 NM 2 NM on either
91. 5 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Instructions for Manual Computation of Department of the Army Form 5701 60 R Note If the MAX ALLOWABLE GWT is less than the AIRCRAFT GWT then the aircraft cannot maintain single engine level flight for the conditions As fuel is consumed single engine capability may become possible 2 Alternative or sling load configuration Note The single engine maximum allowable gross weight and optimum indicated airspeed at maximum allowable gross weight are adjusted for alternate or sling load configuration as follows a Step 1 Enter the CRUISE chart at the optimum indicated airspeed at maximum allowable GWT step 2 above Read left or right to the curved dashed line then move up to read A TRQ FOR DRAG AREA OF 10 SQ FT of AF b Step 2 Multiply the A TRQ by the drag multiplying factor Subtract one half the result from the uncorrected clean or high drag configuration maximum torque available noted in step 2 above c Step 3 Reenter the bottom of the CRUISE chart at the adjusted torque value from step 2 then move up to the intersection of MAX END AND line and read maximum allowable gross weight Record the MAX ALLOWABLE GWT SINGLE ENGINE Read left or right for optimum IAS KTS at maximum allowable gross weight Record the OPTIMUM IAS AT MAX ALLOWABLE GWT SINGLE ENGINE If the maximum torque available line is right of the GW 1 000 LB line enter MAX ALLOWABLE GWT according to the aircraft o
92. 5 August 2011 NAVAIR 00 80T 122 Helicopter Operating Procedures for Air Capable Ships NATOPS Manual 15 May 2010 Publication Date TC 3 04 33 References 3 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 References These publications are available from Commander Naval Air Systems Command PMA 251 RADM William A Moffett Bldg 47123 Buse Rd Bldg 2272 Patuxent River MD 20670 1547 or at the following website https mynatec navair navy mil NAEC ENG 7576 Shipboard Aviation Facilities Resume 01 January 2012 Resume can be optained from Aviation Facilities Team Lead Naval Air Warfare Center Aircraft Division Code 4 8 2 5 Highway 547 Lakehurst NJ 08733 5052 or at the following website https airworthiness navair navy mil NGR AR 95 210 Army National Guard General Provisions and Regulations for Aviation Training 1 July 1991 National Guard Supplement 1 AR 95 1 Aviation Flight Regulations 08 August 2011 National Guard Bureau publications are available from Chief National Guard Bureau ATTN NGB DAY Washington DC 20310 2500 or the following website http www ngbpdc ngb army mil pubfiles 95 952 10 pdf United States Special Operations Command USSOCOM Regulation 350 6 Special Operations Forces Infiltration Exfiltration Operations 25 August 2004 DOCUMENTS NEEDED These documents must be available for the intended users of this publication DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY FOR
93. 60L MP ME qualification will consist of the following training a Academic Training The MP ME will receive training and demonstrate a working knowledge of the topics listed below TM 1 1520 237 10 and TM 1 1520 237 MTF are the references for the following MP ME academic training topics H 60L e Starting engine checks e Engine run up and system checks e Maximum power check Publication Date TC 3 04 33 1 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Appendix A b Flight Training The MP ME will receive a proficiency based evaluation in the aircraft at minimum he will perform the tasks listed in table A 2 c Flight time listed in table A 2 will not be combined with flight time required by table A 1 Table A 2 Flight tasks for H 60L series maintenance test pilot maintenance test pilot evaluator qualification Task Task Title 4088 Perform starting engine checks 4090 Perform engine run up and systems checks 4220 Perform maximum power check Flight Instruction Hours MP Task Training Proficiency Based 6 H 60A L QUALIFICATION Initial H 60A L qualification may be conducted locally by a SP IP SI or FI qualified in the H 60A L as appropriate The RCM and NCM qualification will consist of the following training RCMs qualified in the H 60M are exempt from the 2 0 flight requirement in A 3 but must demonstrate task proficiency to qualified IP SP in the H 60A L aircraft N
94. 7 dated 12 October 2007 Publication Date TC 3 04 33 i FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Contents kzoMehn un pl 6 4 6 4 Standard Crew Terminology eere enne 6 4 Appendix A AIRCRAFT SERIES QUALIFICATION nnne A 1 AppendixB AIRCRAFT SYSTEM EQUIPMENT QUALIFICATION B 1 Appendix NONRATED CREWMEMBER TRAINING eee C 1 AppendixD INSTRUCTIONS FOR MANUAL COMPUTATION OF DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY rLlg eu D 1 CIBrrrpme Glossary 1 References ee lese iiec e References 1 Dre Index 1 Tasks Task 1000 Participate a Crew Mission Briefing 4 6 Task 1001 Administer Flight 4 8 Task 1003 Conduct Flight Instruction sess 4 9 Task 1004 Plan a Visual Flight Rules 4 10 Task 1006 Plan an Instrument Flight Rules Flight eeeeee 4 11 Task 1010 Prepare a Performance Planning Card 4 12 Task 1011 Determine Dynamic Aircraft Performance In Flight 4 23 Task 1012 Verify Aircraft Weight And Balance sse 4 29 Task 1013 Operate Mission Planning System sssssssssseseeeee 4
95. 72 TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 TASK 2081 Operate Night Vision Goggles CONDITIONS In an H 60 helicopter given a set of night vision goggles NVG STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 Preflight the NVG 2 Mount and adjust NVG 3 Identify or describe indications and procedures of NVG failure 4 Store unit after use DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a Any crewmember will announce when his or her attention is focused inside the aircraft b After use ensure batteries are removed Store the unit 2 Procedures a Ensure the NVG are within inspection dates and check for serviceability b Adjust for proper fit focus and diopter setting c If the P s NVG fail or indicate impending failure the P will announce goggle failure and transfer the controls to the pilot not on the controls P if necessary During nap of the earth NOE or contour flight the P will begin a climb at a rate that will ensure obstacle avoidance During low level flight or flight conducted at higher altitude the P will use the procedure described above A climb is not required d If the P or other crewmembers NVG fail or indicate impending failure that crewmember will announce goggle failure and switch batteries or troubleshoot the goggles If the NVG are not restored to operation make the appropriate report a
96. 9 in the operator s manual CL e At the intersection of the HP FT and FREE AIR TEMPERATURE C read the MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE GWT in the GW 100 LB column under the aircraft ATF If the ATF is between 90 and 1 0 interpolate value per the example in figure 4 4 page 4 27 Note If the OGE weight is less than the structural limit then the OGE hover torque is also the maximum torque Note If the blade erosion kit is installed adjust the maximum allowable GWT according to the aircraft operator s manual Note Tab data values represent a 100 foot hover height OGE and 10 foot hover height IGE Publication Date TC 3 04 33 4 25 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 Note Maximum hover weight is limited to 22 000 pounds 100 percent torque transmission limit or 30 minute engine torque limit e TORQUE REQUIRED TO HOVER at MAX GWT OGE and IGE Use MAXIMUM OGE HOVER WEIGHT AND TORQUE REQUIRED ANTI ICE OFF T700 or T701 as appropriate figures 4 and 9 in the operator s manual CL At the intersection of the HP FT and FREE AIR TEMPERATURE Celsius read the MAXIMUM Q OGE percentage under the aircraft ATF and read TORQUE REQUIRED to HOVER OGE at MAX GWT If the ATF is between 90 and 1 0 interpolate value per the example in figures 4 4 page 4 27 At the intersection of the HP FT and FREE AIR TEMPERATURE Celsius read the MAXIMUM Q IGE percentage under the aircraft ATF and read TORQUE R
97. AIRSPEED VNE KNOTS line for the Vne value Record Vne IAS ARRIVAL DATA Only complete this section if arrival conditions at destination have increased from departure data in any of the following by the minimum amount 5 degrees Celsius 1 000 feet PA or 500 pounds Note If mission requirements dictate the need for additional arrival information complete the second arrival section as described below using applicable PA FAT and or landing gross weight data Additional copies of page 2 may be added for multiple arrivals Item 38 PA Record forecast PA for time of arrival Item 39 FAT Record forecast FAT for time of arrival If unavailable use maximum forecast FAT for the mission Item 40 LANDING GWT Record the estimated gross weight for arrival Item 41 TORQUE RATIO Compute the torque ratios for dual and single engine the same as item 7 departure data using arrival FAT Item 42 MAX TORQUE AVAILABLE Compute maximum torque available for dual and single engine the same as item 8 departure data using arrival forecast PA and FAT TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Instructions for Manual Computation of Department of the Army Form 5701 60 R D 5 Note Dual engine information may also be derived from the tabular performance data in the aircraft operator s CL Item 43 PREDICTED HOVER TORQUE Compute the predicted hover torque the same as i
98. APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 5 REFERENCES Appropriate common references 5 6 TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Maintenance Test Pilot Tasks TASK 4081 Perform Before Starting Engine Checks CONDITION In an H 60 helicopter STANDARDS Appropriate common standards DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a The maintenance test pilot MP should direct assistance from the rated crewmember RCM and nonrated crewmember NCM as necessary b The RCM NCM should assist the MP as directed 2 Procedures Perform the checks according to the applicable maintenance test flight MTF manual with the following additional information a Central display unit pilot display unit CDU PDU check Note For H 60A L check that range markings on the CDU and PDUs match aircraft type b Cyclic forward stop check Note To determine collective mid position center the pedals and hold slight forward pressure against the cyclic full forward and centered laterally Adjust the collective until the cyclic position moves closest to the instrument panel If during the attempt to determine the mid position point of the collective the cyclic appears to remain relatively stationary troubleshoot for improper aircraft rigging c Stability augmentation system SAS engagement disengagement check Note Position a main rotor blade at 12
99. ATF ATIS ATM ATP AUTO AVA AWR BATT BIT CBRN CBT CDU CE CEFS Publication Date alternating current Accumulator automatic direction finder Administrative automatic flight control system auxiliary fuel management system above ground level above highest obstacle aeronautical information manual aviation life support equipment altitude altimeter air mission commander aviation and missile command amplifier aviator s night vision imaging system annual proficiency and readiness test auxiliary power unit Army national guard aircraft survivability equipment airport surveillance radar air traffic control aircraft torque factor automatic terminal information service aircrew training manual aircrew training program Automatic aviation vibration analyzer airworthiness release Battery built in test Celsius computer based ASE trainer chemical biological radiological nuclear computer based trainer central display unit crew chief crashworthy external fuel system TC 3 04 33 Glossary 1 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Glossary CG center of gravity CHUM chart updating manual CI cockpit indicators CIS command instrument system CL checklist CLC calculator CMWS Common Missile Warning System COM communication COMSEC communication security CONTR control CT critical torque CTL commander s task list DA Department of the Army DAC Department of t
100. ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 TC 3 04 33 TC 1 237 Publication Date Aircrew Training Manual Utility Helicopter H 60 Series DISTRIBUTION RESTRICTION Approved for public release distribution is unlimited Headquarters Department of the Army FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 This publication is available at Army Knowledge Online www us army mil and General Dennis J Reimer Training and Doctrine Digital Library http www train army mil FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 TC 3 04 33 TC 1 237 Training Circular Headquarters No TC 3 04 33 Department of the Army Washington DC Publication Date Aircrew Training Manual Utility Helicopter H 60 Series Contents Page dijnric m vii Chapter 1 INTRODUGTION trei tinto tr 1 1 1 1 Crew Station ennt 1 1 1 2 Symbol Usage and Word Distinctions serene 1 1 Chapter 2 ucm E 2 1 2 1 Qualification Training 2 1 2 2 Refresher Training essei enne enne nnn natnra 2 2 2 3 Mission Training ccc ccce recreare nennen nnn 2 4 2 4 Continuation Training Requirements eere 2 4
101. C Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 TASK 1011 Determine Dynamic Aircraft Performance In Flight CONDITIONS Given an operator s and crewmembers checklist CL with tabular data electronic data module FMS configured with approved software mission conditions engine torque factors and aircraft basic weight Note Performance data values contained in the tabular data portion of the checklist were derived for aircraft operating in the clean configuration For alternative or external drag configurations the charts in the operator s manual must be used Note To ensure accurate values are derived when using tabular data the aircrew must be accurate in determining aircraft zero fuel weight STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 Update aircraft performance data when either of the following conditions apply with intent to land or takeoff When operating within 3 000 pounds of MAX ALLOWABLE GWT OGE Increase of 1 000 feet pressure altitude and or 5 degrees Celsius from the planned performance planning card PPC 2 Update aircraft performance data using automated planning software or data found in the operator s and crewmembers checklist for the following items a Maximum torque available b Maximum allowable gross weight OGE c Torque required to hover at maximum gross weight OGE and in ground effect IGE d Aircraft operating weight 3 When not utilizin
102. CM will receive the USAACE approved academic training IAW TSP H 60A Operators Course 4 601 SERIES QUALIFICATION Initial H 60L series qualification may be conducted locally NCMs do not have additional academic and flight requirements for UH60L qualification NCMs are considered L qualified upon initial UH60A qualification H 60L qualification will consist of the following training a Academic training The RCM will receive training and demonstrate a working knowledge of the RCM academic training topics H 60L listed below TM 1 1520 237 10 is the reference for the following academic training topics e Performance planning Operating limitations Emergency procedures T700 GE 701C D engines Improved durability gearbox e Miscellaneous aircraft improvements b Flight training The RCM will receive 1 hour of flight training in the aircraft As a minimum he will perform the tasks in table A 1 Table A 1 Rated crewmember flight tasks for H 60L series qualification Task Task Title 1010 Prepare a Performance Planning Card 1022 Perform Preflight Inspection 1024 Perform Before Starting Engine Through Before Leaving Helicopter Checks 1070 Respond to Emergencies ENG failure at altitude and ECU DECU lockout at a minimum Flight Instruction Hours Qualification training 1 0 5 601 SERIES MP ME QUALIFICATION Initial H 60L series MP ME qualification may be conducted locally by a qualified ME H
103. Checks Perform Radio Communication Procedures Perform Fuel Management Procedures Perform Visual Meteorological Conditions Flight X Maneuvers x x x x x 1070 1155 Negotiate Wire Obstacles 1162 1188 1190 1194 X 1262 Participate in a Crew Level After Action Review X S Base tasks requiring specialized equipment do not apply to aircraft that do not have the equipment Performance tasks are in bold type Technical tasks are in plain type 1024 1032 5 5 x 1048 Tasks only apply to SI FI Tasks only apply to SI FI UT Publication Date TC 3 04 33 2 9 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 2 Table 2 6 Nonrated crewmember base task list minimum for other than 15T 68W performing crewmember duties technical inspector door gunner Day mode of flight i Night unaided mode of flight NVG mode of flight Maneuver listed is required to be evaluated on the listed evaluation Standardization flight evaluation NVG annual NVG PFE Task Title Night 1000 Participate in a Crew Mission Briefing X 1014 Operate Aviation Life Support Equipment X 1016 Perform Internal Load Operations X 1020 Prepare Aircraft for Mission X 1022 Perform Preflight Inspection X 1024 Perform Before Starting Engine through Before X Leaving Helicopter Checks 1026 Maintain Airspac
104. DA Form 5484 and will actively participate in a crew mission briefing 2 The pilot in command PC will ensure a mission briefing is conducted using table 4 1 page 4 7 or a more detailed unit approved crew briefing checklist 3 Crewmembers will acknowledge a complete understanding of the aircrew mission briefing DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a A designated briefing officer will evaluate and then brief essential areas of the mission to the PC according to AR 95 1 The PC will acknowledge a complete understanding of the mission briefing and will initial DA Form 5484 b The PC has overall responsibility for the crew mission briefing The PC may direct other crewmembers to perform all or portions of the briefing Crewmembers will direct their attention to the crewmember conducting the briefing They will address any questions to the briefer and acknowledge that they understand the assigned actions duties and responsibilities Lessons learned from previous debriefings should be addressed as applicable during the crew briefing Note An inherent element of the mission briefing is establishing the time and location for the crew level after action review Task 1262 page 4 108 2 Procedures Brief the mission using a unit approved crew mission briefing checklist Refer to table 4 1 for a suggested format for the minimum mandatory crew briefing checklist Identify mission and flight requirements that will demand effective communicatio
105. DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 members are off the ground and clear above the highest obstacle Pilot not on the controls P announces the altitude above ground when personnel become airborne During forward flight the NCM must constantly monitor the SPIES team members and keep the P informed of their stability and height above obstacles 2 Procedures P will make a smooth progressive deceleration to the extraction point at a rate that will ensure the safety of the SPIES members and terminate at the proper altitude giving the execution command a NCM assist in deploying the extraction system as briefed and relay proper commands informing P the status of the extraction operation b Once hook up is complete P will ascend at a rate that will ensure the safety of the extraction personnel To avoid jerking the SPIES members off the ground the slack in the rope must be removed cautiously Do not start forward flight until all obstacles are cleared c Maximum en route airspeed will be no faster than 70 KIAS in moderate climates and 50 KGS in cold climates while team members are attached to the SPIES rope Maximum aircraft bank angle will be no greater than 30 degrees It may be necessary to reduce airspeed if SPIES personnel begin to spin or if the cone angle exceeds 30 degrees d Upon arrival at the dismount area a transition is made into hovering flight at an altitude of 250 feet above ground lev
106. EQUIRED to HOVER IGE at MAX GWT If the ATF is between 90 and 1 0 interpolate value per the example in figures 4 4 page 4 27 Note Tab data values represent a 100 foot hover height OGE and 10 foot hover height IGE 4 26 TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 Chapter 4 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 MAXIMUM OGE HOVER WEIGHT AND TORQUE REQUIRED ANTI ICE OFF T700 GE 700 ENGINE CONTINUED HP FREE AIR TEMPERATURE C FT 15 20 25 LB Rx S nr haw 9 ee ee GW 100 LB aircraft gross weight Multiply this value times 100 Q OGE torque required to hover OGE at 100 feet wheel height at maximum allowable gross weight OGE above GW 100 LB Q IGE torque required to hover IGE at 10 feet wheel height at maximum allowable gross weight OGE above GW 100 LB EXAMPLE UH 60A Q 8000 ATF 0 96 FAT 10 96 is 6 10 of the difference between ATF 90 0 9 and 1 00 1 0 GW 100 LB Maximum allowable gross weight OGE 0 9 166 X 100 16 600 1 0 173 X 100 17 300 pounds 17 300 16 600 700 pounds 700 X 6 10 420 pounds 16600 420 17 020 pounds maximum allowable gross weight OGE Q OGE 8581 496 TRO 4X 6 10 2 4 TRO 81 2 4 83 4 required to hover 17 020 pounds OGE Q IGE 73 69 4 TRO 4 X 6 10 2 4 TRQ 69 2 4 71 4 TRQ required to hover 17 020 pounds IGE Figure 4
107. ES Appropriate common references 5 4 TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Maintenance Test Pilot Tasks TASK 4001 Respond to Critical Situations During Test Flight Maneuvers CONDITIONS In an H 60 helicopter or compatible training device with a qualified ME in visual meteorological conditions VMC during the conduct of maintenance training given a specific situation and given a suitable landing area WARNING If the simulated situation requires manipulation of the power control levers the first step will always be to get out of the maneuver by placing the power control levers to fly Note This task may only be performed during the conduct of ATM Tasks 4200 4202 4220 4228 4236 and 4254 Note The intent of this task is to allow the ME to assess the MTP s response to an emergency critical situation during the conduct of test flight maneuvers It should be used as a tool in grading the MTP s reaction to an emergency critical situation which has been properly briefed IAW chapter 5 of this ATM At no time will this task be confused with Task 1070 respond to emergencies STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions and or modifications 1 Prior to conducting the specified maneuver ensure that emergency actions are briefed utilizing the M A L E format outlined in chapter 5 of this ATM 2 Identify and announce the critical situat
108. Exchange Establish amp Mission Maintain Efficient Information Workloads Provide Manage amp Situational Coordinate Aircraft amp Actions Mission Events amp Advisories Workloads Figure 6 1 Crew coordination principles a Communicate Effectively and Timely Good team relationships begin with effective communication among crewmembers Communication is effective when the sender directs announces requests or offers information the receiver acknowledges the information and the sender confirms the receipt of information based on the receiver s acknowledgment or action This enables the efficient flow and exchange of important mission information that keeps a crew on top of any situation that arises 1 Announce and Acknowledge Decisions and Actions To ensure effective and well coordinated actions in the aircraft all crewmembers must be kept informed and made aware of decisions expected movements of crew and aircraft and the unexpected individual actions of others Each crewmember will announce any actions that may affect the actions of other crewmembers In turn communications in the aircraft must include supportive feedback that clearly indicates that crewmembers acknowledge and correctly understand announcements decisions or directives of other crewmembers 2 Ensure that statements and directives are clear timely relevant complete and verified These are qualities that must describe the kind of communication that is e
109. F 159 Avn Regt Date Developed 5 Jan 05 Expire 5 Jan 06 Unit Date Developed Expire APCH CRS COPTER GPS RECOVERY 330 APCH CRS 330 Chinook Landing Zone Remarks Missed Approach Climb straight Remarks Missed Approach ahead to 3500 direct EAD WP and hold ATIS APP CON R ATIS 118 5 125 4 365 4 48 500 126 2 316 0 FOR VFR TRAINING AND EMERGENCY GPS PPS REQUIRED FOR VFR TRAINING AND EMERGENCY GPS PPS REQUIRED USE ONLY USE ONLY 9 Y 108 ix WPMAP 930 WPFAF MSA 30 NM WPMAP os MSA 30 NM FOR VFR TRAINING AND FOR VFR TRAINING AND EMERGENCY USE ONLY EMERGENCY USE ONLY CATEGORY COPTER CATEGORY INAV MDA 600 320 Developed by Date Developed by Fit Checked by Date Fit Checked by Approved by Date 4 100 00 06 FAF AF N09 23 45 W 100 01 MAP WPMAP 0923 50 W 100 02 06 WMAHF N09 24 15 W 100 03 50 IAP1 WPIA1 N 09 23 10 W 100 01 03 IAP2 WPIA2 N09 23 10 W 100 01 03 Approved by Figure 4 12 Sample of emergency GPS diagram 1 The procedure diagram may be computer generated or hand sketched The diagram need not be as detailed as a DOD approved chart but must provide all data as outlined in the example to execute the procedure 2 The Plan View The plan view will include the following a The highest obstacle altitude MSL in BOLD b The approach course degrees magnetic IAF IF FAF MAP MAHF holding
110. FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 TASK 1010 Prepare a Performance Planning Card CONDITIONS Given the Aviation And Missile Command AMCOM approved performance planning software and computer or a blank DA Form 5701 60 R H 60 Performance Planning Card the appropriate aircraft operator s manual mission conditions engine torque factors and aircraft basic weight Note Performance planning will be completed prior to every mission The approved performance planning software is the most accurate and preferred method for calculating performance data Note The AMCOM user s manual for the performance planning card PPC Program provides instructions for using the performance planning software This software may be obtained at the following website https www jtdi mil Note The AMCOM approved performance planning software or the charts in the AMCOM approved aircraft operator s manual checklist CL must be used for performance planning Note Instructions for manually computing individual elements of the performance planning card can be found in appendix D STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 Compute all items of the PPC using the most current software 2 Input the appropriate information into the software 3 Compute PPC values using accurate conditions for the time of takeoff within the following parameters a Free air temperature FAT 5 degrees Celsius b Pressure altitude PA 1
111. GHT MEDIC TRAINING C 2 MO AIRCRAFT QUALIFICATION TRAINING Flight medics 68W must complete the aircraft qualification training listed below At the crewmembers next closeout aircraft qualification will be documented in Part V remarks section of the crewmember s DA Form 759 a Academic qualification training The medical officer MO must receive sufficient instruction to be knowledgeable in all applicable topics of chapter 3 and the following list The subjects may be completed in any order Commanders will develop a 50 question written examination covering all applicable topics listed in chapter 3 paragraph 3 4b and the following list in addition to the operator s manual examination Crewmembers must pass each examination with a grade of at least 70 percent Training will be documented according to FM 3 04 411 chapter 3 Flight medic academic training subjects include the following e Maintenance forms and records e MO qualification written examination e Aircrew training program introduction Publication Date TC 3 04 33 C 1 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Appendix C e Patient care reporting procedures e Aircrew coordination training e Operator s manual written examination e Medical protocols b Flight training The MO will be required to demonstrate proficiency in all performance based tasks listed in the DAY and NIGHT column with an X in chapter 2 table 2 5 page 2 10 and
112. IONS In an H 60 or a H 60 FS helicopter with an operational cargo hook sling load completed DA Form 7382 Sling Load Inspection Record or training load according to FM 4 20 197 Note Prior to sling load operations a qualified sling load inspector will inspect all sling loads Certification must be recorded on a DA Form 7382 and a copy provided to the aircrews STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 Rated a Before hookup 1 Verify copy of DA Form 7382 is complete and on file and that the aircraft will remain within gross weight and center of gravity CG limitations 2 Hook up and hover 3 Ensure that the aircraft remains clear of the load and any obstacles 4 Perform a vertical ascent with the load to a load height of 10 feet 5 feet 5 Determine power sufficient to complete the maneuver without exceeding aircraft limitations b Take off Maintain aircraft in trim above 100 feet above ground level AGL 1 Approach and load release 2 Maintain a constant approach angle to ensure the load safely clears obstacles and terminate over the intended point of landing with a load height of 10 feet 5 feet 3 Perform a vertical descent with the load to the desired touchdown point 5 feet 2 Nonrated a The nonrated crewmember NCM will ensure that the aircraft is prepared for sling load operations The NCM will also ensure that all slings have been inspected according to F
113. IPTION 1 Crew actions a The pilot on the controls P will announce his or her intent to perform a roll on landing when beginning the approach the intended point of landing and any deviation from the approach b The P will verify that the brakes are released before starting the approach The P and NCM will confirm the suitability of the landing area and will provide adequate warning of hazards or obstacles They will announce when their attention is focused inside the aircraft and again when attention is reestablished outside 2 Procedures When the desired approach angle is intercepted adjust the collective as necessary to maintain a constant angle of approach and adjust the cyclic for an attitude that will result in an optimum airspeed for the conditions Before touchdown align the aircraft with the landing direction Before tail wheel touchdown increase the collective as necessary to make a smooth touchdown below 60 knots ground speed After tail wheel contact use collective to smoothly lower the landing gear to the surface If desired use aerodynamic braking while maintaining the main landing gear off the ground to assist in stopping the roll out Allow the aircraft to descend to the surface by adjusting the collective as necessary and centering the cyclic to allow a smooth touchdown After the main landing gear is on the surface center the cyclic to avoid droop stop pounding then lower the collective and apply the brakes as necessa
114. M 4 20 197 and all sling equipment is secured in the aircraft before takeoff b Provide aircraft guidance for hookup and release c Clear the aircraft and sling load during the operation d Confirm load is hooked and secure e Ensure load is free of entanglements f Continue to monitor load for oscillation 4 130 TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a The pilot in command PC will conduct a thorough crew briefing and ensure all crewmembers are familiar with sling load operations emergency and communication procedures The PC will ensure that DD Form 7382 has been completed The PC will determine the direction of takeoff by analyzing the tactical situation the wind the long axis of the takeoff area and the lowest obstacles The PC also will confirm that required power is available by comparing the information from the performance planning card PPC to the hover power check b The pilot on the controls P will remain primarily focused outside the aircraft throughout the maneuver The P will monitor altitude and avoid obstacles c The pilot not on the controls P will monitor the cockpit instruments and assist the P in clearing the aircraft The P will set cargo hook switches as required and should make all radio calls When directed by the P during the approach the P will place the cargo hook arming switch t
115. MIN for the T700 engine can also be derived from the CL when ETF values are between 1 0 and 0 9 utilize ETF instead of ATF and interpolate as required q Item 32 CRUISE TORQUE CONT TORQUE AVAILABLE SINGLE ENGINE Note Compare the cruise torque to the CONT TORQUE AVAILABLE to determine whether the aircraft will be operating in a time limited condition above maximum continuous power for this IAS Note The continuous torque available may exceed the transmission torque limit During normal aircraft operations the aircraft operator s manual chapter 5 torque limitations shall not be exceeded Note Adjust the CONT TORQUE for planned use of engine bleed air accessories anti ice cockpit cabin heaters AMOGS OBOGS according to the operator s manual r Item 33 CRUISE FUEL FLOW SINGLE ENGINE Note Adjust as required for FAT and or planned use of engine bleed air accessories anti ice cockpit cabin heaters AMOGS OBOGS etc According to the operator s manual s Item 34 MAX ALLOWABLE GWT and OPTIMUM IAS AT MAX ALLOWABLE GWT SINGLE ENGINE The maximum allowable gross weight the aircraft is capable of flying at maximum endurance airspeed Note If the MAX ALLOWABLE GWT is less than the AIRCRAFT GWT then the aircraft cannot maintain single engine level flight for the conditions As fuel is consumed single engine capabilitymay become possible Alternative or external load configuration Note If the adjusted torqu
116. MS DA Form 759 Individual Flight Record and Flight Certificate Army DA Form 1971 2 R Chemical Data Sheet Monitoring or Survey DA Form 1971 7 R NBC 1 Observer s Initial or Follow Up Report DA Form 2028 Recommended Changes to Publications and Blank Forms DA Form 2408 12 Army Aviator s Flight Record DA Form 2408 13 Aircraft Status Information Record DA Form 2408 13 1 Aircraft Inspection and Maintenance Record DA Form 4186 Medical Recommendation for Flying Duty DA Form 5484 Mission Schedule Brief DA Form 5701 60 R H 60 Performance Planning Card DA Form 7120 R Commander s Task List DA Form 7120 1 R Crew Member Task Performance and Evaluation Requirements DA Form 7120 2 R Crew Member Task Performance and Evaluation Requirements Continuation Sheet DA Form 7122 R Crew Member Training Record DA Form 7382 Sling Load Inspection Record DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE FORMS DD Form 365 4 Weight and Balance Clearance Form F Tactical Transport References 4 TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 A academic evaluation 3 1 3 3 academic evaluation topics 3 3 after action review 4 6 4 7 4 118 4 119 C continuation training vii 2 1 2 4 crew coordination 2 3 3 1 4 2 4 3 4 7 4 20 4 119 4 181 4 189 4 194 5 1 6 1 C 1 C 2 crew terminology 6 4 crewmember evaluation 3 2 cross monitoring 6 3 currency requirements 2 12 D decision mak
117. Note the torque and reduce the collective Fluctuation in torque from flight control inputs and environmental conditions should be factored in to the torque value used for the maneuver Procedures a Constant Angle or Vertical Select reference points to maintain ground track With the cyclic and pedals in the neutral position increase power Continue applying power as required to transition to mission profile As the aircraft leaves the ground maintain heading with pedals and apply forward cyclic as required to establish an accelerative attitude appropriate for the terrain and to avoid obstacles Adjust the cyclic to continue the acceleration to the desired climb airspeed and maintain the desired ground track Make the required power adjustments to clear obstacles in the flight path and obtain the desired rate of climb Maintain heading with the pedals when below 50 feet AGL or until making the transition to terrain flight then place the aircraft in trim After obtaining the desired airspeed adjust the cyclic as necessary to stop the acceleration and maintain desired climb airspeed Maintain takeoff power until reaching minimum single engine airspeed and then adjust power as necessary to continue the desired rate of climb or transition to mission profile 1 In this maneuver the angle can range from vertical to flat It demands that more power is available than the power required to hover The angle is initiated from the point of hover or
118. PTIMUM IAS AT MAX ALLOWABLE GWT SINGLE ENGINE item 34 as appropriate should be briefed as the emergency single engine airspeed Note Normally only one EMER SE IAS is selected However when the MIN MAX IAS SINGLE ENGINE range item 29 is wide the crew may select two emergency single engine airspeeds one slow and one fast based on mission profile modes of flight environmental conditions or other factors Note There is no power margin available when operating single engine at the MIN MAX IAS SINGLE ENGINE item 29 These airspeeds are computed using the maximum torque available single engine for the lowest ETF engine It is not recommended that the aircraft be flown at airspeeds that require maximum power for continued single engine flight Note The GO NO GO TORQUE for sling loads is determined by using the same process as item 10 above using the MAX ALLOWABLE GWT OGE and a wheel height that suspends the load approximately 10 feet above ground level AGL 2 Cruise data The maximum continuous power MCP line on the CRUISE chart is used to define power levels that an engine can produce continuously and remain out of time limited engine operating limitations 30 minute 10 minute or 2 5 minute TGT values The TORQUE AVAILABLE 30 MIN lines T700 and T701 and the TORQUE AVAILABLE 10 MIN lines for T701 are used to define a power level that will be limited and only used for a defined period of time The SE 30 MIN lines t700 and s
119. Perform emergency egress Flight Instruction Hours Qualification training 1 0 A T H 60A L SERIES MP ME QUALIFICATION Initial H 60A L series MP ME qualification may be conducted locally by a qualified ME If the aviator is a previously qualified MP ME in a H 60A L then upon completing H 60 qualification in accordance with table B 3 the MP ME will be an H 60A L MP ME RCMs qualified in the H 60M are exempt from the 2 0 flight requirement in B 3 but must demonstrate task proficiency to qualified ME in the H 60A L aircraft Note Although the HH is a mission identifier and would normally only require mission task training the H 60A L has a different Maintenance Flight Manual TM 1 1520 253 MTF and therefore requires differences training in addition to mission task training Note In the absence of a H 60A L M aircraft or qualified ME during the annual MP ME evaluation or for MP ME RL progression the commander may authorize the maintenance task training and evaluation in a H 60 A L M to complete the requirements A 8 H 60M SERIES QUALIFICATION Initial H 60M series qualification for RCMs is conducted under an approved USAACE POI NCM qualification is conducted locally by a SP IP SI or FI qualified in the H 60M as appropriate H 60M qualification for NCMs will consist of the following training RCMs a Academic training The NCM will receive training and demonstrate a working knowledge of the academic training top
120. REQUIREMENTS 1 Training Training may be conducted in the aircraft or the simulator 4 36 TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 2 Evaluation Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft unless flight activity category FAC 3 or instrument annual proficiency and readiness test APART is allowed in simulator REFERENCES Appropriate common references DA Pam 738 751 the HIT log IETM EM 0271 and TM 1 1500 250 23 Publication Date TC 3 04 33 4 37 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 TASK 1025 Operate Integrated Vehicle Health Monitoring System CONDITION In an H 60 helicopter STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 Verify administrative data 2 Perform crew change procedures when appropriate 3 Perform vibration event data capture when appropriate 4 Perform health indicator test HIT 2x View exceedance data as appropriate DESCRIPTION Crew actions To verify administrative data access the integrated vehicle health monitoring system IVHMS Ensure the correct aircraft type and tail number are displayed When required to change members of the crew without shutting down engines perform a crew change by selecting end of operation END OF OP on the administrative ADMIN page of the IVHMS MI If the crew experiences an unusual vibration unus
121. SAND DUST CONSIDERATIONS Obscurants other than weather can induce loss of visual contact At low altitudes where these conditions would be encountered it is extremely important that these procedures be initiated immediately to prevent ground contact TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training Training may be conducted in the aircraft or simulator 4 98 TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 2 Evaluation Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft or simulator REFERENCES Appropriate common references Publication Date TC 3 04 33 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 4 99 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 TASK 1184 Respond To Inadvertent Instrument Meteorological Conditions CONDITION In an H 60 helicopter in visual meteorological conditions VMC STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 Announce maintain proper aircraft control immediately make the transition to instrument flight and initiate immediate climb 2 Initiate correct inadvertent IMC recovery procedures a Attitude level the wings on the attitude indicator b Heading maintain heading turn only to avoid known obstacles or as briefed for multiship operations c Torque adjust torque as necessary d Trim trim aircraft as necessary e Airspeed adjust airspeed as necessary 3 C
122. SE chart at the TORQUE AVAILABLE 30 MIN line adjusted for the ETF of the weakest engine and follow the slant of the line up to item 34 CRUISE SPEED IAS DUAL ENGINE CRUISE Note If mission requirements dictate use of T700 or T701 continuous torque available refer to the dual engine torque value derived from item 21 below Note The maximum torque available may exceed the transmission torque limit During normal aircraft operations the aircraft operator s manual chapter 5 torque limitations shall not be exceeded Note Maximum torque available is derived from the cruise charts and takes into account the effect of ram air on engine performance at a selected airspeed Torque values may vary when flying at airspeeds other than the planned cruise airspeed Note Adjust as required for planned use of engine bleed air accessories anti ice cockpit cabin heaters AMOGS OBOGS according to the operator s manual Note Adjust as required for planned use of engine anti ice and cockpit heater according to the aircraft operator s manual f Item 21 CRUISE TORQUE CONT TORQUE AVAILABLE DUAL ENGINE Note The continuous torque available is also referred to as MAXIMUM CONTINUOUS POWER MCP Note Compare the CRUISE TORQUE with the CONTINUOUS TORQUE to determine whether the aircraft will be operating in a time limited condition above maximum continuous power for this IAS Note The continuous torque available may exceed the transmissio
123. STANDARDS 1 Use the correct actions on contact consistent the mission briefing 2 Transmit tactical report per signal operating instructions SOI unit standing operating procedure SOP and or mission briefing DESCRIPTION 1 Actions on contact are a series of combat actions taken to develop the situation upon contact with the enemy or situation that warrants or demands action FM 3 90 Due to the fluid nature of tactical situations it is impossible to give a one size fits all prescriptive solution for all types of contact Therefore it is imperative that actions on contact be described in the OPORDER FRAGO mission briefing and or unit SOP and framed in terms of the mission objective and commander s intent for example end state task expanded purpose FM 5 0 Actions on contact are important because they allow the mission to maintain its tempo of operation by rapidly developing the situation and taking action before the threat can gain the initiative and force friendly forces to react The desired outcome of the mission will often dictate the type of actions to perform on contact For example actions on contact when performing a movement to contact will vary significantly from actions on contact during a hasty attack or an air assault 2 Contact can be defined as confirmed awareness of enemy threat presence through any detection method Contact can be detected and announced through any crewmember another aircraft in the flight
124. T See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 ARRIVAL Fat 39 eS TORQUE RATIO 41 41 MAX TORQUE AVAILABLE 42 42 42 9 PREDICTED HOVER TORQUE 43 43 43 MAX ALLOWABLE GWT OGE IGE 44 MAX HOVER HEIGHT IGE MIN SE AIRSPEED IAS WO W STORES LANDING GWT TORQUE RATIO MAX TORQUE AVAILABLE PREDICTED HOVER TORQUE MAX ALLOWABLE GWT OGE IGE MAX HOVER HEIGHT IGE MIN SE AIRSPEED IAS WO W STORES REMARKS DA FORM 5701 60 R PAGE 2 OF 2 Figure 4 2 Sample DA Form 5701 60 R page 2 Explanation of items DA Form 5701 60 1 Departure data a Item 1 PA Forecast maximum pressure altitude PA for the mission and current PA for time and location of departure b Item 2 FAT Forecast maximum free air temperature FAT for the mission and FAT for time and location of departure Note Maximum PA and FAT will be used when computing all items in the departure section except for GO NO GO TORQUE OGE IGE item 10 and PREDICTED HOVER TORQUE item 12 which will be computed using PA and temperature for time and location of departure 4 14 TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 Chapter 4 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 c Item 3 AIRCRAFT GWT Total planned aircraft gross weight GWT at takeoff This includes the aircraft basic weight crew internal load internal fuel and when applicable external
125. TAMs flight planning aids necessary charts forms and publications STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 Determine whether the aircrew and aircraft are capable of completing the assigned mission 2 Determine whether the flight can be performed under instrument flight rules IFR per AR 95 1 and applicable Federal Aviation Regulations FARs host nation regulations local regulations and standing operating procedures SOPs 3 Determine the departure en route and destination procedures 4 Select route s and altitudes that avoid hazardous weather conditions do not exceed aircraft or equipment limitations and conform to IFR cruising altitudes per Department of Defense flight information publication DOD FLIP 5 If off airway determine the course s 5 degrees 6 Select an approach that is compatible with the weather approach facilities and aircraft equipment determine if an alternate airfield is required 7 Determine distance 1 nautical mile true airspeed 5 knots ground speed 5 knots and estimated time en route ETE 1 minutes for each leg of the flight 8 Determine the fuel required per AR 95 1 and FM 3 04 240 100 pounds 9 Complete and file the flight plan per AR 95 1 and the DOD FLIP 10 Perform mission risk assessment per unit SOP DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a The pilot in command PC may direct the other rated crewmember RCM to complete some e
126. TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 onto the landing surface After the main wheels are on the ground the P smoothly lowers the collective to full down neutralizes the cyclic and maintains heading and ground track with the pedals The P will use the brakes as necessary to stop roll out Note When conducting autorotation training evaluation in the aircraft power levers at fly the P should limit the torque to below 10 percent to ensure that an autorotational descent not a steep approach is occurring Torque spikes as a result of collective application to arrest RPM R are acceptable as long as the collective is reduced below 10 percent dual engine torque The intent of the torque limit is to ensure the rotor is decoupled from the engines and autorotational descent is established NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLE NVG CONSIDERATIONS Suitable landing areas will be much more difficult to locate at night Hazards will be difficult to detect in the landing area Use the landing light searchlight as appropriate TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training Training may be conducted in the aircraft or simulator 2 Evaluation Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft or simulator When conducted in the simulator the mode of flight must be replicated REFERENCES Appropriate common references Publication Date TC 3 04 33 4 79 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT Se
127. TED HOVER TORQUE item 12 and GO NO GO TORQUE OGH IGE item 10 which will be computed using forecast FAT and PA at time and location of departure c Item 3 AIRCRAFT GWT Record the total planned aircraft gross weight GWT at takeoff This includes the aircraft basic weight crew internal load internal fuel and when applicable external stores support system ESSS stores and sling load Several times throughout the PPC this weight will be used for computations Use the actual weight of the aircraft and all additions for these computations d Item 4 STORES WEIGHT Record the planned weight of any stores weight Note External stores are defined as a sling load ESSS wing stores Volcano or other jettisonable items e Item 5 FUEL WEIGHT Record total planned fuel weight internal and external at takeoff f Item 6 ATF ETF Record the aircraft torque factor ATF and engine torque factors ETFs in the appropriate blocks g Item 7 TORQUE RATIO Use the aircraft TORQUE FACTOR chart to compute torque ratios TRs as described below 1 Step 1 Enter the appropriate aircraft TORQUE FACTOR chart on the left at the appropriate temperature Move right to the ATF or ETF 2 Step 2 Move straight down to the bottom of the chart note the torque ratio TR Record the TORQUE RATIO h Item 8 MAX TORQUE AVAILABLE Use the appropriate MAXIMUM TORQUE AVAILABLE chart to compute engine specification torque available as described in the st
128. Task 2063 Operate Storm Scope Weather Mapping System 4 156 Task 2064 Perform Paradrop 4 157 Task 2065 Operate Personnel Locater System ssssssssssssseeee 4 159 Task 2066 Perform Extended Range Fuel System Operations 4 160 Task 2068 Perform Shipboard Operations 4 161 Task 2070 Perform M 139 Volcano Operations sse 4 164 Task 2075 Perform Fat Hawk 4 167 Task 2076 Perform Caving Ladder Operations sse 4 169 Task 2078 Perform Helocast 4 171 Task 2081 Operate Night Vision Goggles sees 4 173 Task 2086 Operate Aviator s Night Vision Imaging System Heads Up Display 4 174 Task 2098 Perform Aerial Radio 4 175 Task 2108 Perform Auxiliary Power Unit Operations only 4 176 Task 2112 Operate Armament Subsystem sse 4 178 Task 2116 Perform an Aerial Radiological 4 180 Task 2120 Provide Patient Treatme
129. Transport from the aircraft logbook STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 Verify that center of gravity CG and gross weight GWT remain within aircraft limits for the duration of the flight per the appropriate aircraft operator s manual 2 Identify all mission or flight limitations imposed by weight or CG 3 Ensure DD Form s 365 4 has been completed within 90 days DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a The pilot in command PC will brief crewmembers on any limitations b Crewmembers will continually monitor aircraft loading such as fuel transfers sling loads cargo load during the mission to ensure CG remains within limits 2 Procedures a Using the completed DD Form 365 4 verify that aircraft GWT and CG will remain within the allowable limits for the entire flight Note all GWT loading task maneuver restrictions limitations If there is no completed DD Form 365 4 that meets mission requirements the PC will ensure adjustments are made to existing DD Form 365 4 to meet the criteria outlined in AR 95 1 and the aircraft is capable of completing the assigned mission b Verify the aircraft CG in relation to CG limits at predetermined times during the flight when an aircraft s configuration requires special attention for example when it is a critical requirement to keep a certain amount of fuel in a particular tank Conduct CG checks for fuel transfer sling loads and cargo loading o
130. U fire circuit switch to ENABLE 3 T 1 minute Place the interface control panel ICP arm switch to ARM Verify the ARMED advisory light is illuminated and no fault codes are displayed on the DCU 4 T 30 seconds Verify no DCU fault codes c At target area 1 Initiate the mine dispensing sequence prior to the start point based on ground speed and altitude to ensure mines impact at the start point and not 10 meters after P maintains ground speed 5 KPH and altitude 10 feet during the mine dispensing pass 2 Terminate mine dispensing prior to the end point based on ground speed and altitude to ensure mines stop at the designated end point 10 meters d Postmission 1 Place the ICP arm switch to SAFE and verify ARMED advisory light extinguished 2 Place DCU fire circuit switch OFF 3 Set DCU power switch as required 4 Prepare and submit SCATMINWARN message Table 4 4 Table 4 4 Scatterable minefield warning format Alpha Bravo Charlie Delta Echo Foxtrot Emplacement system Antitank yes no Antipersonnel yes no Number of aim corner points Grid coordinates of aim corner points and size of safety zone Date time group of life cycle NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLE NVG CONSIDERATIONS During the mine deployment phase the P s attention will be divided between the aircraft instruments altitude and ground speed and the outside It is critical during night vision goggle NVG ope
131. UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 1 Introduction This ATM describes training requirements for H 60 crewmembers It will be used with AR 95 1 AR 600 105 AR 600 106 National Guard regulation NGR 95 210 TC 3 04 11 and other applicable publications The tasks in this ATM enhance training in both individual crewmember and aircrew proficiency The training focuses on accomplishing tasks that support the unit s mission The scope and level of training to be achieved individually by crewmembers and collectively by aircrews will be dictated by the mission essential task list METL Commanders must ensure that aircrews are proficient in mission essential tasks 1 1 CREW STATION DESIGNATION The commander designates a crew station s for each crewmember The individual s DA Form 7120 R Commander s Task List must clearly indicate all crew station designations Training and proficiency sustainment for rated crewmembers RCMs is required in each designated crew station with access to the flight controls Instructor pilots IPs standardization instructor pilots SPs instrument examiners IEs and maintenance test pilot evaluators MEs must maintain proficiency in both seats Nonrated crewmember NCM training and proficiency sustainment is required in each designated crew Station Except for flight activity category FAC 3 aviators designated to fly from both pilots seats will be evaluated in each seat during each phase of readiness level RL progres
132. VALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training Training will be conducted in the aircraft 2 Evaluation Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft REFERENCES Appropriate common references the SPIES airworthiness release TC 21 24 USSOCOM 350 6 FM 3 05 210 and FM 3 05 210 4 152 TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 TASK 2060 Perform Rescue Hoist Operations WARNING Ensure that crewmembers in the cabin area are wearing safety harnesses secured to tie down rings anytime the cabin doors are open The crewmember riding the hoist will be secured either to the aircraft or to the jungle penetrator CONDITIONS In an H 60 helicopter equipped with a rescue hoist system STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 Rated a Perform rescue hoist procedures per the appropriate aircraft operator s manual CL FM 4 02 2 FM 3 04 203 and the unit standing operating procedure SOP b Maintain appropriate hover altitude 5 feet c Do not allow drift to exceed 5 feet d Perform post flight procedures per the appropriate aircraft operator s manual CL 2 Nonrated a Prepare the appropriate hoisting equipment for the required mission overwater rapid river jungle mountain or desert operations b Operate the rescue hoist pendant per the appropriate technical manual c Prepare patient for recovery d Secure th
133. accomplishment c May is used to indicate an acceptable method of accomplishment c Night vision devices NVDs NVD refers to either night vision system NVS or night vision goggle NVG 1 NVS refers to the night vision system that is attached to the aircraft Publication Date TC 3 04 33 1 1 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 1 2 NVG refers to any night vision goggle image intensifier system for example the AN AVS 6 aviator s night vision imaging system ANVIS 1 2 TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 2 Training This chapter describes requirements for qualification refresher mission and continuation training Crewmember qualification requirements will be according to AR 95 1 TC 3 04 11 and this ATM 2 1 b QUALIFICATION TRAINING Initial aircraft qualification 1 Rated crewmember Initial aircraft qualification training in the H 60 is conducted at the USAACE or at Department of the Army DA approved training sites according to a USAACE approved program of instruction POI 2 Nonrated crewmember Military occupational specialty MOS qualification is conducted at DA approved training sites Initial aircraft qualification training for NCMs is conducted at the unit according to this ATM appendix A sections I and applicable regulations and the commander s aircrew tra
134. accordance with the H 60A L maintenance test flight manual with respect to the different cockpit configurations This will allow for an 60 MP ME to complete the evaluation in one aircraft 3 8 TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 Crewmember Tasks This chapter implements portions of STANAG 3114 Air Standard 60 16 This chapter describes the tasks that are essential for maintaining crewmember skills It defines the task title number conditions and standards by which performance is measured A description of crew actions along with training and evaluation requirements is also provided It does not contain all the maneuvers that can be performed in the aircraft 4 1 TASK CONTENTS a Task number Each ATM task is identified by a 10 digit systems approach to training SAT number The first three digits of each task in this ATM are 011 U S Army Aviation School the second three digits are 237 H 60 For convenience only the last four digits are listed in this training circular TC The last four digits are as follows e Individual base tasks are assigned 1000 series numbers e Crew mission tasks are assigned 2000 series numbers e Maintenance tasks are assigned 4000 series numbers Note Additional tasks designated by the commander as mission essential are not included in this ATM The commander will develop conditions standards and descript
135. adjust the aircraft gross weight according to the aircraft operator s manual D Item 12 PREDICTED HOVER TORQUE Estimated torque required for a stationary hover using takeoff gross weight and current PA and FAT Note If the blade erosion kit and or externally mounted MEDEVAC equipment is installed adjust the aircraft gross weight according to the aircraft operator s manual Note At the time of departure maximum torque available may be higher than what is listed in MAX TORQUE AVAILABLE item 8 due to item 8 being computed using maximum FAT for the mission At the time of departure engine performance may be increased due to a lower FAT If this is the case the aircraft may be able to sustain hover capability single engine even though MAX TORQUE AVAILABLE item 8 may be less than PREDICTED HOVER TORQUE SINGLE ENGINE Note PREDICTED HOVER TORQUE SINGLE ENGINE is computed using a specific wheel height If the predicted hover torque exceeds the MAX TORQUE AVAILABLE the aircraft may still be capable of sustaining single engine hover at a lower wheel height m Item 13 MIN SE AIRSPEED AIRSPEED IAS WO W STORES Minimum MIN airspeed to sustain level flight single engine SE without or with stores Value derived from cruise charts using departure conditions Consideration should be given to an IGE takeoff if conditions merit n Item 14 ZERO FUEL WEIGHT The zero fuel weight on the DD Form 365 4 Weight and Balance Clea
136. aft The NCM will announce JUMPERS CLEAR once all jumpers have exited the aircraft If static line parachutes are being used the NCM will immediately retrieve and secure the static lines deployment bags if required The NCM will announce total number of operational parachutes NCM will attempt to monitor the status of the parachutists Note 1 If the jumpmaster cannot communicate directly with the P P the jumpmaster will communicate with the NCM via hand and arm signals The NCM will relay necessary information to the P P via the intercom Note 2 This task applies to static line and free fall paradrop operations TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training Training will be conducted in the aircraft 2 Evaluation Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft REFERENCES Appropriate common references AR 95 1 14 CFR Federal Aviation Regulation FAR Part 105 FM 3 21 220 FM 3 05 211 and USASOC Reg 350 2 4 158 TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 TASK 2065 Operate Personnel Locater System CONDITIONS In an H 60 helicopter with personnel locator system PLS installed STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 Program proper frequencies into the PLS 2 Insert the proper search code into the PLS 3 Use the PLS control head 4 Interpret the course to target information displa
137. aft does not have single engine capability the MAX ENDURANCE IAS DUAL ENGINE item 24 or the OPTIMUM IAS AT MAX ALLOWABLE GWT SINGLE ENGINE item 34 as appropriate should be briefed as the emergency single engine airspeed 2 Normally only one EMER SE IAS is selected However when MIN MAX IAS SINGLE ENGINE range item 29 is wide the crew may select two emergency single engine airspeeds one slow and one fast based on mission profile modes of flight environmental conditions or other factors 3 There is no power margin available when operating single engine at the MIN MAX IAS SINGLE ENGINE item 29 These airspeeds are computed using the maximum torque available single engine for the lowest ETF engine It is not recommended that the aircraft be flown at airspeeds that require maximum power for continued single engine flight 4 The GO NO GO TORQUE for sling loads is determined by using the same process as item 10 above using the MAX ALLOWABLE GWT OGE and a wheel height that suspends the load approximately 10 feet above ground level AGL CRUISE DATA Publication Date TC 3 04 33 D 5 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Appendix D The maximum continuous power MCP lines on the CRUISE charts are used to define power levels that an engine can produce continuously and remain out of time limited engine operating limitations 30 minute 10 minute or 2 5 minute TGT values Th
138. aft per the appropriate aircraft operator s manual 4 Assist in marshaling passengers to designated assembly area 5 Perform or describe duties as briefed in the crew mission briefing DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a The pilot in command PC will direct an emergency egress The PC will determine if the egress will be done before the rotor blades have stopped If the PC is incapacitated the next ranking rated crewmember nonrated crewmember RCM NCM will perform this function The PC will also determine and announce if an emergency engine shutdown will be performed b The pilot on the controls P and pilot not on the controls P will egress their respective positions and assist with passenger egress c The NCM will direct passenger egress d All crewmembers will perform duties as briefed during the crew briefing and assist with the egress of incapacitated crewmembers and passengers if required 2 Procedures a If an emergency egress occurs use the cabin cockpit doors If they are jammed use the emergency release If the emergency release does not work break out the Plexiglas windows with the crash axe boot or other suitable object Once out guide yourself and passengers to clear the aircraft in a safe direction and meet at the assembly point Account for all personnel b Perform the emergency egress of a pilot from his or her seat per the appropriate aircraft operator s manual The instructions may also be found on t
139. age the GO ARND mode by pressing the GO ARND button on the respective flight director display control panel FD DCP Note The decision to go around may be made at any time but in limited power situations should be determined before descending below the barriers or decelerating below effective transitional lift ETL CAUTION Selecting the coupled GO ARND mode during limited power conditions or operating at high gross weight may exceed aircraft limitations SNOW SAND DUST CONSIDERATIONS If during the go around visual references are lost initiate an instrument takeoff ITO immediately MOUNTAINOUS AREA CONSIDERATIONS Perform one of the following 1 Where escape routes exist turn the aircraft away from the terrain apply forward cyclic and lower the collective if possible Accelerate the aircraft to an appropriate airspeed for conditions and complete the go around 2 Where escape routes do not exist adjust aircraft for maximum rate of climb to ensure obstacle clearance Upon clearing obstacles accelerate aircraft to an appropriate airspeed for conditions and complete the go around Publication Date TC 3 04 33 4 73 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training Training may be conducted in the aircraft or simulator 2 Evaluation Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft REFERENCES Appropriate common references 4 74 TC
140. ailure e Intercommunication system ICS failure WARNING I aircraft equipped with rotor brake are prohibited against running an engine against the gust lock Only one engine at a time will be operated against the gust lock rotor brake and at no time shall the engine power control lever of the running engine be advanced beyond the IDLE detent Do not operate the engine against the gust lock rotor brake under conditions where main rotor blade safety clearance is inadequate from other aircraft vehicles equipment or other structures Do not operate the engine against the gust lock rotor brake to dry out the engine following an engine flush procedure Note Prior to engine start visually confirm the GUST LOCK is engaged and the caution capsule is illuminated before initiating the engine start Note Confirm the location of any crewmembers or support personnel not visible from the cockpit before engine start 5 22 TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Maintenance Test Pilot Tasks TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training Training may be conducted in the aircraft or simulator 2 Evaluation Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft REFERENCES Appropriate common references Publication Date TC 3 04 33 5 23 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 _33 UH60 FAD 20120522 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33
141. ainst rocket or gun attack accuracy against helicopter targets The enemy fighter will have as little as 0 5 3 seconds to execute a gun or rocket engagement due to their high speed and the limited effective range of their gun or rockets 6 Air to ground bomb passive countermeasures Once dropped the fighter s bomb will fall on a ballistic flight path that can be avoided or mitigated if detected in time The time of fall of the bombs can be exploited by the attack helicopter crew to avoid the heart of the enemy s weapons effect zones To avoid being hit by their own fragments bombs are equipped with time delayed fuzes of 4 to 6 seconds minimum At 100 KTGS a helicopter can displace over 300 meters in 6 seconds Once bombs depart the fighter the helicopter should fly perpendicular to the bomb s line of fall and proceed at maximum speed and minimum altitude This will place the helicopter at the edge of the fragment envelope where fragment density will be at a minimum 7 IR radar missile evasive maneuvers See classified Army Aviation TTP g Helicopters Due to their limited performance differential and inability to accelerate out of enemy weapons range once engaged it is impractical for helicopters to break contact from one another Consequently the success of helicopter evasive maneuvers will likely depend on seeing the enemy aircraft first and avoiding its WEZ The most effective means of avoiding a helicopter WEZ is to achieve rotor
142. aircraft or simulator REFERENCES Appropriate common references Publication Date TC 3 04 33 4 87 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 TASK 1169 Perform Flight Director Operations H 60M CONDITIONS In an H 60M helicopter STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 Operate the flight director per the aircraft operator s manual 2 Program the flight management system FMS for the desired flight plan 3 Select the desired display on the multifunction display MFD 4 Select the appropriate modes on the flight director display control panel FD DCP 5 Follow cyclic roll cyclic pitch and collective position indicator cues as appropriate Note The pilot on the controls P will monitor the primary flight display PFD for correct aircraft responses if coupled flight is selected WARNING During coupled flight in close proximity to terrain obstacles or other hazards the pilot on the controls will be in a position to override any undesirable inputs DESCRIPTION 1 Crew Actions The flight director is primarily the pilot on the controls P responsibility The pilot not on the controls will adjust the FD DCP reference s when requested by the P and call out the action will monitor the flight instruments and the FD DCP selected mode annunciator lights and will immediately advise the P of any abnormal indications or chan
143. al and single engine are computed the same as item 7 departure data using arrival FAT e Item 42 MAX TORQUE AVAILABLE Maximum torque available for dual and single engine are computed the same as item 8 departure data using arrival forecast PA and FAT Note Dual engine information may also be derived from the tabular performance data in the aircraft operator s CL f Item 43 PREDICTED HOVER TORQUE The predicted hover torque is computed the same as item 12 departure data using arrival forecast PA and FAT g Item 44 MAX ALLOWABLE GWT OGE IGE The maximum allowable gross weight is computed the same as item 24 departure data using arrival forecast PA and FAT h Item 45 MAX HOVER HEIGHT IGE The maximum hover height is computed the same as item 11 departure data using arrival forecast PA and FAT i Item 46 MIN SE AIRSPEED IAS WO W STORES The minimum single engine airspeed is computed the same as item 13 departure data using arrival forecast PA and FAT TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS l Training Training will be conducted academically Publication Date TC 3 04 33 4 21 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 2 Evaluation Evaluation will be conducted academically REFERENCES DD Form 365 4 DA Form 5701 60 R Turbine Engine Health Indicator HIT Log and appendix D of this manual 4 22 TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADO
144. ally TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training Training may be conducted in the aircraft or academically 2 Evaluation Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft or academically REFERENCES Common standard references DA Form 1971 2 R and DA Form 1971 7 R 4 180 TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 TASK 2120 Provide Patient Treatment at Emergency Medical Technician Basic Intermediate or Paramedic Level CONDITIONS In a medical evacuation MEDEVAC configured H 60 helicopter given a medical equipment set air ambulance with an actual or simulated patient s additional equipment according to local medical treatment protocols STANDARDS 1 Flight Medic a Perform casualty triage and care b Brief litter teams and passengers on procedures for approaching loading and leaving the aircraft c Load and secure litter and ambulatory patients equipment and baggage unload at destination d Relay essential patient information and estimated time of arrival ETA to the medical treatment facility e Respond to medical control s directives 2 NCM a Configure the aircraft for loading patients b Load and secure litter and ambulatory patients equipment and baggage unload at destination DESCRIPTION 1 Patient contact a Perform triage as necessary and treat injuries and illnesses per local medical treatment protocols in
145. and phrases that accurately convey critical information They must avoid using terms that have multiple meanings such as right back up or I have it Crewmembers must also avoid using indefinite modifiers such as Do you see that tree or You are coming in a little fast b Sustain a Climate of Ready and Prompt Assistance The requirement to maintain a professional atmosphere by all members of the team begins with the team leadership of the PC However all crewmembers must equally respect the value of other crewmember s expertise and judgment regardless of rank duty or seniority Every member has a responsibility to maintain situational awareness for mission requirements flight regulations operating procedures and safety Each crewmember must be willing to practice advocacy and assertiveness should the situation demand a different course of action as time permits It is critical to maintain this crew climate that enables opportunity to apply appropriate decision making techniques for defining the best course of action when problems arise Courses of action may demand that assistance be directed to other crewmembers or could be voluntary assistance that is offered in a timely manner depending on time constraints and information available All crewmembers must remain approachable especially in critical phases of flight when reaction time is at a premium Note The two challenge rule allows one crewmember to assume the duties of another
146. and the following additions modifications Rated 1 Select a suitable landing area analyze suitability barriers wind approach path touchdown point and takeoff direction 2 Ensure that sufficient power exists for the type of approach landing desired 3 Maintain a constant approach angle clear of obstacles to desired point of termination hover or touchdown surface 4 Maintain rate of closure appropriate for the conditions 5 Maintain ground track alignment with the landing direction as appropriate 6 Align aircraft with landing direction below 50 feet above ground level AGL or as appropriate for transition from terrain flight 7 Perform a smooth and controlled termination to a hover or touchdown to the surface 8 Monitor wind conditions using cockpit indicators CI 9 Determine wind direction and velocity at the landing point DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a The pilot on the controls P will maintain his or her primary focus outside the aircraft while conducting a cross reference of CI to execute the approach During the approach the P will announce any deviation to the briefed approach particularly any deviation in escape routing Upon completing the approach the P will conduct a hover power check in the intended landing direction over the intended landing point and at the altitude selected in the reconnaissance The crew will then verify whether conditions surface wind and temperature pressure altitud
147. as described below Annotate the computed maximum allowable gross weight OGE IGE or the maximum gross weight per the operator s manual chapter 5 whichever is less Note 1 If OGE capability does not exist the MAX HOVER HEIGHT IGE item 11 must be computed Note 2 If the blade erosion kit and or externally mounted MEDEVAC equipment is installed adjust the maximum allowable GWT according to the aircraft operator s manual Note 3 Tab data values represent a 100 foot hover height OGE and 10 foot hover height IGE 1 MAX ALLOWABLE GWT OGE a Step 1 Enter the HOVER chart at the TORQUE PER ENGINE OGE at the dual engine MAX TORQUE AVAILABLE item 8 then move right to the GROSS WEIGHT 1 000 LB chart If the dual engine maximum torque available exceeds transmission torque limits use the DUAL ENGINE TRANS LIMIT line to compute the maximum allowable gross weight OGE b Step 2 Reenter the HOVER chart at the appropriate FREE AIR TEMP C and move right to the appropriate PRESSURE ALTITUDE 1 000 FT then move down to the GROSS WEIGHT TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Instructions for Manual Computation of Department of the Army Form 5701 60 R 1 000 LB chart Read the maximum allowable gross weight OGE at the intersection of this step and step 1 above Record the MAX ALLOWABLE GWT OGE 2 MAX ALLOWABLE GWT IGE a Step 1 Enter the HOVER chart at t
148. asked The P and NCM will announce when their attention is focused inside the aircraft and again when attention is reestablished outside e The crew must clear directly below the aircraft if descending vertically or the flight path if moving laterally 2 Procedures Masking is a technique using terrain to mask cover or conceal the aircraft from threat detection and weapons employment Unmasking is a maneuver used when it becomes necessary to observe points of interest that are obscured while in a masked position Before unmasking a thorough map reconnaissance should be completed so that all eyes can be focused outside during the unmasking The three general types of unmasking are as follows a Unmasking in flight This type is used when the aircraft has forward speed and can best be described as a quick pop up and peek at the desired point or area of observation It is usually used while flying behind a ridgeline or other linear barrier b Unmasking at a hover vertically Announce intent to unmask The crew will acknowledge that they are prepared to execute the maneuver Ensure that sufficient power is available to unmask Increase the collective to obtain sufficient altitude to see over the mask without exceeding aircraft limitations Maintain horizontal main rotor blade clearance from the mask in case of a power loss or a tactical need to mask the aircraft quickly When possible unmask at a safe distance from the mask to allow a rapid desce
149. ata into the approved mission planning software and brief the crew on the mission 2 Procedures Plan the flight according to Tasks 1004 1006 or 2012 as applicable using all appropriate data TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 2 Training Training will be conducted academically Evaluation Evaluation will be conducted academically REFERENCES Appropriate common references Task 1004 Task 1006 and Task 2012 4 30 TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 TASK 1014 Operate Aviation Life Support Equipment CONDITIONS Given the appropriate aviation life support equipment ALSE for the mission STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 Inspect perform operational checks on ALSE 2 Use personal and mission ALSE 3 Brief passengers in using ALSE DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions The pilot in command PC will verify that all required ALSE equipment is onboard the aircraft before takeoff 2 Procedures On the basis of mission requirements obtain the required ALSE Inspect equipment for serviceability and perform required operational checks Secure the required ALSE in the aircraft per the appropriate aircraft operator s manual and the unit standing operating procedure SOP Brief passengers in using ALSE TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training Training will be conducted acade
150. ate of climb value derived from step 4 above R C greater or less than 1 400 ft min f Step 6 Move left to read the CORRECTION TO ADD KNOTS Add or subtract this value to from the MAX END IAS from item 24 step 1 above Record the resultant MAX R C IAS DUAL ENGINE 2 Alternative or sling load configuration Note The torque change to compensate for drag alternative or sling load configuration at MAX END IAS is often negligible and not computed m Item 28 MAX ALTITUDE MSL MAX ENDURANCE IAS DUAL ENGINE Compute MAX ALTITUDE MSL based on MAX END IAS Note Several different cruise charts may have to be referenced when computing the MAX ALTITUDE MSL It is recommended to start with the 10 000 FT CRUISE chart and forecast temperature 1 Step 1 Enter the CRUISE chart at the MAX END AND R C line Move left or right along the line to the AIRCRAFT GWT item 3 departure data 2 Step 2 If the intersection of MAX END AND R C line and AIRCRAFT GWT item 3 departure data is to the left of the TORQUE AVAILABLE 30 MIN T700 or 10 MIN T701 adjusted for ATF flight is still possible at MAX END IAS move to the next higher CRUISE chart and repeat steps 1 and 2 If the intersection of MAX END AND R C and AIRCRAFT GWT item 3 departure data is to the right of the TORQUE AVAILABLE 30 MIN T700 or 10 MIN T701 line corresponding to the ATF flight is no longer possible at MAX END IAS move to the next lower CRUISE chart and re
151. ated crewmember NCM as necessary b The RCM and NCM should assist the MP as directed 2 Procedures Select method based on target RPM R maintenance performed weather crew a Option 1 Collective Slowly reduce to full down maintaining 80 KIAS with helicopter in trim When passing thru check altitude record percent RPM R and fuel quantity Make a power recovery Using Autorotation RPM Correction Chart Check that RPM is within 3 b Option 2 INCR DECR Switch decrease RPM 1 amp 2 to 96 percent Slowly reduce to full down maintaining 80 KIAS with helicopter in trim After ensuring the rotor system has fully decoupled the MP will increase percentage RPM 1 amp 2 to 100 percent using the INCR DECR switch prior to power recovery Make a power recovery Using Autorotation RPM Correction Chart Check that RPM is within 3 c Option 3 2 ENGINE POWER CONT lever IDLE and stabilize Then set just forward of the IDLE detent Collective Slowly reduce to full down maintaining 80 KIAS with helicopter in trim 1 ENG POWER CONT lever Retard to IDLE then set just forward of IDLE detent When passing thru check altitude record percent RPM R and fuel quantity Advance both ENG POWER CONT levers to fly Make a power recovery Using Autorotation RPM Correction Chart Check that RPM is within 3 TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training Training may be conducted in the aircraft or simulator 2 Evaluation Evaluation will be conducte
152. ation will be conducted in the aircraft REFERENCES Appropriate common references Publication Date TC 3 04 33 5 13 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 5 TASK 4200 Perform Backup Tail Rotor Servo Check CONDITION In an H 60 helicopter STANDARDS Appropriate common standards DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a The maintenance test pilot MP will direct assistance from the pilot not on the controls P and nonrated crewmember NCM as required b The P and NCM will assist the MP as directed 2 Procedures a Perform the check according to the applicable maintenance test flight MTF manual b Direct the P to brace using the overhead hand hold hand and to identify and hold the TAIL SERVO switch with his or her other hand Brief the P on the terms backup normal and power control levers and the actions to perform Ensure the P does not remove his or her hand from the TAIL SERVO switch unless power control levers or check complete is announced Direct the NCM to remain secured and to assist in clearing the aircraft and maintaining obstacle avoidance Note If the aircraft begins an uncommanded turn or the pedals bind during the backup servo check direct the P to place the tail rotor control switch to normal If tail servo control is not regained announce power control levers perform a hovering autorotation and do not attempt to fly the aircraft until the def
153. be conducted in the aircraft REFERENCES Appropriate common references 4 72 TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 TASK 1068 Perform Go Around CONDITION In an H 60 helicopter STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 Determine when a go around is required 2 Immediately apply appropriate power to initiate go around 3 Immediately adjust pitch attitude to clear obstacles and achieve appropriate climb airspeed for conditions DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a The pilot on the controls P will announce his or her intent to perform a go around and will remain primarily focused outside to avoid obstacles b The pilot not on the controls P and nonrated crewmember NCM will assist in clearing the aircraft and provide adequate warning of obstacles The P will also monitor systems instruments to ensure aircraft limits are not exceeded 2 Procedures a When it becomes doubtful that a safe landing can be done announce go around Immediately apply power if available and simultaneously adjust pitch attitude to stop the descent and clear any obstacles Maintain aircraft in trim and adjust to the appropriate climb speed for conditions Maintain the appropriate ground track b The pilot on the controls P may engage the GO ARND mode by pressing the go around button GO ARND button on the cyclic grip or eng
154. be used Note During training when applying the collective for power recovery to include go around or termination with power be aware of the tendency for initial RPM R decay The IP will ensure the main rotor RMPR is maintained within limits and sufficient power is available to complete the required maneuver e Power recovery Upon receiving the command power recovery the P will apply the collective as necessary to arrest the rate of descent while simultaneously maintaining trim with the pedals The P continues to apply sufficient collective to arrest the rate of descent and establish a normal climb f Terminate with power Upon receiving the command terminate with power the P will adjust the collective to arrest the descent at an altitude that will ensure that the tail wheel will not contact the ground Conditions permitting ground speed at the termination of the maneuver should be the same as for touchdown Note For training ensure aircraft attitude is adjusted for landing as much as possible during the termination portion of the maneuver If possible avoid excessive nose high landing attitudes that would cause the stabilator to contact the ground and land in a excessive nose high attitude had an actual touchdown occurred g Touchdown autorotations may only be conducted in an emergency or in the simulator During touchdown autorotations the P will adjust the cyclic and collective to smoothly cushion the main gear 4 78
155. bility does exist place OGE in this block Publication Date TC 3 04 33 D 3 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Appendix D Note 2 If the blade erosion kit and or externally mounted MEDEVAC equipment is installed adjust the aircraft gross weight according to the aircraft operator s manual 1 Item 12 PREDICTED HOVER TORQUE Use the appropriate HOVER chart as described below for torque required to hover Use AIRCRAFT GWT item 3 current PA item 1 and FAT item 2 Note If the blade erosion kit and or externally mounted MEDEVAC equipment is installed adjust the aircraft gross weight according to the aircraft operator s manual 1 PREDICTED HOVER TORQUE DUAL ENGINE Compute the torque the same as for item 10 above using the AIRCRAFT GWT item 3 instead of the MAX ALLOWABLE GWT Record dual engine PREDICTED HOVER TORQUE 2 PREDICTED HOVER TORQUE SINGLE ENGINE Double the PREDICTED HOVER TORQUE value that was computed in the step above Record single engine PREDICTED HOVER TORQUE Note 1 At the time of departure maximum torque available may be higher than what is listed in MAX TORQUE AVAILABLE item 8 due to item 8 being computed using maximum FAT for the mission Note 2 At the time of departure engine performance may be increased due to a lower FAT If this is the case the aircraft may be able to sustain hover capability single engine even though MAX TORQUE AVAILABLE item 8 ma
156. bjects the P can detect altitude changes when his or her perspective to these objects changes Ground objects fences trails roads provide excellent references for detecting lateral drift Proper scanning techniques must be used The P may become spatially disoriented when alternating his or her viewing perspective between high and low references The AN AVS 7 ANVIS HUD hover symbology can aid in maintaining position and hover altitude for night vision goggle NVG operations and assist in maintaining position over the insertion point during adverse environmental conditions blowing dust sand or snow or low levels of illumination Proper scanning techniques are necessary to detect aircraft drift and to avoid spatial disorientation Proper scanning techniques are necessary to detect aircraft drift and to avoid spatial disorientation If possible an area with adequate ground contrast and reference points should be used Publication Date TC 3 04 33 4 151 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 Spatial disorientation can be overwhelming during overwater operations at night If there are visible lights on the horizon or if the shoreline can be seen the pilot may opt to approach the survivor s so the aircraft is pointed toward these references if the wind permits If no other references exist deploy chemlight bundles to form a runway to assist in maintaining a stable hover TRAINING AND E
157. blade masking by operating above the enemy helicopter 1 Maintain maximum maneuver energy and do not decelerate below bucket speed approximately maximum endurance maximum rate of climb airspeed 2 Maintain the enemy helicopter in sight until it is destroyed if able and appropriate 3 Vector other friendly helicopters onto the enemy 4 Deny or limit enemy shooting opportunities by exiting the enemy weapon system WEZ and then climb above the enemy helicopter and force rotor blade masking 5 All organic weapons systems should be considered based on their individual characteristics and effectiveness against mobile thin skinned targets Note Friendly locations must be considered prior to firing NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION DEVICE NVD CONSIDERATIONS Threat elements will be harder to detect Crewmembers must maintain situational awareness TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training may be conducted in the aircraft or a suitable simulator 2 Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft REFERENCES Appropriate common references FM 3 90 FM 3 54 10 FM 3 04 140 and classified EVM TTP 4 126 TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 TASK 2042 Perform Actions On Contact CONDITIONS In a helicopter or simulator in a simulated tactical environment given a simulated tactical mission briefing and map with graphics and enemy contact
158. cation Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 TASK 1038 Perform Hovering Flight CONDITION In an H 60 helicopter with the aircraft cleared STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 Perform a smooth controlled ascent to hover 2 Perform a smooth controlled descent with minimum drift at touchdown 3 For coupled hover engage the appropriate hover mode DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a The pilot on the controls P will announce his or her intent to perform a specific hovering flight maneuver and will remain focused primarily outside the aircraft to monitor altitude and avoid obstacles The P will ensure and announce that the aircraft is cleared prior toturning or repositioning the aircraft The P will announce when terminating the maneuver b The pilot not on the controls P and nonrated crewmember NCM will assist in clearing the aircraft and provide adequate warning of obstacles unannounced drift or altitude changes They will announce when their attention is focused inside the aircraft and again when attention is reestablished outside 2 Procedures a Takeoff to a hover With the collective full down place the cyclic in a neutral position and increase the collective smoothly Apply pedals to maintain heading and coordinate the cyclic for a vertical ascent As the aircraft leaves the ground check for the proper control
159. ce safety security of passengers and equipment They provide assistance to the P and P as required They are also responsible for maintaining the aircraft or mission equipment according to their MOS g Trainer evaluator When acting as PI during training and evaluations the trainer evaluator will act as a functioning crewmember and perform as required unless he is training or evaluating crewmember response to an ineffective crewmember In the aircraft the trainer evaluator will ensure safe landing areas are available for engine failure training and that aircraft limits are not exceeded 2 Procedures This section explains the portions of a task that an individual or crew accomplishes f Considerations This section defines consideration for accomplishing the task under various flight modes for example night NVG environmental conditions snow sand dust and mountain pinnacle ridgeline operations Crewmembers must consider additional aspects to a task when performing in different environmental conditions Including environmental considerations in a task does not relieve the commander of the requirement for developing an environmental training program per TC 3 04 11 Specific requirements for different aircraft series or mission equipment H 60M ERFS Volcano Publication Date TC 3 04 33 4 3 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 and so forth may also be addressed as a consideration
160. chapter 4 TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training Training will be conducted in the aircraft 2 Evaluation Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft REFERENCES Appropriate common references Publication Date TC 3 04 33 4 111 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 TASK 2012 Perform Tactical Flight Mission Planning CONDITIONS Before flight in an H 60 helicopter and given a mission briefing navigational maps a navigational computer approved mission planning software if available and other flight planning materials as required STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 Analyze the mission using the mission enemy terrain and weather troops and support available time available and civil considerations METT TC factors available 2 Perform a map photo reconnaissance using the available map media or photos Ensure that all known hazards to terrain flight are plotted or entered into the approved mission planning software if applicable 3 Select the appropriate altitude s and terrain flight modes as appropriate 4 Select appropriate primary and alternate routes and enter all of them on a map route sketch or into the approved mission planning software 5 Determine the distance 1 kilometer ground speed 5 knots and estimated time en route ETE 1 minute for each leg of the flight 6 Determine the fu
161. common standards and maintain torque variance 10 percent 0 percent on heading yaw check s DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a The maintenance test pilot MP should direct assistance from the rated crewmember RCM and nonrated crewmember NCM as necessary b The RCM and NCM will assist the MP as directed 2 Procedures Perform the checks according to the applicable maintenance test flight MTF manual Note The hover height may be increased due to terrain or obstacles TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training Training may be conducted in the aircraft 2 Evaluation Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft REFERENCES Appropriate common references 5 12 TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Maintenance Test Pilot Tasks TASK 4193 Perform In Flight Checks CONDITION In an H 60 helicopter STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and verbally confirm all bleed air is off prior to 100 kts stabilator check DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a The maintenance test pilot MP will direct assistance from the rated crewmember RCM and nonrated crewmember NCM as necessary b The RCM and NCM should assist the MP as directed 2 Procedures Perform the checks according to the applicable maintenance test flight MTF manual TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training Training may be conducted in the aircraft 2 Evaluation Evalu
162. conducted in the aircraft or simulator 2 Evaluation Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft or simulator REFERENCES Appropriate common references Publication Date TC 3 04 33 4 107 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 TASK 1262 Participate In A Crew Level After Action Review CONDITIONS After flight in an H 60 and given a unit approved crew level after action review checklist STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 The pilot in command PC will conduct a detailed crew level after action review using the example shown below or a unit approved crew level after action review checklist 2 All crewmembers will actively participate in the review DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a The PC will conduct a crew level after action review The PC will use a unit approved checklist similar to the one shown in table 4 2 page 4 103 The PC will actively seek input from all crewmembers The PC will ensure that the results of the review are passed to unit operations and flight standards b All crewmembers will actively participate in the review The intent is to constructively review the mission and apply lessons learned into subsequent missions 2 Procedures Using an after action review checklist participate in a crew level after action review of the mission The review should be an open and frank discussion of all aspects of the mis
163. craft is clear of water throughout the maneuver to ensure clearance and stabilator does not contact water and does not become a hazard to the helocasters CONDITIONS In an H 60 helicopter with helocast equipment installed a helocast team and a helocast master STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 Rated a Conduct a thorough crew and passenger briefing b During insertion maintain insertion altitude of 10 feet 0 5 ft c During insertion maintain insertion ground speed of 10 KGS 0 3 KGS d Maintain heading 10 degrees 2 Nonrated a Ensure aircraft is configured for helocast operations b Perform crew coordination actions c Manage and control door straps and cargo doors DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a The pilot in command PC will conduct or direct a crewmember to conduct a crew and passenger briefing and ensure personnel are familiar with emergency procedures The PC will also ensure all participants in the helocast are briefed according to the unit standing operating procedure SOP b The pilot on the controls P remains focused primarily outside the aircraft throughout the maneuver and should make the approach into the wind if possible The P will slow to the desired airspeed and altitude The maximum airspeed and altitude is 10 knots at 10 feet Note The aircraft maybe flown slightly lower or slower but the potential exist to drag the tail wheel in the
164. crew training folder IATF 8 FI The nonrated crewmember flight instructor FI must meet the requirements in paragraph 3 3a 7 In addition the FI must be able to objectively train evaluate and document performance of the CE MO and OR as appropriate The FI must be able to develop and implement an individual training plan and have a thorough understanding of the requirements and administration of the aircrew training program 9 SI The nonrated crewmember standardization instructor SI must meet the requirements in paragraph 3 3a 7 and 8 In addition the SI must be able to train and evaluate the SI FI CE MO and OR using role reversal as appropriate The SI also must be able to develop and implement a unit TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Evaluation 3 4 training plan and administer the commander s ATP Note SP IP TIE ME UT SI FI will be evaluated on their ability to apply the learning and teaching process outlined in paragraph 3 4b 12 Academic evaluation criteria 1 Proficiency flight evaluations The commander or a representative will select appropriate topics to be evaluated from paragraph 3 4b that apply 2 APART standardization NVG annual evaluations The SP IP SI FI will evaluate a minimum of two topics from each subject area in paragraph 3 4b that apply 3 APART instrument evaluation The JE will evaluate a minimum of two to
165. crewmember who fails to respond to two consecutive challenges automatically For example the P becomes fixated confused task overloaded or otherwise allows the aircraft to enter an unsafe position or attitude The pilot not on the controls P first asks the P if he is aware of the aircraft position or attitude If the P does not acknowledge this challenge the P issues a second challenge If the P fails to acknowledge the second challenge the P assumes control of the aircraft c Effectively Manage Coordinate and Prioritize Planned Actions Unexpected Events and Workload Distribution The crew performing as a team should avoid distractions from essential activities while distributing and managing the workloads equally Both the technical and managerial aspects of coping with normal and unusual situations are important Proper sequencing and timing guarantees that the actions of one crewmember support and mesh with the actions of the other crewmembers Responsible effort must be used to ensure that actions and directives are clear timely relevant complete verified and coordinated with minimal direction from the PC 1 Direct Assistance A crewmember will direct or request assistance when he cannot maintain aircraft control position or clearance A crewmember will also direct assistance when being overloaded with tasks or unable to properly operate or troubleshoot aircraft systems without help from the other crewmembers The PC ensures t
166. ction the P will again advise the P and be prepared to make a collective control input The P will raise the collective when it becomes apparent that the aircraft will descend below 25 feet above highest obstacle AHO During NOE flight the P will advise the P whenever an unannounced descent is detected He will immediately raise the collective when it becomes apparent that the P is not taking corrective action and that the aircraft will descend below 10 feet AHO 2 Procedures Terrain flight involves flight close to the earth s surface The modes of terrain flight are NOE contour and low level Crewmembers will seldom perform purely NOE or contour flight Instead they will alternate techniques while maneuvering over the desired route The crew must look far enough ahead of the aircraft at all times to assist in avoiding traffic and obstacles a NOE flight Perform NOE flight at varying airspeeds and altitudes as close to the earth s surface as vegetation obstacles and ambient light will permit b Contour flight Perform contour flight by varying altitude and while maintaining a relatively constant airspeed depending on the vegetation obstacles and ambient light Generally follow the contours of the earth c Low level flight Perform low level flight at a constant airspeed and altitude To prevent or reduce the chance of detection by enemy forces fly at the minimum safe altitude that will allow a constant altitude Note Hover out
167. cyclic as he lowers the collective the pilot will hear an audible 4 Rev knocking This is the first indication of DSP With more rear cyclic Publication Date TC 3 04 33 4 71 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 applied DSP will become heavy you may also feel the pounding in the airframe and main rotor blade contact with the ALQ 144 and tail rotor drive shaft may result Note This maneuver may be performed in an environment where obscurants for example sand dust or snow are present NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLE NVG CONSIDERATIONS Altitude apparent ground speed and rate of closure are difficult to estimate at night The rate of descent at night during the final 100 feet should be slightly slower than during the day to avoid abrupt attitude changes at low altitudes ROUGH UNPREPARED SURFACE CONSIDERATIONS Closely monitor touchdown speed when landing to a rough or unprepared surface Consistent with the situation and aircraft capabilities a more pronounced deceleration before touchdown coupled with more effective aerodynamic braking after tail wheel touchdown may be appropriate Note that the wheel brakes may be less effective If the surface is soft exercise care when lowering the collective until the aircraft comes to a complete stop TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training Training may be conducted in the aircraft or simulator 2 Evaluation The evaluation will
168. d 3 In flight a Maintain heading 10 degrees b Maintain altitude 100 feet c Maintain airspeed 10 knots indicated airspeed KIAS TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 d e Maintain rate of climb or descent 200 feet per minute FPM f Maintain the aircraft in trim ball width 4 All tasks with the APU engines operating RCMs and NCMs a Maintain airspace surveillance Task 1026 Maintain ground track with minimum drift b Apply appropriate environmental considerations e Description The description explains the preferred method for doing the task to meet the standards This manual cannot address all situations and alternate procedures that may be required Tasks may be accomplished using other methods as long as the task is done safely and the standards are met When specific crew actions are required the task will be broken down into crew actions and procedures as follows 1 Crew actions These define the portions of a task performed by each crewmember to ensure safe efficient and effective task execution The designations P pilot on the controls and P pilot not on the controls do not refer to PC duties When required PC responsibilities are specified For all tasks the following responsibilities apply a All crewmembers Perform crew coordination actions and announce malfunctions or emergency con
169. d This is also used to control horizontal closure speed b Heading compared to ground track indicates crosswind direction c Torque compared to pedal position aircraft must be aligned with ground track below 50 feet airspeed slightly above effective translational lift and referencing a known torque pedal reference setting indicates crosswind direction Publication Date TC 3 04 33 4 65 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 d The vertical speed indicator VSI indicates rate of vertical closure and the possibility of inadequate torque applied e The early or abrupt movement of the airspeed indicator needle to zero indicates a tailwind Airspeed indicator behavior is referenced against previous no wind condition f The duration of the transverse flow shudder and the distance remaining to termination when it ceases also indicates the presence of a headwind or tailwind The normal distance is referenced during no wind conditions This is also used to control horizontal closure speed g The correlation of airspeed torque and VSI indicates and measures the presence and strength of updrafts and downdrafts h To a hover The approach to a hover may terminate with a full stop over the planned termination point or continue movement to transition to hovering flight Progressively decrease the rate of descent and rate of closure until an appropriate hover is established over the i
170. d km kilometer KPH kilometers per hour kts knots LAT latitude LONG longitude LSE landing signal enlisted LZ landing zone MAHF missed approach holding fix MAP missed approach point MAX maximum MCP maximum continuous power MDA minimum descent altitude ME maintenance test pilot evaluator MEDEVAC medical evacuation MEDIC medical education and demonstration of individual competence MEF maximum elevation figures Glossary 4 TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Glossary METL METT TC MFD MFSC MIJI MIN MISC MO MOI MOPP MOS MP MSA MSL MTF MRP NA NAV NAVAID NCM NDB NET Ng NGR NM NOE NOTAM NVD NVG NVS 02 OBOGS ODS OEI OGE OR OROCA ORTCA P Publication Date mission essential task list mission enemy terrain and weather troops and support available time available civil considerations multifunction display multifunction slew controller meaconing interference jamming and intrusion minimum Miscellaneous medical officer flight method of instruction mission oriented protective posture military occupational specialty maintenance test pilot minimum safe altitude mean sea level maintenance test flight maximum rated power not applicable navigation navigational aids nonrated crewmember nondirectional beacon new equipment training engine gas generator speed National Guard regulation nautical mile nap of t
171. d Reckoning CONDITIONS In an H 60 helicopter with the appropriate maps plotter flight computer and flight log STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 Maintain orientation within l2 mile or 800 meters 2 Arrive at checkpoints destination at estimated time of arrival 1 minute DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a The pilot on the controls P will focus primarily outside the aircraft and respond to navigation instructions or cues given by the pilot not on the controls P The P will acknowledge commands issued by the P for the heading altitude and airspeed changes necessary to navigate the desired course The P will announce significant surface features to assist in navigation b The P will direct the P to change aircraft heading altitude and airspeed as appropriate to navigate the desired course The P will use rally terms specific headings relative bearings or key terrain features to accomplish this task He will announce all plotted wires before approaching their location The P and nonrated crewmember NCM will monitor aircraft instruments assist in clearing the aircraft and provide adequate warning to avoid traffic and obstacles The P and NCM will announce when their attention is focused inside the aircraft and again when attention is reestablished outside 2 Procedures a Both pilotage and dead reckoning will be used to maintain the position of the aircraft along t
172. d Task 2086 3 NVG progression For progression to NVG RL 2 a crewmember must complete an NVG evaluation given at night by an NVG IP SP FI or SI as appropriate 2 3 MISSION TRAINING Mission training develops the crewmember s ability to perform specific mission additional tasks selected by the commander to support the unit s METL Mission training may be done during mission support or collective training a Training requirements 1 Academic training Academic training should focus on training a crewmember to operate as a proficient member of an aircrew and the doctrine for the current unit of assignment up to the battalion level The crewmember must demonstrate a working knowledge of the topics listed in paragraph 3 4b with special emphasis placed on sections 8 and 9 If the unit presently does not conduct door gunnery section 9 may be deleted 2 Flight training The crewmember will receive flight training and demonstrate proficiency in the mission and additional tasks designated by the commander Performance tasks will be conducted in each mode as specified on the individual s DA Form 7120 1 R Crew Member Task Performance and Evaluation Requirements and DA Form 7120 2 R Crew Member Task Performance and Evaluation Requirements Continuation Sheet for the crewmember s position Mission training hour requirements are based on demonstrated proficiency Technical tasks may be trained and evaluated in any condition or mode refe
173. d in the aircraft NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLE NVG CONSIDERATIONS The optional procedures are preferred to minimize engine power control lever s movements during flight REFERENCES APPROPRIATE COMMON REFERENCES Publication Date TC 3 04 33 5 19 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 5 TASK 4254 Perform Vh Check CONDITION IN AN H 60 HELICOPTER STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and these additions modifications 1 Verbally confirm all bleed air OFF prior to start of check 2 Airspeed and altitude FD DCP will be uncoupled for duration of check DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a The maintenance test pilot MP should direct assistance from the rated crewmember RCM and nonrated crewmember NCM as necessary b The RCM and NCM will assist the MP as directed 2 Procedures Perform the check according to the maintenance test flight MTF manual TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training Training may be conducted in the aircraft or simulator 2 Evaluation Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft REFERENCES Appropriate common references 5 20 TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Maintenance Test Pilot Tasks TASK 4284 Perform Engine Shutdown Checks CONDITION In an H 60 helicopter STANDARDS Appropriate common standards DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a Th
174. d on the DA Form 7120 R Those RCMs and NCMs whose currency has lapsed must complete as a minimum a 1 hour proficiency flight evaluation given at night in the aircraft by an NVG IP SP FI or SI as appropriate The minimum tasks to be evaluated are listed in tables 2 4 through 2 7 and identified by an NG in the evaluation column ANNUAL CHEMICAL BIOLOGICAL RADIOLOGICAL NUCLEAR CBRN REQUIREMENTS a When required crewmembers will receive CBRN training in the tasks listed below The commander may select other tasks based on the unit s mission Crewmembers will perform at least one iteration of the tasks listed below annually while wearing at a minimum the CBRN mask Task 1028 applies to RCMs only Performance tasks listed below may be conducted in any mode as specified by the Commander All tasks may be conducted in the SFTS CBRN requirements will be specified in the unit SOP 1 Task 1024 Perform Before Starting Engine Through Before Leaving Helicopter Checks 2 Task 1026 Maintain Airspace Surveillance 3 Task 1028 Perform Hover Power Check 2 12 TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Training 4 Task 1038 Perform Hovering Flight 5 Task 1040 Perform Visual Meteorological Conditions Takeoff 6 Task 1058 Perform Visual Meteorological Conditions Approach b While conducting CBRN training the commander will ensure that aircrews exercise caution when
175. d to negotiate the wire obstacle 3 Safely negotiate the wire obstacle minimizing the time unmasked DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a The pilot on the controls P will remain focused primarily outside the aircraft and will announce visual contact with wires and supporting structures b The pilot not on the controls P and nonrated crewmember NCM will announce visual contact with wires and supporting structures They will also provide adequate warning to avoid hazards wires poles or supporting structures They will announce when the aircraft is clear and when their attention is focused inside the aircraft and again when attention is reestablished outside 2 Procedures a Announce when wires are seen Confirm the location of wire obstacles with other crewmembers Announce the method of negotiating the wires and when the maneuver is initiated b Locate guy wires and supporting poles Estimate the amount of available clearance between the wires and the ground to determine the method of crossing c Overflight Before crossing the wires identify the highest wire Cross near a pole to aid in visual perception and minimize the time that the aircraft is unmasked d Underflight ground taxi When flying under wires ensure a minimum ground to wire clearance of hover height plus 30 feet Ground speed should be no greater than that of a brisk walk Ensure lateral clearance from guy wires and poles If terrain is suitable consider grou
176. d use of engine bleed air accessories anti ice cockpit cabin heaters AMOGS OBOGS according to the operator s manual Note 2 The maximum torque available 30 MIN for the T700 engine and 10 MIN limit for the T701 can also be derived from the CL If the ATF is between 1 0 and 0 9 interpolation is required Item 21 CRUISE TORQUE CONT TORQUE AVAILABLE DUAL ENGINE Use the appropriate Cruise chart to compute the torque required to cruise as described below Publication Date TC 3 04 33 D 7 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 Appendix ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 1 Clean and high drag configuration a Step 1 Enter the CRUISE chart at the selected cruise speed IAS in item 4 above Move left or right as appropriate to the GW 1 000 LB at the AIRCRAFT GWT 1 000 LB item 3 departure data b Step 2 Move down do not follow the slant of the line to the TORQUE PER ENGINE 46 line to read the CRUISE torque Record the CRUISE TORQUE DUAL ENGINE Note The continuous torque available is also referred to as MAXIMUM CONTINUOUS POWER MCP c Step 3 Enter the CRUISE chart at the selected cruise speed IAS in item 4 above Move left or right as appropriate to the TORQUE AVAILABLE MCP line adjusted for the ETF of the weakest engine d Step 4 Move straight down do not follow the slant of the line to the TORQUE PER ENGINE to read the CONT TORQUE Record the CONT TORQUE AVAILABLE DUAL ENGINE
177. demic subjects listed in the ATM The evaluator will determine the amount of time devoted to each phase When the examinee is an evaluator trainer or a unit trainer the recommended procedure is for the evaluator to reverse roles with the examinee When the evaluator uses this technique the examinee must understand how the role reversal will be conducted and when it will be in effect a Note Initial validation of a crewmember s qualifications following a MOS producing course of instruction school Instructor Pilot Course Maintenance Test Pilot Course Instrument Flight Examiners Course and Nonrated Instructor Course will be conducted in the aircraft upon return from that course and in the aircraft at each new duty station Performance criteria 1 PI The pilot PI must demonstrate a working knowledge of the appropriate subjects in paragraph 3 4b In addition the PI must be familiar with his or her individual aircrew training folder and understand the requirements listed on the commander s task list 2 The pilot command maintenance test pilot PC MP must meet the requirements in paragraph 3 3a 1 In addition the PC MP must demonstrate sound judgment and maturity in managing the mission crew and assets 3 UT The unit trainer UT must meet the requirements in paragraph 3 3a 2 In addition the UT must be able to instruct in the appropriate tasks and subjects recognize errors in performance or un
178. dequate warning of traffic or obstacles They will announce when their attention is focused inside the aircraft and again when attention is reestablished outside 5 For coupled approach the will configure the FD DCP for the selected approach and monitor the PFD for aircraft response The P should ensure the uncoupled flight director has the appropriate modes engaged to see visual cues on the PFD Note A Doppler global positioning system GPS that is not certified for instrument flight rules IFR flight will not be used as the primary source of navigation information for IFR operations in controlled airspace however its use should be considered and planned for as a backup system 4 92 TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training Training may be conducted in the aircraft or simulator 2 Evaluation Evaluation may be conducted in the aircraft or simulator REFERENCES Appropriate common references Publication Date TC 3 04 33 4 93 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 TASK 1178 Perform Precision Approach CONDITION In an H 60 helicopter given approach information and appropriate Department of Defense flight information publication DOD FLIP STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 Perform the approach
179. deration must be given to the intervisibility of friendly and enemy positions and trying to preclude any undesirable collateral damage or fratricide incidents Perform any firing malfunctions emergency procedures as required for misfire hangfire cook off runaway gun ruptured cartridge or double feeding of cartridges Firing malfunctions and corrective actions must be committed to memory After target engagement clear and safe the weapon Ensure the safety button is in the S position After completing the mission record any information as required on DA Form 2408 12 DA Form 2408 13 and DA Form 2408 13 1 Refer to FM 3 04 140 for details on helicopter gunnery qualification MULTIHELICOPTER DOOR GUNNER EMPLOYMENT Aircrews and door gunners in the formation must use effective crew coordination procedures to visually acquire identify and engage targets Both aircraft and passengers are vulnerable to attack during air movement operations and throughout all phases of air assault operations Therefore it is imperative that door gunners respond by delivering direct and indirect fires on these targets The unit must develop standing operating procedures SOPs covering the employment of door gunners during formation flights NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLE NVG CONSIDERATIONS During night or NVG operations range estimations will be more difficult which will require using proper scanning techniques Correct firing techniques and ballistic corrections
180. derstanding make recommendations for improvement train to standards and document training 4 IP or IE The instructor pilot IP or instrument examiner IE must meet the requirements in paragraph 3 3a 2 In addition the IP or IE must be able to objectively instruct evaluate and document performance of the crew chief CE medical officer MO observer OR SI FI PI PC UT and IE using role reversal for IP IE UT PC SI and FI as appropriate The IP or IE must be able to develop and implement an individual training plan and have a thorough understanding of the requirements and administration of the ATP 5 SP The SP must meet the requirements in paragraph 3 3a 2 and 4 The SP must be able to instruct and evaluate SPs IPs UTs PCs PIs SIs and FIs as appropriate using role reversal The SP must also be able to develop and implement a unit training plan and administer the commander s ATP 6 ME The maintenance test pilot evaluator ME must meet the requirements in paragraph 3 3a 1 and 2 The ME must be able to instruct and evaluate other MEs and MPs using role reversal when required 7 CE MO OR The CE MO OR must perform selected tasks to ATM standards applying aircrew coordination principles The CE MO OR must also demonstrate a basic understanding of the appropriate academic subjects listed in paragraph 3 4b In addition the CE MO OR must be familiar with and understand the requirements listed in the individual air
181. ditions Monitor engine and systems operations and avionics navigation and communication as necessary During VMC focus attention primarily outside the aircraft maintain airspace surveillance and clear the aircraft Provide timely warning of traffic and obstacles by announcing the type of hazard direction distance and altitude Crewmembers also announce when attention is focused inside the aircraft except for momentary scans and announce when attention is focused back outside b PC The PC is responsible for conducting the mission and for operating securing and servicing the aircraft he commands The PC will ensure that a crew briefing is done and that the mission is performed according to the mission briefing ATC instructions regulations and SOP requirements c PI CE MO OR Their responsibility is completing tasks assigned by the PC d P The P is responsible for aircraft control obstacle avoidance and the proper execution of emergency procedures The P will announce any deviation and the reason from instructions issued The P will announce changes in altitude attitude airspeed or direction e P The P is responsible for navigation in flight computations assisting the P as requested and properly executing emergency procedures When duties permit the P assists the P with obstacle clearance f CE MO OR The CE MO and OR are responsible for maintaining airspace surveillance traffic and obstacle avoidan
182. dry muskeg tundra areas A vertical takeoff may be best in drier areas where the aircraft has not sunk into the muskeg tundra or where obstacles prohibit motion Smoothly increase the collective until the crew confirms that the wheels skis are free Adjust controls as necessary to perform a VMC takeoff 2 From wet areas In wet areas where the aircraft is likely to have sunk or is stuck in the mud muskeg tundra the following technique may be best With the cyclic in the neutral position smoothly increase the collective As hover power is approached place the cyclic slightly forward of the neutral position and slowly move the pedals back and forth Continue increasing the collective and swim the aircraft forward to break the suction of the wheels skis When free adjust the controls as necessary to perform a VMC takeoff Note Before performing operations in a mud muskeg tundra environment the crew must understand dynamic roll over characteristics TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training Training may be conducted in the aircraft or simulator All four types of takeoffs must be taught in RL progression 2 Evaluation Evaluator may select any or all types of takeoff for evaluation Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft REFERENCES Appropriate common references Publication Date TC 3 04 33 4 55 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 TASK 1044 Navigate By Pilotage And Dea
183. ds to terrain flight such as harbor lights buoys wires and birds must also be considered during overwater flight NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLE NVG CONSIDERATIONS For night operations ladders will be marked with chemlights light sources at the point where the ladder enters the water the bottom of the ladder and 3 5 feet from the bottom of the rung This will aid the crewmembers in identifying when the ladder enters the water Spatial disorientation can be overwhelming during overwater operations at night Proper scanning techniques are necessary to avoid spatial disorientation If there are visible lights on the horizon or if the shoreline can be seen the pilot may opt to approach the survivor s so the aircraft is pointed toward these references if the wind permits If no other references exist deploy chemlights to assist in maintaining a stable hover TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training Training will be conducted in the aircraft 2 Evaluation Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft REFERENCES Appropriate common references FM 3 05 212 and USSOCOM 350 6 4 170 TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 TASK 2078 Perform Helocast Operations WARNING Ensure that crewmembers and the helocast master in the cabin area are wearing safety harnesses secured to tie down rings anytime the cabin doors are open WARNING Ensure air
184. e FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Instructions for Manual Computation of Department of the Army Form 5701 60 R d f b Step 2 Multiply the ATRQ times the drag multiplying factor Subtract the result from the maximum torque available used initially step 1 above clean and high drag configuration c Step 3 Reenter the bottom of the CRUISE chart at the adjusted torque value follow the slant of the TORQUE AVAILABLE 30 MIN T700 or 10 MIN T701 line and move up to the second intersection of GW 1 000 LB at the AIRCRAFT GWT item 3 departure data Read left or right for MAX IAS DUAL ENGINE Record the adjusted MAX IAS DUAL ENGINE Note If the adjusted maximum torque available line is to the left of does not intersect the GW 1 000 LB at the AIRCRAFT GWT item 3 departure data the aircraft cannot maintain dual engine level flight for the conditions Item 19 CRUISE SPEED IAS TAS DUAL ENGINE Select an IAS that falls within the range of MIN MAX IAS IAS KTS scale Record CRUISE SPEED IAS DUAL ENGINE Enter the CRUISE chart at cruise IAS and move laterally to the TRUE AIRSPEED KTS scale Record CRUISE SPEED TAS DUAL ENGINE Item 20 MAX TORQUE AVAILABLE DUAL ENGINE Maximum torque available dual engine is derived from the CRUISE chart by referencing the TORQUE AVAILABLE 30 MIN T700 or 10 MIN T701 ATF 1 0 line If the ATF is between 1 0 and 0 9 int
185. e Stop Command to go no further halt present action Indicates that the aircraft AN APR 39 has detected a radar threat will be followed by a clock direction Sighting of a target non friendly aircraft enemy position landmark traffic or obstruction positively seen or identified will be followed by a repeat of the word target traffic or obstruction and the clock position Opposite of No Joy An alert that a ground threat has been spotted Target object Specific surface target object has been acquired and is being tracked with an captured on board sensor Refers to friendly aircraft that present a potential hazard to the current route of Traffic flight will be followed by an approximate clock position and the distance from your aircraft with a reference to altitude high or low Positive three way transfer of the flight controls between the crewmembers for Transfer of controls example I have the controls You have the controls and I have the controls Command to deviate from present ground track will be followed by words right or left specific heading in degrees a bearing Turn right 30 degrees or instructions to follow a well defined contour Follow the draw at 2 o clock Unable Indicates the inability to comply with a specific instruction or request Indicates primary radio selected will be followed by radio position numbers on Up the intercommunication panels Up on 1 up o
186. e airspeed trim RPM R and rates of descent Note While performing combat maneuvering flight visual contact with other aircraft in the formation may be lost because of maneuvering or reduced visibility If this occurs the crewmember should announce loss of visual contact and comply with standing operating procedure SOP requirements TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training Training may be conducted in the simulator or aircraft 2 Evaluation Evaluations will be conducted in the aircraft 4 186 TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 REFERENCES Appropriate common references the Army Aviator s Handbook for Maneuvering Flight and Power Management and the unit SOP Publication Date TC 3 04 33 4 187 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 TASK 2169 Perform Aerial Observation CONDITIONS In an H 60 helicopter STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 Use correct visual search techniques 2 Accurately identify the target 3 Accurately locate the position of the target 4 Without error transmit tactical report DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions The pilot in command PC will complete a thorough crew and mission briefing The pilot on the controls P will focus attention primarily outside the aircraft and respond to navigation instructions o
187. e are the same as they predicted during the reconnaissance b The pilot not on the controls P and nonrated crewmember NCM will confirm the suitability of the area assist in clearing the aircraft and provide adequate warning of traffic and obstacles The P and NCM will acknowledge any deviation during the approach The P and NCM will announce when their attention is focused inside the aircraft and again when attention is reestablished outside c If power is in question the pilot not on the controls P should conduct the in flight dynamic update using TAB data EDM utilizing IPAC or H 60M use of the FMS performance planning software and conduct a landing zone sequence An example is provided in this task but units may develop their own 2 Procedures Select an approach angle that allows obstacle clearance while descending to the desired point of termination Once the termination point is sighted and the approach angle is intercepted on base or final adjust the collective as necessary to establish and maintain a constant angle Maintain entry airspeed until the rate of closure appears to be increasing Above 50 feet AGL maintain ground track alignment and the aircraft in trim Below 50 feet AGL align the aircraft with the landing direction Progressively decrease the rate of descent and rate of closure until reaching the termination point hover or touchdown a True airspeed compared to ground speed indicates headwind tailwind or no win
188. e data 2 Step 2 If the intersection of MAX END AND R C line and GW 1 000 LB at the AIRCRAFT GWT item 3 departure data is to the left of TORQUE AVAILABLE SE 30 MIN T700 or SE 2 5 MIN T701 line adjusted for the lowest ETF engine flight is still possible at MAX END IAS move to the next higher CRUISE chart and repeat steps 1 and 2 If the intersection of MAX END AND R C and GW 1 000 LB at the AIRCRAFT GWT item 3 departure data is to the right of the value of TORQUE AV AILABLE SE 30 MIN T700 or SE 2 5 MIN T701 line adjusted for lowest ETF engine flight is no longer possible at MAX END IAS move to the next lower CRUISE chart and repeat steps 1 and 2 Publication Date TC 3 04 33 D 15 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Appendix D D 3 3 Step 3 Record the MAX ALTITUDE MSL SE and MAX END IAS that will allow flight at the AIRCRAFT GWT item 3 departure data Interpolation between the charts is authorized Note 1 Ensure FAT is adjusted for pressure altitude in the CRUISE charts Note 2 If aircraft is equipped with stores and no CRUISE chart will yield a MAX ALLOWABLE GWT SINGLE ENGINE that is greater than or equal to the AIRCRAFT GWT level flight is not possible Subtract the weight of the stores and adjust the AIRCRAFT GWT to reflect the new AIRCRAFT GWT without stores and recompute the MAX ALTITUDE MSL SINGLE ENGINE Note 3 If level flight cannot be mainta
189. e slope angles References probably will be limited and difficult to ascertain If at any time successful completion of the landing is doubtful abort the maneuver When performing operations during unaided night flight ensure that the searchlight or landing light white light is in the desired position Using the white light will impair night vision for several minutes Therefore exercise added caution if resuming flight before reaching fully dark adaptation TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training Training will be conducted in the aircraft 2 Evaluation Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft REFERENCES Appropriate common references 4 70 TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 TASK 1064 Perform A Roll On Landing CONDITIONS In an H 60 helicopter given a suitable landing area STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 Select a suitable landing area 2 Maintain a constant approach angle clear of obstacles to desired point of touchdown 3 Maintain ground track alignment with the landing direction as appropriate 4 Perform a smooth controlled touchdown and termination appropriate for the conditions below 60 knots ground speed and aligned with the landing direction 5 degrees prior to touchdown 5 Ensure speed at touchdown is no slower than that appropriate for the conditions DESCR
190. e standby flight instrument system in order exit IMC and land as soon as possible when VMC 3 During training the P will maneuver the aircraft to maintain appropriate airspeed altitude and heading as assigned by the instructor 4 The P and other crewmembers will provide traffic advisories and obstacle clearance TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training Training may be conducted in the aircraft or simulator 2 Evaluation Evaluation may be conducted in the aircraft or simulator REFERENCES Appropriate common references 4 86 TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 TASK 1168 Perform Command Instrument System Procedures A L CONDITIONS In an H 60 helicopter STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 Configure the horizontal situation indicator vertical situation indicator HSI VST mode select panels and command instrument system CIS to obtain the desired navigational data and commands 2 Follow the cyclic roll cyclic pitch and collective position indicator commands as appropriate DESCRIPTION Configure the CIS MODE SEL panel and if required the HSI VSI MODE SEL panel as required per the appropriate aircraft operator s manual TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training Training may be conducted in the aircraft or simulator 2 Evaluation Evaluation may be conducted in the
191. e 2 5 MIN lines t701 represent maximum single engine power OEI and are used to define single engine flight performance a Item 16 PA Planned cruise PA b Item 17 FAT Forecast FAT at the planned cruise PA c Item 18 MIN MAX IAS DUAL ENGINE Minimum and maximum airspeeds based on gross weight power available and conditions Note This item represents the actual maximum indicated airspeed value based on torque available If the planned aircraft configuration has an associated maximum airspeed limitation note this airspeed value in item 15 REMARKS During normal aircraft operations the aircraft operator s manual chapter 5 airspeed limitations shall not be exceeded Note For alternative or external load configurations refer to the operator s manual chapter 7 7 section VI DRAG Determine and add together the appropriate drag multiplying factors Note The torque change to compensate for drag alternative or external load configuration at minimum indicated airspeed is often negligible and not computed d Item 19 CRUISE SPEED IAS TAS DUAL ENGINE Selected IAS that falls within the range of MIN MAX IAS IAS KTS scale e Item 20 MAX TORQUE AVAILABLE DUAL ENGINE Publication Date TC 3 04 33 4 17 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 Note If mission requirements dictates use of the 701 30 minute dual engine maximum torque available enter the bottom of the CRUI
192. e Surveillance X X X 1032 Perform Radio Communication Procedures X 1162 Perform Emergency Egress X 1190 Perform Hand And Arm Signals X 1262 Participate in a Crew Level After Action Review X Base tasks requiring specialized equipment do not apply to aircraft that do not have the equipment Note Mandatory evaluation tasks may be designated by the commander Performance tasks are in bold type Technical tasks are in plain type Table 2 7 Crewmember rated nonrated mission task list at Perform Operations o 2012 Perform Tactical Flight Mission Planning RCM Only 2 10 TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Training Table 2 7 Crewmember rated nonrated mission task list 2065 2068 2075 2076 2078 2086 2098 2108 Perform Auxiliary Power Unit Operations Perform Maneuvering Flight S 2127 Perform Maneuvering Flight 2169 Perform Aerial Observation Applies to NCMs only Note Performance tasks are in bold type Technical tasks are in plain type Note Mission tasks and mode of flight D N NG Eval will be selected by unit METL and placed on DA Form 7120 1 2 R 2070 Perform M 139 Volcano Operations Table 2 8 Maintenance test pilot task list Legend Day Day mode of flight Night Night unaided mode of flight NVG Night Vision Goggle mode of flight Eval Maneuver listed is required to be evaluated on the
193. e TC 3 04 33 4 133 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 TASK 2050 Develop an Emergency Global Positioning System Recovery Procedure WARNING This procedure is designed strictly for recovery under VMC and for IIMC This procedure will not be used for a planned IFR flight unless approved by USAASA This emergency recovery procedure is only authorized to be flown when the situation prevents the use an approved instrument procedure Note This task should be selected for instrument examiners CONDITIONS With a tactical or aeronautical map with current obstruction information A mission planning system with digital maps and recent CHUM may be used to aid in developing this procedure STANDARDS Apply appropriate common standards and the following 1 Select a suitable recovery landing area and coordinate if required airspace deconfliction 2 Select an approach course degrees magnetic a missed approach course final approach fix FAF MAP intermediate approach fix IF initial approach fix and missed approach holding fix 3 Determine obstacle clearance for the final MAHF missed intermediate initial segments and the MSA 4 Determine altitudes based on obstacle clearance for FAF MAHF MAP IF IAP and MSA 5 Determine the appropriate obstacles in the missed approach segment and determine 20 1 slope penetration 6 Establish a 3 NM holding patt
194. e TORQUE AVAILABLE 30 MIN T700 or 10 MIN T701 line up to the first intersection of GW 1 000 LB at the AIRCRAFT GWT item 3 departure data Read left or right for minimum IAS KTS Record the MIN IAS DUAL ENGINE If the maximum torque available line is right of the gross weight line record 0 for the MIN IAS c Step 3 Continue up to the second intersection of GW 1 000 LB at the AIRCRAFT GWT item 3 departure data Read left or right for maximum IAS KTS Record the MAX IAS DUAL ENGINE Note 1 If the maximum torque available line is to the left of does not intersect the GW 1 000 LB at the AIRCRAFT GWT item 3 departure data the aircraft cannot maintain dual engine level flight for the conditions 2 Alternative or external load configuration Note 2 For alternative or external load configurations refer to the operator s manual chapter 7 7A section VI DRAG Determine and add together the appropriate drag multiplying factors Note 3 The torque change to compensate for drag alternative or external load configuration at minimum indicated airspeed is often negligible and not computed The dual engine maximum indicated airspeed is adjusted for alternate or external load configuration as follows a Step 1 Enter the CRUISE chart at DUAL ENGINE MAX IAS step 3 above then move left or right to the curved dashed line then move up to read ATRQ FOR DRAG AREA OF 10 SQ FT of AF D 6 TC 3 04 33 Publication Dat
195. e TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 TASK 1142 Perform Digital Communications CONDITION In an H 60 helicopter STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 Configure the appropriate tactical internet system for desired operation 2 Transmit receive review and delete messages and mission information as required DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a The pilot on the controls P is primarily responsible for obstacle avoidance and clearing the aircraft b The pilot not on the controls P or other crewmembers will operate the system and announce when focused inside 2 Procedures Operate system EDM BFT in accordance with the appropriate technical manual and configure in accordance with unit standing operating procedures SOP TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training Training may be conducted in the aircraft or simulator 2 Evaluation Evaluation may be conducted in the aircraft or simulator REFERENCES Appropriate common references TM 1 1680 377 13 amp P and TM 11 7010 326 10 4 80 TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 TASK 1155 Negotiate Wire Obstacles CONDITIONS In an H 60 helicopter STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 Locate and estimate the height of wires 2 Determine the best metho
196. e TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 6 Table 6 1 Examples of standard words and phrases Standard word or phrase Meaning of standard word or phrase Horizontal movement of aircraft perpendicular to its heading will be followed by the word left or right Inside Primary focus of attention is inside the cockpit for longer than 5 seconds Command for the emergency or unexpected release of an external load or Jettison stores when followed by the word will indicate the requirement to perform emergency door removal Laser On Start acknowledge laser designation Lasing The speaker is firing the laser Maintain Command to continue or keep the same To conceal aircraft by using available terrain features and to position the aircraft Mask unmask above terrain features Mickey A HaveQuick time synchronized signal Monitor Command to maintain constant watch or observation Move back Command to hover back followed by distance in feet Move forward Command to hover forward followed by distance in feet Negative Incorrect or permission not granted Negative contact Unable to establish communication with followed by name of element Negative laser Aircraft has not acquired laser energy Aircrew does not have positive visual contact with the No joy target bandit traffic obstruction landmark Opposite of TALLY Now Indicates that an immediate action
197. e as necessary to prevent rotor overspeed An autorotation may be done straight in or with turn b During the descent the P and P will monitor and maintain RPM R within limits to prevent an overspeed or underspeed condition and the P will adjust the collective as necessary to establish and maintain a steady state autorotation The P will call out RPM R airspeed and aircraft in trim Steady state autorotation is defined as RPM R within limits airspeed is not below 80 knots indicated airspeed KIAS torque trim and aircraft in position to land at the desired touchdown point Note During training if steady state autorotation is not attained by 300 feet AGL the IP will command a power recovery terminate the maneuver and execute a go around as required c Between 50 and 75 feet above ground level AGL the aircraft must be in a decelerative attitude The P will adjust the cyclic for a smooth progressive deceleration based on the size and surface of the landing area Maintain ground track and apply pedal to align the aircraft with the direction of touchdown WARNING Reaction time must be factored into the deceleration altitude and will vary with the proficiency of the pilot on the controls The P will cross monitor the P and ensure the control inputs are made as required d Terminate the autorotation by one of the three following methods During training the instructor pilot IP will announce which is to
198. e conducted in the aircraft or simulator 2 Evaluation Evaluation may be conducted in the aircraft or simulator REFERENCES Appropriate common references and the appropriate manufacturer s references 4 106 TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 TASK 1260 Operate Digital Map H 60M CONDITION In an H 60M helicopter STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 Load digital map data via the data transfer system DTS 2 Operate bezel keys on the multifunction displays MFD to select desired map TAC ND configuration and orientation 3 Operate the multifunction slew controller MFSC or the collective cursor slew controller to gain desired information and to manipulate desired mission data on the digital map display DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a The pilot on the controls P will primarily remain focused outside the aircraft b The pilot not on the controls P will primarily perform digital map operations 2 Procedures a Select appropriate type of map for display b Select desired viewing range and scale c Select appropriate type of overlay for the tactical situation NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLE NVG CONSIDERATIONS Ensure MFD lighting adjustment is set at an acceptable level for night or night vision goggle NVG operations TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training Training will be
199. e cruise chart at the intersection of the GW 1 000 LB at the AIRCRAFT GWT item 3 departure data and the MAX END AND R C line Move right to intersect the TORQUE AVAILABLE 30 MIN line T700 or 10 MIN line T701 or transmission torque limit whichever is less Read straight down to determine maximum torque available at maximum endurance airspeed If the maximum torque available is greater than the dual engine transmission torque limit from the operator s manual chapter 5 use the transmission torque limit Record MAX R C Torque DUAL ENGINE b Step 2 Subtract the torque value found in item 24 step 2 above from the MAX R C Torque step 1 above to find the TORQUE INCREASE PER ENGINE TRQ Note the TORQUE INCREASE PER ENGINE c Step 3 Use the CLIMB DESCENT charts in the aircraft operator s manual chapter 7 7A section VII Enter the bottom of the CLIMB DESCENT chart for clean or high drag as appropriate at the TORQUE INCREASE PER ENGINE TRQ step 2 above d Step 4 Move up to the GROSS WEIGHT 1 000 LB line at the AIRCRAFT GWT item 3 departure data then move left to read the RATE OF CLIMB FT MIN Note the rate of climb e Step 5 Use the AIRSPEED SYSTEM CORRECTIONS charts in the aircraft operator s manual chapter 7 7A section IX Enter the appropriate AIRSPEED SYSTEM CORRECTION chart for clean or high drag at the MAX END IAS from item 24 step 1 above Move up to the appropriate segmented line for the r
200. e increasing Progressively decrease the rate of descent and forward speed until termination of maneuver 2 Surrounding terrain or vegetation may decrease contrast and cause degraded depth perception during the approach Before descending below obstacles determine the need for artificial lighting Use proper scanning techniques to avoid spatial disorientation 3 When performing operations during unaided night flight ensure that the searchlight or landing light white light is in the desired position Using the white light will impair night vision for several minutes Therefore exercise added caution when resuming flight before reaching full dark adaptation SNOW SAND DUST CONSIDERATIONS 1 Termination to a point OGE This approach requires OGE power and may be used for most snow landings and some sand dust landings Make the approach to a hover OGE over the intended landing location Slowly lower the collective and allow the aircraft to descend The rate of descent will be determined by the rate in which the snow sand dust is blown from the intended landing point Remain above the snow sand dust cloud until it dissipates and visual references can be seen for touchdown After ground contact slowly lower the collective to the full down position and neutralize the flight controls 2 Termination to the surface with forward speed This termination may be made to an improved landing surface or suitable area with minimal ground references Once t
201. e maintenance test pilot MP should direct assistance from the rated crewmember RCM and nonrated crewmember NCM as necessary b The RCM and NCM should assist the MP as directed 2 Procedures Perform the check according to the maintenance test flight MTF manual TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training Training may be conducted in the aircraft or simulator 2 Evaluation Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft REFERENCES Appropriate common references Publication Date TC 3 04 33 5 21 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 5 TASK 4288 Perform Gust Lock Rotor Brake Operations CONDITION In an H 60 helicopter STANDARDS Appropriate common standards DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions 1 The maintenance test pilot MP should direct assistance from the rated crewmember RCM and nonrated crewmember NCM and any ground support personnel as necessary 2 The RCM and NCM should assist the MP as directed 2 Procedures a For aircraft equipped with rotor brake perform according to the applicable maintenance test flight MTF manual Brief NCM support personnel on the following e Movement around aircraft e Fire guard procedures e Rotor brake failure e Intercommunication system ICS failure b For aircraft equipped with gust lock only Brief NCM support personnel on the following e Movement around aircraft e Fire guard procedures e Gust lock f
202. e maximum torque available is also referred maximum rated power MRP 10 minute limit T701 The TORQUE AVAILABLE 30 MIN lines T700 and T701 and the TORQUE AVAILABLE 10 MIN lines for T701 are used to define a power level that will be limited and only used for a defined period of time The SE 30 MIN lines T700 and SE 2 5 MIN lines T701 represents maximum single engine power OEI and are used to define single engine flight performance The CRUISE charts define DUAL ENGINE aircraft performance and SINGLE ENGINE MAX TORQUE AVAILABLE Note When using the CRUISE charts adjust torques for ETF and ATF values that are less than 1 0 and interpolate values as required a Item 16 PA Record planned cruise PA b Item 17 FAT Record forecast FAT at the planned cruise PA c Item 18 MIN MAX IAS DUAL ENGINE Use the appropriate CRUISE chart to compute the minimum maximum indicated airspeeds as described below 1 Clean and high drag configuration Note This item represents the actual maximum indicated airspeed value based on torque available If the planned aircraft configuration has an associated maximum airspeed limitation note this airspeed value in item 15 REMARKS During normal aircraft operations the aircraft operator s manual chapter 5 airspeed limitations shall not be exceeded a Step 1 Enter the bottom of the CRUISE chart at the ATF or transmission torque limit whichever is less b Step 2 Follow the slant of th
203. e patient and equipment for departure e Perform post flight procedures per the appropriate aircraft operator s manual CL DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a The pilot in command PC will conduct a thorough crew briefing and ensure all crewmembers are familiar with rescue hoist operations emergency procedures communication procedures lowering the flight medic and lifting the patient off the ground using the hoist or aircraft The PC will also ensure that all crewmembers understand CUT CABLE procedures b The pilot on the controls P will remain focused primarily outside the aircraft throughout the maneuver for aircraft control and obstacle avoidance The P will announce the intended point of hover and remain centered over the target with corrections from the nonrated crewmember c The pilot not on the controls P and NCM will assist in clearing the aircraft and will provide adequate warning of obstacles They will also assist the P in maintaining a stable hover by providing the P with information regarding the drift of the aircraft The P will also monitor cockpit indications The P will be able to operate the control panel for the rescue hoist if necessary d The NCM will ensure that the hoist is configured and will also ensure that all lifting devices such as jungle penetrator sked stokes litter and survivor s slings are secured in the aircraft before takeoff e The NCM will conduct the hoist operation per FM 4 02
204. e pilot changes the references used by the flight director FD Note Maintain optimum visibility by observing references close to the aircraft Exercise caution when operating in close proximity to other aircraft or obstacles Note When visual references deteriorate making a hover taxi unsafe determine whether to abort the maneuver ground taxi air taxi or perform an ITO Task 1170 Note Hovering out of ground effect OGE reduces available ground references and may increase the possibility of spatial disorientation Be prepared to transition to instruments and execute an ITO Task 1170 or unusual attitude recovery Task 1182 if ground reference is lost Note At night use of landing search or anti collision light may cause spatial disorientation while in blowing snow sand dust CONFINED AREA CONSIDERATIONS Select good references to avoid unanticipated drift All crewmembers must be focused primarily outside for obstacle avoidance TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training Training may be conducted in the aircraft or simulator 2 Evaluation Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft or simulator 4 48 TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 REFERENCES Appropriate common references Publication Date TC 3 04 33 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 4 49 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 TASK 1040 Perform Vis
205. e safety or mission performance is at risk immediate challenge and control measures must be assertively exercised A crewmember should quickly and professionally inform and assist the other crewmember committing the error When required they must effectively implement the two challenge rule with minimal compromise to flight safety This means that you must continually cross monitor other crewmember s actions and remain capable of detecting each other s errors Such redundancy is particularly important when crews are tired or overly focused on critical task elements and thus more prone to make errors Crewmembers must discuss conditions and situations that can compromise situational awareness These include but are not limited to stress boredom fatigue and anger 6 3 OBJECTIVES Aircrew coordination principles and objectives originate from and are fundamentally supported by a set of individual professional skills Each crewmember is responsible for attaining the leadership skills of effective communication resource management decision making situational awareness team building and conflict resolution When crewmembers are actively using these skills and practicing aircrew coordination principles results can be seen and measured to determine if the objectives of the aircrew coordination program are being met The goals of the program have been defined by four aircrew coordination objectives The four objectives are as follows a Establish a
206. e strength e Blowing particles produced by rotor wash causes the aircrew or the rappel master to lose visual contact with the ground NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLE NVG CONSIDERATIONS When hovering above 25 feet the P may have difficulty in maintaining altitude and position Use the radar altimeter to assist in maintaining altitude Use references such as lights tops of trees or manmade objects above and to the sides of the aircraft By establishing a reference angle to these objects the P can detect altitude changes when his or her perspective to these objects changes Ground objects fences trails roads provide excellent references for detecting lateral drift Proper scanning techniques must be used The P may become spatially disoriented when alternating his or her viewing perspective between high and low references The AN AVS 7 ANVIS HUD hover symbology can aid in maintaining position and hover altitude for night vision goggle NVG operations and assist in maintaining position over the insertion point during adverse 4 148 TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 environmental conditions blowing dust sand or snow or low levels of illumination Proper scanning techniques are necessary to detect aircraft drift and to avoid spatial disorientation Proper scanning techniques are necessary to detect aircraft drift and to avoid spatial disorientation If
207. e the direction of threat to other aircraft and his or her intent The P will remain focused outside the aircraft during the event and should be aware that crewmembers involved in returning suppressive fire may be unavailable for assisting in obstacle avoidance or noting other threat sources The P is responsible for safe performance of evasive maneuvers and aircraft control d The P will be alert for obstacles and new threat sources encountered during the event The P will remain oriented on threat location and assist clearing the aircraft and will announce warning to avoid obstacles and when attention is focused inside the aircraft The P should note location of the threat quickly and as accurately as the situation allows It is imperative that all applicable crewmembers are able to quickly and accurately locate and transmit threat data in order to maintain individual and collective situational awareness during quickly changing situations Not storing reporting an enemy location may be more detrimental than the risk of taking time to note the location when contact happens The crew will transmit a report as required to other aircraft within the flight higher HQ and the owning ground unit tactical commander e Other crewmembers will remain oriented on the threat location and employ appropriate countermeasures or suppressive fire as appropriate They will announce when their attention is focused inside the cockpit for example when firing the wea
208. e the personnel The crewmember in the cabin area will lower the caving ladder when directed to do so by the PC The crewmember will advise when the caving ladder has been deployed and that it is in the water The ladder must touch the water BEFORE personnel in the water touch it to avoid electrical static discharge shock Owing to lack of visual references it will be difficult to detect drift over the water Crewmembers must provide assistance to the P in order to maintain a constant position over the personnel in the water d Personnel to be extracted will grasp the ladder after it has entered the water and comes within reach Personnel will then climb the ladder into the aircraft Crewmembers will assist with the entry into the aircraft as much as possible In the event personnel are injured or cannot climb into the aircraft they will attach themselves to the ladder with a snap link attached to the front of the survival vest attach snap link directly to cable rung and not directly rung These personnel will be flown to the nearest landing area lowered to the ground and then moved into the aircraft OVERWATER CONSIDERATIONS Overwater flight at any altitude is characterized by a lack of visual cues and therefore has the potential of causing visual illusions Be alert to any unannounced changes in the flight profile and be prepared to take immediate corrective actions The radar altimeter low bug should be set to assist in altitude control Hazar
209. e topics listed in paragraph 3 4b items 1 7 and complete an operator s manual written examination b Flight training The RCM will receive training and demonstrate proficiency from the designated crew station s Proficiency must be demonstrated in each performance and technical base task listed in table 2 4 page 2 7 An X under the mode of flight for performance tasks specifies the mode in which the task will be performed Technical tasks may be trained and or evaluated in any condition and or mode refer to paragraph 2 5d 2 for guidance on technical tasks A task that may be performed from either crew station need not be evaluated from both tasks must be trained to proficiency Crewmembers designated RL 3 will not perform any mission 2000 series with the exception of Task 2081 and Task 2086 or additional 3000 series or maintenance 4000 series tasks until progressed to RL 2 Table 2 2 is a guide for developing refresher flight training for RCMs Actual hours will be based on individual proficiency 2 Nonrated crewmember The NCM completes RL 3 requirements when the criteria in TC 3 04 11 chapter 3 are met Nonrated crewmembers have minimum flying hour requirements as specified in AR 600 106 a Academic training Topics listed in appendix A will be used as a guide for developing a refresher academic training program for NCMs b Flight training The NCM will receive training and demonstrate proficiency from the designated c
210. e value does not intersect the AIRCRAFT GWT item 3 departure data the aircraft cannot maintain single engine level flight for the conditions As fuel is consumed single engine capability may become possible t Item 35 MAX ALTITUDE MSL MAX ENDURANCE IAS SINGLE ENGINE The maximum altitude the aircraft is capable of flying at maximum endurance airspeed single engine Note When the capability to maintain level flight after an engine failure or malfunction is not possible continued flight may be possible by adjusting airspeed to MAX END IAS and adjusting collective to the MAXIMUM TORQUE AVAILABLE to attain minimum rate of descent while descending to a lower PA where level flight may be possible or jettisoning the external stores if no allowable altitude temperature combination cruise charts yield a GWT greater than or equal to the AIRCRAFT GWT item 3 departure data 4 20 TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 Note The torque change to compensate for drag alternative or sling load configuration at MAX END IAS is often negligible and not computed Note If aircraft is equipped with stores and no CRUISE chart will yield a MAX ALLOWABLE GWT SINGLE ENGINE that is greater than or equal to the AIRCRAFT GWT level flight is not possible Subtract the weight of the stores and adjust the AIRCRAFT GWT to reflect the new AIRCRAFT GWT without stores and recompute
211. eads Up Display AN AVS 7 V 3 5855 01 424 2286 Heads Up Display AN AVS 7 V 4 5855 01 424 2287 EIC N A Heads Up Display AN AVS 7 V 5 5855 01 447 1071 EIC N A Heads Up Display AN A VS 7 V 6 5855 01 447 1887 EIC N A NAVAIR 16 35HUD 2 01 December 1997 TM 11 5895 1199 12 Operator s and Organizational Maintenance Manual for the Mark XII IFF System 01 July 1984 TM 55 1500 342 23 Joint Service Technical Manual for Aircraft Weight and Balance NAVAIR 01 1B 50 USAF TO 1 1B 50 USCG TO 1 1B 50 30 September 2011 References 2 TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 References INTERACTIVE ELECTRONICS TECHNICAL MANUALS EM 0013 TM 1 1520 BLACKHAWK Interactive Electronic Technical Manuals IETM for Army Models UH 60A UH 60L EH 60A UH 60Q and HH 60L Helicopters TM 1 1520 237 23 TM 1 1520 237 23P TM 11 1520 237 23 TM 11 1520 237 23P EM 0271 IETM for Aviation Unit and Intermediate Maintenance Manual Including Repair Parts and Special Tools List for Engine Aircraft Turboshaft T700 GE 700 T700 GE 701 T700 GE 701C T700 GE 701D EIC N A TO 2J T700 16 EM 0284 TM 1 1520 280 23 amp P Aviation Unit and Intermediate Maintenance for Army Model UH 60M and HH 60M Helicopters These publications are available at the following website https www logsa army mil etms DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE PUBLICATIONS DOD 7000 15 DOD Accountable Officials and
212. ecure radio transmissions Follow procedures listed below a Authentication Use proper SOI procedures to authenticate all in flight mission changes artillery advisories when entering or departing a radio net when challenged or when requesting authentication b Meaconing interference jamming and intrusion joint spectrum interference resolution MIJI JSIR procedures Keep accurate and detailed records of any MIJI incidents Report an incident as soon as possible when a secure communications capability exists See Task 2022 for information on transmitting a tactical report c Visual methods Use other visual communication methods such as flags lights panels pyrotechnics hand and arm signals and aircraft maneuvers d Mark XII IFF Turn on test and operate the IFF per the appropriate aircraft operator s manual Operate the IFF per the tactical situation During shutdown hold or zeroize the code as required TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training Training may be conducted in the aircraft or simulator 2 Evaluation Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft REFERENCES Appropriate common references FM 1 103 FM 24 35 and TM 11 5895 1199 12 4 114 TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 TASK 2022 Transmit Tactical Reports CONDITIONS In an H 60 helicopter and given sufficient information to compile a tactical report STANDARDS
213. ed to operate the weapon system IAW FM 3 04 140 and is not to be used a method of qualification Observe all safety precautions for uploading ammunition according to TM 9 1095 206 12 amp P To prevent accidental firing do not retract bolt and allow it to go forward if belted ammunition is in feed tray or if a live round is in the chamber Move cocking handling forward by hand CONDITIONS In an H 60 helicopter with one or two machine guns installed with a M240 qualified crewmember STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 Install and preflight the appropriate weapon according to the appropriate aircraft operator s manual and the appropriate weapon technical manual 2 Load and safe the weapon 3 Acquire and identify target 4 Estimate range to target 5 Engage target s according to weapon control measures mission briefing and rules of engagement ROE 6 Apply appropriate firing techniques 7 Suppress neutralize or destroy as applicable 8 Describe or perform emergency procedures for misfire hangfire cook off runaway gun ruptured cartridge and double feeding 9 Clear and safe the weapon DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions The nonrated crewmember NCM will coordinate with and brief any additional ground support personnel before installing and loading the weapon system Perform installation and preflight inspection of the weapon The NCM will brief all concerned per
214. ed when alternating his or her viewing perspective between high and low references TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training Training may be conducted in the aircraft or simulator 2 Evaluation Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft REFERENCES Appropriate common references Publication Date TC 3 04 33 4 121 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 TASK 2036 Perform Terrain Flight Deceleration CONDITIONS In an H 60 helicopter STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 Rated a Maintain heading alignment with the selected flight path b Maintain the tail clear of all obstacles c Decelerate to the desired airspeed or to a full stop 2 Nonrated Maintain the tail clear of all obstacles DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a The pilot on the controls P will focus primarily outside the aircraft to clear the aircraft throughout the maneuver The P will announce his or her intention to decelerate or come to a full stop any deviation from the maneuver and completion of the maneuver b The pilot not on the controls P and nonrated crewmember NCM will provide adequate warning to avoid obstacles detected in the flight path and will announce when their attention is focused inside the cockpit and again when attention is reestablished outside 2 Procedures Coordinate applying cyclic and collective to establish a dece
215. ee Fall Operations 14 October 2011 ATTP 3 18 12 Air Assault Operations 01 March 2011 DA Pamphlet 738 751 Functional Users Manual for the Army Maintenance Management System Aviation TAMMS A 15 March 1999 FM 1 230 Meteorology for Army Aviators 30 September 1982 FM 1 564 Shipboard Operations 29 June 1997 FM 3 04 111 Aviation Brigades 07 December 2007 FM 3 04 113 Utility and Cargo Helicopter Operations 07 December 2007 FM 3 04 120 Air Traffic Services Operations 16 February 2007 FM 3 04 126 Attack Reconnaissance Helicopter Operations 16 February 2007 FM 3 04 140 Helicopter Gunnery 17 April 2006 FM 3 04 203 Fundamentals of Flight 07 May 2007 FM 3 04 240 Instrument Flight for Army Aviators 30 April 2007 FM 3 04 300 Flight Operations Procedures 26 April 2004 FM 3 05 212 Special Forces Waterborne Operations 30 September 2009 FM 3 06 Urban Operations 26 October 2006 FM 3 21 220 Static Line Parachuting Techniques and Tactics 23 September 2003 FM 3 34 210 Explosive Hazards Operations 27 March 2007 FM 3 52 Army Airspace Command and Control in a Combat Zone 01 August 2002 FM 4 02 2 Medical Evacuation 08 May 2007 FM 4 02 6 The Medical Company Tactics Techniques and Procedures 01 August 2002 FM 4 20 142 Airdrop of Supplies and Equipment Rigging Loads for Special Operations 19 September 2007 Publication Date TC 3 04 33 References 1 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36
216. ee TRADOC Reg 25 36 4 89 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 TASK 1170 Perform Instrument Takeoff CONDITIONS In an H 60 helicopter in instrument meteorological condition IMC or simulated IMC and aircraft cleared STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 Comply with appropriate departure procedure 2 Maintain power as required to climb at or above the minimum climb rate on the departure procedure 3 Maintain accelerative climb attitude until climb airspeed is attained 4 Maintain the aircraft in trim after effective translational lift ETL DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a The pilot on the controls P will focus primarily outside the aircraft during the visual meteorological conditions VMC portion of the maneuver The P will announce when he or she initiates the maneuver and intents to abort or alter the takeoff Before the aircraft enters simulated or actual IMC the P will make the transition to the flight instruments b The pilot not on the controls P will announce when ready for takeoff and will focus primarily outside the aircraft to assist in clearing during the VMC portion of the maneuver and to provide adequate warning of obstacles The P will announce when his or her attention is focused inside the aircraft As the aircraft enters actual IMC the P will announce when IMC and will monitor the flight instruments to assist in establishing coordinated flight within a
217. eeds the dual engine transmission torque limit the planned cruise airspeed must be reduced Note 2 The adjusted cruise torque reflects the power required to overcome the added drag g Item 22 CRUISE FUEL FLOW DUAL ENGINE 1 D 8 Cruise chart method Use the appropriate CRUISE chart a Step 1 Enter the bottom of the chart at the cruise torque value computed in item 6 above b Step 2 Move up to TOTAL FUEL FLOW 100 LB HR and read cruise fuel flow Record the CRUISE FUEL FLOW DUAL ENGINE TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Instructions for Manual Computation of Department of the Army Form 5701 60 R Note Adjust as required for FAT and or planned use of engine bleed air accessories anti ice cockpit cabin heaters AMOGS OBOGS according to the operator s manual 2 Engine fuel flow chart method Use the SINGLE DUAL ENGINE FUEL FLOW chart a Step 1 Enter the chart at the INDICATED TORQUE PER ENGINE for the cruise torque value computed in item 6 above b Step 2 Move right to the cruise PRESSURE ALTITUDE 1 000 FT cO Step 3 Move up to the DUAL ENGINE FUEL FLOW LB HR line and read cruise fuel flow Record the CRUISE FUEL FLOW DUAL ENGINE Note Adjust as required for FAT and planned use of engine anti ice and cockpit heater according to the aircraft operator s manual h Item 23 MAX RANGE IAS TORQUE DUAL ENGINE Use the ap
218. eee 4 135 Figure 4 8 Missed approach 4 136 Figure 4 9 Intermediate approach 4 136 Figure 4 10 Initial approach segment sss ener 4 137 Figure 4 11 MSA calculation diagram ssssssseeseeeeeeeneennen nenne 4 137 Figure 4 12 Sample of emergency GPS diagram sse 4 138 Figure 4 13 Height above landing diagram 4 138 Figure 6 1 Crew coordination 6 2 Tables Table 2 1 Flight tasks for initial night vision goggle qualification night vision goggle retresher tainge ee terere eee een re reste uetus xo e o 2 2 Table 2 2 Refresher flight training guide for rated 2 3 Table 2 3 Refresher flight training guide for nonrated crewmembers 2 3 Table 2 4 Rated crewmember base task list 2 7 Table 2 5 Nonrated crewmember 15T 68W base task 2 9 Table 2 6 Nonrated crewmember base task list minimum for other than 15T 68W performing crewmember duties technical inspector door gunner 2 10 Table 2 7 Crewmember rated nonrated mission task list
219. el AGL A vertical descent is started with the rate not to exceed 100 feet per minute at touchdown Maintain a stable hover until SPIES members clear the extraction system ADVERSE WEATHER TERRAIN CONDITIONS SPIES operations will not be conducted under the following conditions e Wind chill factors caused by the rotor wash of the helicopter or extraction cruise air speeds that may cause cold weather injuries e Ice on the SPIES e SPIES is exposed to the elements long enough to freeze thereby reducing its tensile strength e Blowing particles produced by rotor downwash cause the aircrew or the SPIES master to lose visual contact with the ground WATER EXTRACTION CONSIDERATIONS The SPIES is suitable for extracting teams from the water For this procedure three inflatable life vests or any type of floatation device is tied to the SPIES rope to provide buoyancy for the rope while in the water Takeoff en route and landing are the same as over land The dismounting procedures differ when landing on a ship Once onboard the team members take their orders from LSE or personnel in charge of the deck NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLE NVG CONSIDERATIONS When hovering above 25 feet the P may have difficulty in maintaining altitude and position Use the radar altimeter to assist in maintaining altitude Use references such as lights tops of trees or manmade objects above and to the sides of the aircraft By establishing a reference angle to these o
220. el required and reserve per AR 95 1 100 pounds 7 Obtain and analyze weather briefing to determine that weather and environmental conditions are adequate to complete the mission 8 Conduct a thorough crew mission briefing DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a The pilot in command air mission commander PC AMC will delegate mission tasks to crewmembers have the overall responsibility for mission planning and will conduct a thorough crew mission briefing The PC AMC will analyze the mission in terms of METT TC b The other crewmembers will perform the planning tasks directed by the PC AMC They will report the results of their planning to the PC AMC 2 Procedures Analyze the mission using the METT TC factors Conduct a map or aerial photo reconnaissance Obtain a thorough weather briefing that covers the entire mission Include sunset and sunrise times density altitudes winds and visibility restrictions If the mission is to be conducted at night the briefing would also include moonset and moonrise times and ambient light levels if available Determine primary and alternate routes flight altitudes and movement techniques Determine time distance and fuel requirements using the navigational computer or approved mission planning software Prepare the map overlay or approved mission planning software with sufficient information to complete the mission according to unit standing operating procedure SOP This includes waypoint coordi
221. elector If audio monitoring is desired adjust audio control for a suitable output Follow the radio operation procedures outlined in the appropriate aircraft operator s manual to configure each radio for retransmission For additional information see Task 2014 TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training Training may be conducted in the aircraft or simulator 2 Evaluation Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft REFERENCES Appropriate common references FM 24 35 and signal operating instructions SOT Publication Date TC 3 04 33 4 175 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 TASK 2108 Perform Auxiliary Power Unit Operations NCM Only WARNING Aircraft survivability equipment ASE systems when energized may cause thermal burns or blindness when personnel are too close to an active system Observe all operators manual restrictions Flight controls and stabilator systems may cause damage when aircraft alternating current AC power is applied Ensure flight controls and stabilator systems are clear before applying AC power to the aircraft Prior to auxiliary power unit APU operations remove the pitot covers rotor blade tie downs and mooring chains and engage the gust lock CONDITIONS In an H 60 helicopter with a qualified and current APU operator stationed in a pilot seat during APU operations STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the foll
222. ems as per the appropriate aircraft operator s manual CL If time permits the P will verify all emergency checks with Publication Date TC 3 04 33 4 75 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 the appropriate aircraft operator s manual CL The P will request appropriate emergency assistance as described in the Flight Information Handbook d The nonrated crewmember NCM will prepare the passengers for an emergency landing During the descent the NCM will look for a suitable landing area alert the crew to the landing area s location and assist in clearing the aircraft After landing the NCM will assist in evacuating the passengers to the designated assembly area If normal exits cannot be used the NCM will use the nearest emergency exit to expedite the evacuation The NCM will keep communications to a minimum to allow the P or P to attempt communications outside the aircraft After accounting for all crewmembers and passengers the NCM will assist the other crewmembers in any follow on action fire fighting first aid emergency signaling or survival equipment 2 Procedures Analyze the information given for example aircraft response caution advisory lights engine instrument caution advisory system EICAS and power pod indications as required Determine the malfunction and select the appropriate emergency procedure Perform the emergency procedure per the appropriate aircraft operator
223. eps below T700 engines will use the 30 MIN LIMIT chart for computations T701 will use 10 MINUTE LIMIT for dual engine computations and 2 5 MINUTE LIMIT for single engine computations Mission requirements may dictate using tabular data to update maximum torque available Note 1 The maximum torque available is also referred to as intermediate rated power IRP 30 minute limit T700 and T701 or maximum rated power MRP 10 minute limit T701 The maximum torque available 2 5 minute limit T701 is also referred to as SINGLE ENGINE CONTINGENCY POWER 2 5 MINUTE LIMIT or one engine inoperative OED Publication Date TC 3 04 33 D 1 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Appendix D D 2 Note 2 Certain temperature and PA combinations will exceed the aircraft operator s manual chapter 5 torque limitations This item represents actual maximum torque available values During normal aircraft operations the aircraft operator s manual chapter 5 torque limitations shall not be exceeded 1 Step 1 Enter the MAXIMUM TORQUE AVAILABLE chart at the appropriate temperature and then move right to the appropriate PRESSURE ALTITUDE 1 000 FT 2 Step 2 Move down and read the SPECIFICATION TORQUE AVAILABLE PER ENGINE T700 or TORQUE AVAILABLE PER ENGINE T701 3 Step 3 If the ATF or an ETF is less than 1 0 multiply the SPECIFICATION TORQUE AVAILABLE PER ENGINE from step 2 abo
224. er Check And Tuning A L CONDITIONS In an H 60A L helicopter aviation vibration analyzer AVA installed if required by maintenance STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and verbally confirm all bleed air OFF prior to start of check DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a The maintenance test pilot MP should direct assistance from the rated crewmember RCM and nonrated crewmember NCM as necessary b The RCM and NCM will assist the MP as directed 2 Procedures Perform the check according to the maintenance test flight MTF manual TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training Training may be conducted in the aircraft or simulator 2 Evaluation Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft or simulator REFERENCES Appropriate common references 5 18 TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Maintenance Test Pilot Tasks TASK 4236 Perform Autorotation Revolutions Per Minute Check CONDITION In an H 60 helicopter STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions 1 Ensure autorotation descent at 80 knots indicated airspeed KIAS 5 on the pilot s side in trim with collective full down 2 Calculate target rotor RPM R and necessary adjustment 3 Verbally confirm all bleed air is off DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a The maintenance test pilot MP should direct assistance from the rated crewmember RCM and nonr
225. er available 1 From the ground with less than OGE power Select reference points to maintain ground track With the cyclic and pedals in the neutral position increase power until the aircraft becomes light on the wheels Continue applying power until the aircraft is airborne As the aircraft leaves the ground apply forward cyclic as required to avoid obstacles and to accelerate smoothly through effective translational lift ETL at an altitude appropriate for the terrain Adjust the cyclic to continue the acceleration to the desired climb airspeed and maintain the desired ground track Make the required power adjustments to clear obstacles in the flight path and to obtain the desired rate of climb Maintain heading with the pedals when below 50 feet AGL or until making the transition to mission profile then place the aircraft in trim After obtaining the desired airspeed adjust the cyclic as necessary to stop the acceleration Adjust power as necessary to continue or to stop the rate of climb 2 From a hover with less than OGE power Apply forward cyclic to accelerate the aircraft while applying power to maintain the desired hover altitude Perform the rest of the maneuver as for a takeoff from the ground with less than OGE power TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 Chapter 4 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 WARNING If the takeoff is aborted it may be impossible to stop the aircraft before
226. er the intended point area of water drop 4 Deploy water as directed in proper location orientation and length 2 Nonrated 4 140 TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 a In conjunction with the rated crewmembers RCMs complete required water bucket checks to ensure proper system operation prior to mission departure and attach water bucket to the aircraft b Ensure water bucket is configured for the condition and mode of flight c Recognize and respond to a water bucket system malfunction DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a The pilot in command PC will conduct a thorough crew briefing and ensure all crewmembers are familiar with water bucket operations emergency and communication procedures The PC will confirm that required power is available by comparing the information from the performance planning card PPC to the hover power check b The pilot on the controls P will remain primarily focused primarily outside the aircraft throughout the maneuver The P will monitor altitude and avoid obstacles c The pilot not on the controls P will monitor the cockpit instruments and assist the P in clearing the aircraft The P will set cargo hook switches as required and should make all radio calls When directed by the P during the approach the P will place the cargo hook arming switch to the ARMED position The P will release the water on command
227. eries IP training and validation may be conducted locally by an SP d MP qualification The following outlines the only authorized methods to become series qualified as a maintenance test pilot MP in the H 60M 1 For aviators previously qualified as a MP in the H 60A L and are also H 60M Series qualified complete the H 60M MP Series Transition taught at the USAACE 2 For aviators previously qualified as a MP in the H 60A L and are also H 60M Series qualified complete the H 60M MP Series Transition taught by the NETT 3 Complete the MP qualification as approved by HQDA G3 5 7 DAMO AV IAW AR 95 1 4 For aviators that are previously H 60M qualified but are not qualified as an MP in the H 60A L attend the course of instruction at USAACE designed for H 60 A L MP qualification followed by the H 60M MP Series Transition 5 All aviators qualified by any of the methods above are still subject to unit ATP integration and RL progression per the unit TC 3 04 11 and this manual before being designated by the commander to serve in a crewmember status PC IP MP ME Table A 5 Flight tasks for H 60M nonrated crewmember series qualification Task Task Title 1016 Perform internal load operations 1020 Prepare aircraft for mission 1022 Perform preflight inspection 1024 Perform before starting engine through before leaving helicopter checks 1032 Perform radio communication procedures 1162 Perform emergency eg
228. ern at 7 Prepare an emergency recovery procedure diagram IAW the example 8 Complete a suitability fly ability check to include loading WPTs under VMC to validate the procedure Note All altitudes are in feet MSL all WPTs are latitude longitude all distances are NMs and visibility is statute miles All obstacles are MSL unless otherwise noted The FIH has the necessary conversion tables WARNING Ensure coordinates for maps and GPS are the same datum such as WGS 84 or points on the ground may be off significantly and obstacle clearance will be questionable Note Precise positioning service PPS refers to the GPS precise positioning service It is DOD policy that military aircraft operate with the GPS in the PPS mode 4 134 TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 Note Complete the enclosed figures for determining approach criteria The width cannot be adjusted DESCRIPTION 1 Crew action a Select The Most Suitable Recover Landing Area Select an area based on METT TC and obstacles Ensure proper coordination for airspace de confliction has been accomplished b Final Approach Segment figure 4 6 1 Final Approach Segment The final approach segment begins at the FAF and ends at the MAP 2 Determine the MAP normally associated with the landing area or threshold 3 Determine the FAF The minimum distance is 3 NM f
229. erpolation is required to determine actual maximum torque available Note I The maximum torque available may exceed the transmission torque limit During normal aircraft operations the aircraft operator s manual chapter 5 torque limitations shall not be exceeded Note 2 Maximum torque available is derived from the cruise charts and takes into account the effect of ram air on engine performance at a selected airspeed Torque values may vary when flying at airspeeds other than the planned cruise airspeed 1 Step 1 Enter the bottom of the CRUISE chart at the TORQUE AVAILABLE 30 MIN line T700 or TORQUE AVAILABLE 10 MIN T701 line adjusted for the ATF and follow the slant of the line up to item 4 CRUISE SPEED IAS DUAL ENGINE Note 1 If mission requirements dictate use of the T701 30 minute dual engine maximum torque available enter the bottom of the CRUISE chart at the TORQUE AVAILABLE 30 MIN line adjusted for the ETF of the weakest engine and follow the slant of the line up to item 19 CRUISE SPEED IAS DUAL ENGINE Note 2 If mission requirements dictate use of T700 or T701 continuous torque available refer to the dual engine torque value derived from item 6 step 4 below Q Step 2 Move straight down do not follow the slant of the line to the TORQUE PER ENGINE to read the MAX TORQUE AVAILABLE Record the MAX TORQUE AVAILABLE DUAL ENGINE Note 1 Adjust the maximum torque available as required for planne
230. es h Altitude Higher altitudes offer greater visibility with less detail Lower altitudes are usually used because they increase survivability i Airspeed Selection of the airspeed is determined by the altitude terrain enemy situation and meteorological conditions j Terrain and meteorological conditions The type of terrain can vary from dense jungle to barren wasteland and will affect the size and details of the area that can be effectively covered The prevailing terrain and meteorological conditions often mask objects and allow only a brief exposure period especially at nap of the earth NOE altitudes k Visual cues In areas where natural cover and concealment make detection difficult visual cues may indicate enemy activity Some of these cues are as follows 1 Color Foliage used to camouflage will differ from the color of natural foliage m Texture Smooth surfaces such as glass windows or canopies will shine and reflect light Rough surfaces do not reflect light n Shapes and shadows Manmade objects cast distinctive shadows that are characterized by regular shapes and contours as opposed to random patterns that occur naturally 4 188 TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 o Trails Trails leading into an area should be observed for cues as to type quantity and recentness of traffic p Smoke and dust Smoke should be observed for color
231. es It provides performance standards and evaluation guidelines so that crewmembers know the level of performance expected Each task has a description that describes how it should be done to meet the standard Standardization officers evaluators and unit trainers will use this manual and TC 3 04 11 as the primary tools to assist the commander in developing and implementing the aircrew training program This publication applies to the Active Army the Army National Guard ARNG Army National Guard of the United States and the United States Army Reserve USAR unless otherwise stated The proponent of this publication is the United States Army Training and Doctrine Command TRADOC Send comments and recommendations on Department of the Army DA Form 2028 Recommended Changes to Publications and Blank Forms or automated link http www usapa army mil da2028 daform2028 asp through the aviation unit commander to Commander United States Army Aviation Center USAACE ATTN ATZQ TD Flight Training Branch Building 4507 Andrews Avenue Fort Rucker AL 36362 5263 Recommended changes may also be e mailed to RUCK ATZQ TD conus army mil This publication implements portions of STANAG 3114 Edition Eight This publication has been reviewed for operations security considerations Publication Date TC 3 04 33 vii FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 _33 UH60 FAD 20120522 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33
232. etween cross checking instruments and assisting in obstacle avoidance The P and NCM should maintain orientation outside the aircraft and concentrate on obstacle avoidance The P should make all internal checks NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLE NVG CONSIDERATIONS 1 If sufficient illumination exists to view obstacles accomplish the takeoff in the same way as a visual meteorological conditions VMC takeoff during the day Visual obstacles such as shadows should be treated the same as physical obstacles If sufficient illumination does not exist perform a Vertical takeoff by applying takeoff power first followed by a slow acceleration to ensure obstacle clearance The P may perform the takeoff from a hover or from the ground Publication Date TC 3 04 33 4 53 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 2 Maintain desired ground track Reduced visual references during the takeoff and throughout the ascent at night may make it difficult to maintain the desired ground track Knowledge of the surface wind direction and velocity will assist in maintaining the desired ground track 3 Use proper scanning techniques to avoid spatial disorientation 4 When performing operations during unaided night flight ensure that the searchlight or landing light white light is in the desired position Using the white light will impair night vision several minutes Therefore exercise added caution if resuming f
233. ew coordination actions WARNING Initial training should be conducted at sufficient altitudes to allow for longer recovery times due to uncoordinated flight control inputs and pilot experience Helicopter flight performance based on the environmental and aircraft conditions must be the determining factor in selecting altitudes that ensure adequate room to recover after maneuvering DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a The pilot in command PC will brief the crew on the combat flight maneuvers to be performed The PC must ensure the crew is aware of the effects of the environmental conditions on flight performance and consider the effects of an engine failure during combat maneuvering flight Note If an engine failure occurs above or below single engine airspeeds at low altitudes power available may not be enough to recover b The pilot on the controls P will announce the type of maneuver to be performed and any deviation from the maneuver The P will remain primarily focused outside the aircraft when performing the maneuver The primary reference during these maneuvers will be the visible horizon The P will make smooth and controlled flight control inputs Pitch and roll angles should be determined by referencing aircraft attitude with the outside horizon and heads up display HUD symbology The P will only momentarily scan the instruments to ensure torque trim airspeed and RPM R are maintained The P will also announce recove
234. excess of 40 000 feet per minute means that fighter aircraft can easily come and go from the area without detection by the attack helicopter crew Fighters can work independently or in a minimum of two aircraft section If one is detected expect another enemy aircraft nearby When operating in an area of possible enemy fighter activity perform the following actions 1 Be predictable to friendly fighters by being on the air tasking order ATO and squawk the appropriate transponder codes modes to avoid fratricide 2 Be unpredictable to enemy fighters by using night and or adverse weather to avoid detection when possible 3 In daylight avoid flying over areas of high contrast such as bodies of water or open fields if possible Publication Date TC 3 04 33 4 125 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 Note If fighters are observed circling rapidly climbing or turning towards the aircraft the crew should consider a fighter attack imminent 4 If hostile fighter activity is observed a Take defensive passive protection measures verify IFF is operational b Take offensive active protective measures if fighters are identified as enemy see classified special instructions SPINS c See classified Army Aviation TTP for further crew procedures 5 Air to ground gun rocket evasive maneuvers Fighters normally carry limited cannon ammunition with its high performance working ag
235. f 10 feet 0 5 ft c During extraction maintain ground speed of 10 KGS 0 5 KGS d Ensure maximum airspeed with caving ladder deployed is 80 knots indicated airspeed KIAS with personnel attached to the ladder and no faster than a brisk walk with no personnel attached e Maintain appropriate hover altitude 5 feet f Do not allow drift to exceed 5 feet from the intended hover point 2 Nonrated a Ensure that the aircraft is configured for caving ladder operations b Advise the pilot on the controls P when the survivors are in sight c Inform the pilots when the ladder is being deployed recovered d Direct the P to a stabilized hover over the survivors e Manage and control door straps and cargo doors DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a The pilot in command PC will conduct or direct a crewmember to conduct a thorough crew briefing and ensure all crewmembers are familiar with caving ladder operations emergency procedures and communication procedures The PC will ensure the aircraft is rigged per the SOP b The P will remain focused primarily outside the aircraft throughout the maneuver for aircraft control and obstacle avoidance The P will announce the intended point of extraction and remain centered over the target with corrections from the P and nonrated crewmember NCM as required c The pilot not on the controls P monitors altitude turns on the windshield wipers and if required monitors insertion altit
236. fed to all crew members before initiating the procedure The PC will confirm with the crew the specific approach to be flown that the correct navigational aid NAV AID communication frequencies are set b A L The horizontal situation indicator vertical situation indicator HSI VSI mode select panel and command instrument system CIS are selected as required The PC may assign other crewmembers to perform these duties c EM Select the appropriate navigation source and bearing pointer on the flight director display control panel FD DCP to be depicted on the primary flight display PFD for the approach to be flown 2 The pilot on the controls P will acknowledge and follow navigation directives issued by either the pilot not on the control P or ATC and announce any deviations 3 The P will call out all pertinent or requested approach information and procedures to the P and will advise the P of any unannounced deviations The P will monitor outside for visual contact with the landing environment If the P makes visual contact suitable to complete the landing per AR 95 1 the P will announce such and may if directed by the PC take the controls and complete the landing If visual contact is not made at the missed approach point the P will announce such and call out the missed approach procedures 4 During visual meteorological conditions VMC the P and nonrated crewmember NCM will focus primarily outside the aircraft to provide a
237. fensive posture enroute to and from their objective Proper pre mission planning and intelligence data may aid in developing flight profiles and route selection to avoid hostile fire Contact undetected by the enemy usually results in a standard spot report and continuance of the mission 5 Undetected by threat a Continue to avoid enemy detection within capabilities b Locate threat c Report SALT W SALUTE d Recommend or execute a course of action 6 Detected by threat Detection by the threat is usually determined by threat actions ranging from hostile fire to a change in threat disposition such as deploying to cover or orienting on the aircraft a If fired upon execute evasive maneuvers IAW Task XXXX suppressing as appropriate b Prevent enemy s capability to engage aircraft while deploying to cover or concealment if available and appropriate c Locate threat d Report SALT W SALUTE e Recommend or execute a course of action 7 Offensive Role Offensive posture is also independent of mission type An offensive posture may result from a defensive posture once an element is engaged and cannot break contact in which case immediate mission focus is on breaking contact so the flight can continue the original mission Actions on contact during an offensive posture should be clearly stated in the mission brief Sighting the enemy can be a trigger for anything from a hasty attack to initiation of massed fires depending o
238. ffective Considering the fleeting moments of time in a busy aviation environment only one opportunity may exist to convey critical and supporting information before tragedy strikes That information must be clearly understood not confusing and said at the earliest opportunity possible It must be applicable to the events at hand to support the needs and security of the mission The information must include all elements needed to make the best decision based on its urgency and the communication must come with ability of proven confirmation and without redundancy It must also include the crew s use of standard terminology and feedback techniques that accurately validate information transfer Emphasis is on the quality of statements associated with navigation obstacle clearance instrument readouts and emergencies Specific goals include the following a Crewmembers consistently make the required callouts Their statements and directives are always timely Their response to unexpected events is made in a composed professional manner b Crewmembers actively seek feedback when they do not receive acknowledgment from another 6 2 TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Aircrew Coordination crewmember They always acknowledge the understanding of intent and request clarification when necessary 3 Be explicit Crewmembers should use clear concise terms standard terminology
239. ficate Army The 2000 series tasks which require operation of aircraft equipment do not require a separate qualification entry unless equipment is listed in appendix B REFRESHER TRAINING The refresher training program is designed for crewmembers that are initially integrated into the ATP as RL 3 or have not flown in an H 60 aircraft in more than 180 days It enables them to regain proficiency in all base tasks This chapter lists refresher training requirements and provides guidelines for developing refresher training programs tables 2 2 and 2 3 page 2 3 While undergoing refresher training the crewmember will be designated RL 3 2 2 TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Training Table 2 2 Refresher flight training guide for rated crewmembers Flight Instruction Day and night base task training Flight evaluation Instrument base task training aircraft and or simulator Instrument evaluation Total hours Table 2 3 Refresher flight training guide for nonrated crewmembers Flight Instruction Hours Day and night base task training 6 0 Flight evaluation 2 0 Total hours 8 0 a Aircraft refresher training requirements 1 Rated crewmember The RCM completes RL 3 requirements when the criteria in TC 3 04 11 chapter 3 are met a Academic training The RCM will receive training and demonstrate a working knowledge of the applicabl
240. fied if required and ensure that the aircraft will be within gross weight GWT and center of gravity CG limits The PC will ensure that the crew loads the cargo uses proper tie down procedures and completes a passenger briefing as required The PC will determine whether the aircraft is capable of completing the assigned mission and will ensure that aircraft limitations will not be exceeded b The nonrated crewmember NCM will complete a passenger briefing as directed and will ensure passengers are seated and wearing seat belts according to AR 95 1 The NCM will monitor passengers cargo during the flight for security 2 Procedures a Load cargo per the cargo plan or DD Form 365 4 as appropriate Secure and restrain all cargo to meet restraint criteria For additional information see Task 1012 b Brief passengers for the flight and seat them according to the load plan or DD Form 365 4 as appropriate Conduct the passenger briefing per the appropriate aircraft operator s manual CL or unit SOP and information about the mission Ensure that the passengers understand each element of the briefing Note If the aircraft is not shut down for loading a passenger briefing may be impractical Passengers may be prebriefed or passenger briefing cards may be used per local directives or the unit SOP Note Hazardous cargo will be handled loaded and transported per AR 95 27 TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training Training ma
241. firm stabilator positions throughout the check Have crew acknowledge each reception of a stabilator audio tone f Fuel boost pumps check Note Confirm both ENG FUEL SYS selectors are in DIR Verify the 1 and 2 FUEL PRESS cautions appears If one or both of the fuel pressure caution s do not appear place the appropriate power control lever to the LOCKOUT position until the appropriate FUEL PRESS caution appears prior to check TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training Training may be conducted in the aircraft or simulator 2 Evaluation Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft REFERENCES Appropriate common references 5 8 TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Maintenance Test Pilot Tasks TASK 4088 Perform Starting Engine Checks CONDITION In an H 60 helicopter STANDARDS Appropriate common standards DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a The maintenance test pilot MP will direct assistance from the rated crewmember RCM and nonrated crewmember NCM and any ground support personnel as required b The RCM NCM and any ground support personnel will assist the MP as directed 2 Procedures Perform these checks according to the applicable maintenance test flight MTF manual with the following additional information a Brief the RCM NCM and any additional ground support personnel as follows 45 second emergency engine shutdown
242. ft and respond to navigation cues given by the pilot not on the controls P The P flies the mission profiles at the appropriate airspeeds altitudes and headings as directed by the P b The P monitors all mission equipment and uses the storm scope weather mapping system c The P will direct the P with heading changes or request route changes from air traffic control ATC to avoid hazardous weather conditions 2 Procedures Perform the turn on and select operational modes per the appropriate technical manual Understand factors and or weather adversely affecting the aircraft which could result in degraded mission performance or the mission being changed or aborted NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLE NVG CONSIDERATIONS Ensure multifunction display MFD lighting adjustment is set at an acceptable level for night or night vision goggle NVG operations TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training Training will be conducted in the aircraft 2 Evaluation Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft REFERENCES Appropriate common references 4 156 TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 TASK 2064 Perform Paradrop Operations WARNING Ensure that any personnel in the cabin area not wearing parachutes are wearing safety harnesses secured to tie down rings or are seated in seats with seat belts on If parachutes use automatic rip cord releases e
243. g automated software determine values within following parameters a Torque values 2 percent b Weight values 500 pounds DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a The pilot in command PC will compute or direct crewmembers to compute aircraft performance b The PC will verify that the aircraft meets the performance requirements for the mission and will brief the other crewmembers on the performance data 2 Procedures a When conditions have changed from the planned PPC data or an in flight update is required derive values for MAX TORQUE AVAILABLE MAX ALLOWABLE GWT OGE and GO NO GO TORQUE b Determine and have available aircraft performance data required to complete the mission Note The procedures for determining performance planning data are the same for the UH 60A L M and H 60A L M aircraft unless specifically noted in the appropriate items Note Tabular performance data Figures 4 3 and 4 4 pages 4 25 and 4 27 explain the tabular performance data presented in the checklist MAX TORQUE AVAILABLE Use the MAXIMUM TORQUE AVAILABLE 30 minute limit T700 or 10 minute limit figures 1 and 6 in the operator s manual CL Publication Date TC 3 04 33 4 23 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 At the intersection of pressure altitude height pressure HP FT and FREE AIR TEMPERATURE C read the MAXIMUM TORQUE AVAILABLE for the aircraft torque factor ATF If the ATF is between
244. g the route of flight within 300 meters Configure the flight director display control panel FD DCP and multifunction display for desired processed data DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a The pilot on the controls P will focus primarily outside the aircraft and respond to navigation instructions or cues given by the pilot not on the controls P The P will acknowledge commands issued by the P for the heading altitude and airspeed changes necessary to navigate the desired course The P will announce significant terrain features to assist in navigation b The P will be the primary operator of the electronically aided navigation system The will direct the P to change aircraft heading altitude and airspeed as appropriate to navigate the desired course The P will use rally terms specific headings relative bearings or key terrain features to accomplish this task The P will announce all plotted wires before approaching their location The P and nonrated crewmember NCM will monitor aircraft instruments assist in clearing the aircraft and provide adequate warning to avoid traffic and obstacles 2 Procedures a A L Perform the turn on test and programming procedures per the appropriate TM If the CIS processed data is selected the displayed course may be flown The proper updating and shutdown procedures will be performed per the appropriate TM o E Program the desired routes using the flight management system FMS
245. ges in selected modes 2 Procedures The P will perform the following procedures a Perform coupled flight maneuvers climbs descents and turns by selecting the appropriate flight director modes and references b Perform uncoupled flight maneuvers climb descents and turns by following flight director cues as depicted on the PFD Note The H 60M Flight Director set will only use one aircraft reference for each individual mode that is selected Changing a mode reference on the uncoupled FD DCP will change the active selected mode reference on the coupled FD DCP causing the aircraft to fly to the new reference The P will only change reference settings on the uncoupled FD DCP only after coordination with the P Note The P will maintain control of the coupled flight director The P may request the P to make specific adjustments to the aircraft references from the P s uncoupled FD DCP Note While in coupled flight the transfer of the flight controls from the P to the P should be done by the most efficient method possible TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training Training may be conducted in the aircraft or simulator 2 Evaluation Evaluation may be conducted in the aircraft or simulator 4 88 TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 REFERENCES Appropriate common references Publication Date TC 3 04 33 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT S
246. ght information publication DOD FLIP TC 3 04 11 FM 3 04 240 appropriate aircraft operator s manual Interactive Electronics Technical Manual IETM EM 0271 chapters 2 4 and 6 of this ATM and local and unit SOPs Topics in this subject area are ATP requirements e Crew coordination Airspace regulations and usage e Flight plan preparation and filing e Inadvertent IMC procedures Forms records and publications in the aircraft e Unit SOP and local requirements e Aviation life support equipment ALSE e Visual flight rules VFR instrument flight rules IFR minimums and procedures e Weight and balance requirements e DOD flight information publications and maps 2 Aircraft systems avionics and mission equipment description and operation appropriate aircraft operator s manuals and chapter 4 of this ATM Topics in this subject area are e Engines and related systems e Emergency equipment Publication Date TC 3 04 33 3 3 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 Chapter 3 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 3 e Flight control and automatic flight control system AFCS system e Fuel system eMARK XII IFF Powertrain system e Hydraulic and pneumatic system e Utility system e Main and tail rotor groups e Flight instruments Auxiliary power unit e Heating ventilation cooling and environmental control unit e Electrical power supply and distribution systems e Lighting
247. ght to the cruise PRESSURE ALTITUDE 1 000 FT c Step 3 Move down to the SINGLE ENGINE FUEL FLOW LB HR line and read fuel flow value Record the single engine CRUISE FUEL FLOW SINGLE ENGINE Note Adjust as required for FAT and or planned use of engine anti ice and for cockpit heater according to the aircraft operator s manual Item 34 MAX ALLOWABLE GWT and OPTIMUM IAS AT MAX ALLOWABLE GWT SINGLE ENGINE Use the appropriate CRUISE chart to compute the MAX ALLOWABLE GWT and OPTIMUM IAS AT MAX ALLOWABLE GWT SINGLE ENGINE as described below 1 Clean and high drag configuration a Step 1 Enter the bottom of the CRUISE chart at the TORQUE AVAILABLE SE 30 MIN T700 2 5 MIN T701 line adjusted for the ETF of the weakest engine b Step 2 Follow the slant of the line up to the intersection of MAX END AND line then read the maximum allowable gross weight Record the MAX ALLOWABLE GWT SINGLE ENGINE Read left or right for optimum IAS KTS at maximum allowable gross weight Record the OPTIMUM IAS AT MAX ALLOWABLE GWT SINGLE ENGINE If the maximum torque available line is right of the GW 1 000 LB line note the maximum torque available and enter MAX ALLOWABLE GWT SINGLE ENGINE according to the aircraft operator s manual chapter 5 Read left or right from the respective value and record OPTIMUM IAS AT MAX ALLOWABLE GWT SINGLE ENGINE TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 2
248. ground simultaneously lower the collective full down and neutralize the cyclic If cyclic or aircraft slope limits are reached before the aircraft is firmly on the ground return the aircraft to a hover Select a new area where the slope is less steep and attempt another slope landing b Takeoff Before takeoff announce initiation of an ascent Smoothly increase the collective and apply the cyclic into the slope to maintain the position of the up slope wheel Continue to increase the collective to raise the down slope wheel s maintain heading with the pedals and simultaneously adjust the cyclic to attain a hover attitude As the aircraft leaves the ground adjust the cyclic to accomplish a vertical ascent to a hover with minimum drift Publication Date TC 3 04 33 4 69 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 Note Before performing slope operations the crew must understand dynamic roll over and droop stop pounding characteristics Note When the tail wheel is locked and on the ground over controlling the pedals may result in roll oscillations caused by the thrust of the tail rotor Note Crewmembers must be aware of the helicopter s normal hovering attitude before putting a wheel on the ground NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLE NVG CONSIDERATIONS When conducting slope operations determine the need for artificial illumination before starting the maneuver Select reference points to determin
249. ground to a point in space The goal is for the P to accurately predict the amount of power required to clear the obstacle given a particular angle The P initiates the takeoff by coordinating all the flight controls to begin a constant angle climb over a predetermined path Power is used as required and the P notes the amount as well as when it was used 2 Vertical takeoffs are also constant angle takeoffs As in very steep to vertical approaches there is a point where there is no discernible difference in power required between vertical takeoffs and those of a lesser angle In some wind conditions less power is required to depart vertically than at a lesser angle Publication Date TC 3 04 33 4 51 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 Chapter ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 4 4 52 Note If P is unsure if takeoff method will clear obstacles P should consider a vertical takeoff even though it requires more power than other methods The intent is if the rotors start to droop the aircraft is already over a clear area and the aircraft can descend and land safely If obstacles are too close and P runs out of power attempting another type of takeoff there may not be enough power to abort and may cause the rotor to droop and the aircraft may settle into the obstacles A vertical takeoff should eventually turn into a level acceleration as soon as aircraft starts transitioning forward b Level acceleration This is a situation w
250. hat all crew duties and mission responsibilities are clearly assigned and efficiently distributed to prevent the overloading of any crewmember especially during critical phases of flight Crewmembers should also watch for workload buildup on others and react quickly to adjust the distribution of task responsibilities 2 Prioritize Actions and Equitably Distribute Workload Crewmembers are always able to identify and prioritize competing mission tasks They never ignore flight safety and other high priority tasks They appropriately delay low priority tasks until those tasks do not compete with tasks that are more critical Crewmembers consistently avoid nonessential distractions so that these distractions do not affect task performance sterile cockpit or ability to help another crewmember Crew actions should reflect extensive review of procedures in prior training and pre mission planning and rehearsal d Provide Situational Aircraft Control Obstacle Avoidance and Mission Advisories Although the pilot on the controls P is responsible for aircraft control the other crewmembers may need to provide aircraft control information regarding aircraft position airspeed altitude orientation obstacle avoidance equipment and personnel status environmental and battlefield conditions and changes to mission objectives or evolving situations of the mission situational awareness Crewmembers must anticipate and offer supporting information and action
251. he planned route Planned headings will be adjusted as necessary to compensate for the effects of the wind b Perform a ground speed check as soon as possible by computing the actual time required to fly a known distance Adjust estimated times for subsequent legs of the flight route using the computed ground speed Compare planned ground speed with computed ground speed and adjust airspeed as required to arrive at each control point at its original ETA NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLE NVG CONSIDERATIONS More detailed flight planning is required when the flight is conducted at night Interior cockpit lighting should be considered when selecting colors for preparing navigational aids such as maps and kneeboard notes TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training Training may be conducted in the aircraft or the simulator 2 Evaluation Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft REFERENCES Appropriate common references 4 56 TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 TASK 1046 Perform Electronically Aided Navigation CONDITION In an H 60 helicopter with an electronically aided navigation system installed and operational STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 Operate the installed electronically aided navigational system per the appropriate technical manual TM 2 Determine the position of the aircraft alon
252. he Army civilian DAT data DC direct current DCU dispenser control unit DD Department of Defense DECR decrease DECU digital electronic control unit DEG degree DF direction finder DGNS Doppler global positioning system navigation system DA density altitude decision altitude DH decision height DIR direct DME distance measuring equipment DOD Department of Defense DOT Department of Transportation DSP droop stop pounding DTAC Digital Training Access Center DTD data transfer device DTG date time group DTS data transfer system DTU data transfer unit EAT external air transportability ECCM electronic counter countermeasures ECM electronic countermeasures ECS environmental control system ECU electronic control unit EDM electronic data module Glossary 2 TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Glossary EGI EICAS ELA ENG EPW ERFS ESSS ETA ETE ETF ETL FAA FAC FAF FAR FARE FARP FAT FD DCP HSI Publication Date embedded global positioning system inertial navigation system engine instrument caution advisory system en route low altitude engine enemy prisoner of war extended range fuel system external stores support system estimated time of arrival estimated time en route engine torque factor effective translational lift Federal Aviation Administration flight activity category final approach fix Federal Aviation regulation forward area refuel
253. he NCM will announce ROPERS AWAY upon the first rappeller exiting the aircraft The NCM will announce ROPES CLEAR only when all rappellers are safely on the insertion point and the ropes are either released retrieved inside the aircraft or secured by the belay man P will remain over the insertion point at a stabilized hover until all rappellers and ropes are clear The NCM will announce to the P CLEARED FOR FLIGHT upon verifying all ropes and ropers are clear The NCM will ensure approximately 20 feet of rappelling rope remains in contact with the insertion point during rappelling operations During the rappelling operation use the collective to maintain altitude and be prepared to correct for center of gravity CG changes as the rappellers depart the aircraft Note The following standard words and phrases are some examples of terminology used for fries operations ADVERSE WEATHER TERRAIN CONDITIONS Rappel operations will not be conducted under the following conditions e Ambient temperature is 30 degrees Fahrenheit or less Winds in excess of 30 knots Lightning strikes within one nautical mile of rappelling operations Wind chill factors caused by the helicopter s rotor wash which could cause cold weather injuries Water or ice on the rope inhibiting the ability of the rappellers to control their descent The rope is exposed to the elements for a sufficient length of time to freeze or deteriorate thereby reducing tensil
254. he TORQUE PER ENGINE IGE at the dual engine MAX TORQUE AVAILABLE item 8 then move up to the desired IGE WHEEL HEIGHT FT normally the 10 foot line then move right to the GROSS WEIGHT 1 000 LB chart If the dual engine maximum torque available exceeds transmission torque limits use the DUAL ENGINE TRANS LIMIT line to compute the maximum allowable gross weight IGE b Step 2 Reenter the HOVER chart at the appropriate FREE AIR TEMP C and move right to the appropriate PRESSURE ALTITUDE 1 000 FT then move down to the GROSS WEIGHT 1 000 LB chart Read the maximum allowable gross weight IGE at the intersection of this step and step 1 above Record the MAX ALLOWABLE GWT IGE j Item 10 GO NO GO TORQUE OGE IGE Use the appropriate HOVER chart as described below 1 OGE Use maximum allowable gross weight OGE item 9 2 IGE Use maximum allowable gross weight IGE item 9 Note GO NO GO is computed using forecast FAT and PA at the time and location of departure a Step 1 Enter the chart at the appropriate FREE AIR TEMP C b Step 2 Move right to the appropriate PRESSURE ALTITUDE 1 000 FT c Step 3 Move down to the maximum allowable gross weight s OGE or IGE d Step 4 Move left to the 10 foot hover line or appropriate WHEEL HEIGHT FT that will be used to check the GO NO e Step 5 Move down to read the GO NO GO torque value s Record the GO NO GO TORQUE OGE IGE Note 1 MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE GWT OGE
255. he appropriate approach angle is intercepted adjust the collective as necessary to establish and maintain the angle As the apparent rate of 4 66 TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 closure appears to increase progressively reduce the rate of descent and closure to arrive at the touchdown area slightly above effective translational lift At this point maintain the minimum rate of closure that ensures that the snow sand dust cloud remains behind the pilot s station Apply slight aft cyclic just prior to touchdown to prevent burying the wheels or toes of the skis When the wheels or heels of the skis contact the snow ground slowly lower the collective and allow the aircraft to settle Lower the collective as necessary neutralize the flight controls and apply brakes as necessary to stop forward movement 3 Termination to the surface with no forward speed This termination should be made to landing areas where slopes obstacles or unfamiliar terrain precludes a landing with forward speed It is not recommended when new or powder snow or fine dust is present because whiteout brownout conditions will occur The termination is made directly to a reference point on the ground with no forward speed The angle should be slightly steeper than a normal approach and the approach speed faster than a normal approach After ground contact slowly lower the collective to the full dow
256. he back of the seat c Perform emergency engine shutdown procedures per the appropriate aircraft operator s manual d Consideration should be given to utilizing the rotor brake if installed OVERWATER CONSIDERATIONS If egress must be made from an aircraft that has gone into the water do not exit until rotor blades have stopped Secure a handhold within the cockpit to maintain orientation employ underwater breathing device if equipped and wait for cockpit and cabin area to fill with water Once aircraft is 4 82 TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 full of water use the cargo cockpit doors If they are jammed use the emergency release If the emergency release does not work break out the windows with the crash axe boot or other suitable object and swim clear of the aircraft Do not activate life preserver until clear of aircraft and on surface TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training Training will be conducted in the aircraft or academically 2 Evaluation Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft or academically REFERENCES Appropriate common references Publication Date TC 3 04 33 4 83 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 TASK 1166 Perform Instrument Maneuvers CONDITIONS In an H 60 helicopter in instrument meteorological condition IMC or simulated IMC and given app
257. he crewmember s assistance with monitoring the master warning fire light during the APU start sequence Confirm that the SAS 1 switch and the APU accumulator ACCUM LOW advisory lights are OFF Place the FUEL PUMP switch to the APU BOOST position and note the PRIME BOOST PUMP ON advisory light illuminates Confirm the APU exhaust area is clear Place the APU control CONTR switch to ON Maintain positive control of the APU switch throughout the start sequence After the APU ON advisory light illuminates release the APU 4 176 TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 CONTR switch Verify the stabilator area is clear and brief the additional cockpit crewmember that the engine out audio should sound when the APU generator is engaged Place the APU generator switch to ON Verify the APU GEN ON advisory light illuminates The BACKUP PUMP advisory light should come on in about 4 seconds Reset the engine out audio using either MASTER CAUTION PRESS TO RESET switch or if external power was used to perform the start select the EXT PWR switch to OFF Direct the external power cable to be disconnected and the power generating equipment to be secured at a safe distance outside the rotor disk unless further use is anticipated The APU ACCUM LOW light should extinguish after either 90 or 180 seconds SINGLE CREWMEMBER CONSIDERATIONS 1 Clearing the APU and stabilator When performing t
258. he earth notice to airmen night vision device night vision goggle night vision system oxygen onboard oxygen generation system oxygen delivery system one engine inoperative out of ground effect observer off route obstruction clearance altitude continental United States off route terrain clearance altitude outside the continental United States pilot not on the controls TC 3 04 33 Glossary 5 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Glossary P pilot on the controls PA pressure altitude PAR precision approach radar PC pilot in command PDU pilot display unit PFD primary flight display PFE proficiency flight evaluation PI pilot PLGR precision lightweight global positioning system receiver PLS personnel locater system POI program of instruction PPC performance planning card PPS precise positioning system PWR power PZ pickup zone QTY quantity R C rate of climb RCM rated crewmember RETRAN retransmission RL readiness level ROC required obstacle clearance ROE rules of engagement RPG rocket propelled grenade RPM revolutions per minute revolutions per minute rotor SA situational awareness SAS stability augmentation system SCATMINWARN scatterable minefield warning SE single engine SEL select SFTS synthetic flight training systems SI nonrated crewmember standardization instructor SM statute mile SMGW simulated maximum gross weight SOI signal operating instructions SOP stand
259. he nose e Hookup crew clear e Load in sight e Slings coming tight e Forward Load is centered e Back e Load is off the ground e Left Load on ground e Right e Slack in the slings e Down e Release the load e Up Load is released e Hold e Clear to reposition NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLE NVG CONSIDERATIONS For unaided night flight the landing light and searchlight should be operational If a night vision goggle NVG filter is installed it should be removed When NVG are used hovering with minimum drift is difficult and requires proper scanning techniques and crewmember coordination If possible an area with adequate ground contrast and reference points should be used Visual obstacles such as shadows should be treated the same as 4 132 TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 physical obstacles The rate of descent and rate of closure should be slightly slower to avoid abrupt attitude changes at low altitudes Sling loads should be marked with chemstick lighting TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training Training will be conducted in the aircraft or simulator 2 Evaluation Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft REFERENCES Appropriate common references AR 95 27 DA Form 7382 FM 55 450 2 FM 4 20 197 and FM 21 60 Publication Dat
260. he unit standing operating procedure SOP 4 Enter the appropriate information on DA Form 2408 12 DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions cold refueling a A crewmember will guide the refueling vehicle to the aircraft Ensure that the driver parks the vehicle the proper distance from the aircraft per FM 10 67 1 Verify that all personnel not involved with the refueling operations are a safe distance away b Ground and refuel the aircraft per FM 10 67 1 the appropriate aircraft operator s manual and the unit SOP Ensure that the tanks are filled to the required level When the refueling is completed ensure that all caps are secured and remove the ground connection if the aircraft will not remain parked Make the appropriate entries on DA Form 2408 12 2 Crew actions hot refueling a The pilot not on the controls P and nonrated crewmember NCM will assist the pilot on the controls P in positioning the aircraft Ensure that the proper separation is maintained between the fuel source the aircraft and the refueling equipment Before refueling the aircraft the PC will verify that personnel not involved with the refueling operation are a safe distance away b The crewmember outside the aircraft should position himself in view of active refueling personnel and at least one pilot and should maintain the ability to communicate with both He must ensure that the aircraft is grounded refueled per FM 10 67 1 the appropriate aircraft operator s ma
261. he weather After ensuring that the flight can be completed under VFR per AR 95 1 check NOTAMs chart updating manuals CHUMs and other appropriate sources for any restrictions that apply to the flight Obtain navigational charts that cover the entire flight area and allow for changes in routing that may be required because of the weather or terrain Select the course s and altitude s that will best accomplish the mission Determine the magnetic heading ground speed and ETE for each leg Compute total distance and flight time Calculate the required fuel using a CPU 26A P computer Weems plotter or equivalent or approved mission planning software Complete the appropriate flight plan and file it with the appropriate agency NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLE NVG CONSIDERATIONS More detailed planning is necessary at night because of visibility restrictions Checkpoints used during the day may not be suitable for night or night vision goggle NVG use TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training Training will be conducted academically 2 Evaluation Evaluation will be conducted academically REFERENCES Appropriate common references 4 10 TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 TASK 1006 Plan an Instrument Flight Rules Flight CONDITIONS Before instrument flight rules flight in an H 60 helicopter given access to weather information notices to airmen NO
262. hecks according to manufacture procedures to confirm the proper operation of the water bucket before takeoff 4 Hook up and hover Once the water bucket is placed on the ground beside the aircraft and all associated wiring is installed place the cargo release switch in the ARM position Follow verbal signals from the NCM to hover over the water bucket Apply control movements as necessary to remain vertically clear and centered over the water bucket Once in this position smoothly apply collective input until all slack is removed from the suspension cable Maintain heading with pedals Apply additional collective to raise the bucket to 5 feet AGL Monitor aircraft instruments to ensure aircraft limitations are not exceeded 5 Water pick up Arrive over water source with minimal forward speed and a bucket height of 10 feet above water level Slowly reduce collective until the bucket makes contact with the water Once the bucket has inverted and submerged in the water follow verbal signals from the NCM to remain centered over the bucket as it fills applying cyclic collective and pedals as necessary The pilot can vary the bucket s capacity by varying the speed at which it is pulled from the water A slow lift gives minimum fill A fast lift gives maximum fill When the NCM indicates the Publication Date TC 3 04 33 4 141 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 Chapter 4 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 2 4 142 bucket is ready o
263. hem the most appropriate method is navigation instruction toward the terrain feature in view When forward visibility is restricted and frequent changes are necessary controlled turning instructions are more appropriate Clock headings are recommended when associated with a terrain feature and with controlled turning instructions 4 116 TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 Note For additional information see Task 1044 Task 1046 and Task 1172 NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLE NVG CONSIDERATIONS Conducting the flight in reduced visibility or at night requires more detailed and extensive flight planning and map preparation FM 3 04 203 contains details on night navigation Night vision goggle NVG navigation with standard maps can be difficult because of map colors symbology and colored marker use during map preparation Use proper scanning techniques to ensure obstacle avoidance TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training Training may be conducted in the aircraft or simulator 2 Evaluation Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft REFERENCES Appropriate common references and FM 21 26 Publication Date TC 3 04 33 4 117 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 TASK 2026 Perform Terrain Flight CONDITIONS In an H 60 helicopter with tactical flight mission planning completed STANDARDS A
264. hen conducting operations with jettisonable external stores the P will be prepared to jettison the stores when operating below minimum single engine airspeed or as briefed during the crew briefing c The pilot on the controls P will remain focused primarily outside the aircraft throughout the maneuver to provide obstacle clearance The P will announce whether the takeoff is from the ground or from a hover and his or her intent to abort or alter the takeoff The P will select reference points to assist in maintaining the takeoff flight path d The pilot not on the controls P and nonrated crewmember NCM will announce when ready for takeoff and will remain focused primarily outside the aircraft to assist in clearing and to provide adequate warning of obstacles The P will monitor power requirements and advise the P if power limits are being approached The P and NCM will announce when their attention is focused inside the aircraft and again when attention is reestablished outside e The NCM will assist in clearing the aircraft advise the P when the tail and main landing gear are off the ground and obstacle avoidance Note To determine maximum torque available when in ground effect IGE hover power is not present apply collective not to exceed dual engine torque and turbine gas temperature TGT limits while observing the TGT Maximum torque available will be indicated by a droop in rotor RPM with further increase in the collective
265. hen specific crew actions are required the task will be broken down into crew actions and procedures as follows Publication Date TC 3 04 33 5 1 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 5 f 1 Crew actions Define portions of a task to be performed by each crewmember to ensure safe efficient and effective task execution When required MP responsibilities are specified tasks in this chapter are only to be performed by qualified MPs MEs or student maintenance test pilots undergoing qualification training as outlined in AR 95 1 The MP is the PC in all situations except when being trained or evaluated by an ME For all tasks MP actions and responsibilities are applicable to MEs When two MEs are conducting training evaluation together or two MPs are jointly performing test flight tasks the mission brief will designate the aviator assuming PC responsibilities MEs may perform MP ME evaluations from the cabin provided an aviator with access to the flight controls is briefed as the PC 2 Procedures This section describes the actions that the MP ME performs or directs the RCM NCM to perform in order to execute the task to standard Considerations This section defines training evaluation and other considerations for task accomplishment under various conditions 1 Considerations General Crew selection and aircrew coordination are essential to successful and safe
266. here the power required to hover is the maximum power available The P will coordinate cyclic and pedals as necessary to accelerate the aircraft The first objective is to achieve ETL without allowing the aircraft to settle to the surface If it becomes apparent that the aircraft will contact the surface apply sufficient aft cyclic to prevent contact or abort if necessary and analyze for cause As the transverse flow shudder develops increase forward cyclic As the aircraft enters ETL make a significant forward cyclic input to prevent blowback Maintain altitude and allow the aircraft to accelerate until the climb point is reached Adjust the cyclic as necessary and climb to the necessary height If using the best angle ensure ETL is not lost Estimate the point where the aircraft will enter effective translational lift ETL and establish an abort line Note Level acceleration does not need to be conducted at 10 feet It can be initiated at any altitude that power allows to ensure obstacle clearance Note Recommendation Practice this maneuver paralleling barriers rather than into them until proficiency is attained Note Avoid unnecessary nose low accelerate attitudes 5 degrees nose low is recommended for acceleration However 10 degrees nose low should not be exceeded Note Performing this maneuver in certain environments may require hover out of ground effect OGE power Evaluate each situation for power required versus pow
267. his task without additional crewmember support the NCM will just prior to APU start confirm the APU exhaust area and stabilator is clear During the APU run the NCM will remain at either pilot station The NCM will ensure the stabilator area remains clear throughout any stabilator operations c Disabling stabilator auto mode Because the stabilator area cannot be observed from the cockpit the NCM may elect to disable the stabilator auto mode for safety After applying AC power momentarily engage the cyclic mounted stabilator slew up switch or the stabilator automatic flight control system AFCS panel MAN SLEW switch to the UP position During aircraft systems troubleshooting it is important to remember that the stabilator may slow down if AC power is interrupted and then restored NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLE NVG CONSIDERATIONS During night operations ensure adequate lighting anti collision position lights is on and fire guard has a flashlight This task is prohibited while wearing night vision devices NVDs TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training Training will be conducted in the aircraft 2 Evaluation Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft REFERENCES Appropriate common references Publication Date TC 3 04 33 4 177 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 TASK 2112 Operate Armament Subsystem WARNING This task may only be performed by personnel qualifi
268. iciency is corrected TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training Training may be conducted in the aircraft or simulator 2 Evaluation Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft REFERENCES Appropriate common references 5 14 TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Maintenance Test Pilot Tasks TASK 4202 Perform Generator Underfrequency Protection Disable Low Rotor Rpm CONDITIONS In an H 60 helicopter STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and do not allow rotor RPM R to decrease below 85 percent DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a The maintenance test pilot MP will perform pilot not on the controls P duties during this check The MP should direct assistance from the pilot not on the controls P and the nonrated crewmember NCM as required b The P and NCM will assist the MP as directed 2 Procedures a Perform the check according to the applicable maintenance test flight MTF manual b Brief the P and NCM on the following 1 Maintain a 10 foot hover height 2 Control response during low rotor operation 3 Low rotor RPM audio 4 Landing in the event that underfrequency protection is not disabled TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training Training may be conducted in the aircraft or simulator 2 Evaluation Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLE NVG CONSIDERATIONS The aux
269. ickly mask the helicopter against enemy threats 1 At cruise altitudes apply directional cyclic to initiate the turn As the roll rate and bank angle increase allow the nose to drop while maintaining the aircraft in trim to take advantage of the descent rate while deploying to cover 2 At terrain flight altitudes consider the desired direction of turn before initiating the maneuver Angles of bank should be lower than those used during cruise flight because sufficient recovery altitude may not be available 3 Adjust cyclic as necessary to maintain the pitch attitude to prevent excessive nose low attitude and to maintain aircraft in trim Note Recovery is affected by applying opposite cyclic roll when reaching the desired heading and adjusting the collective to obtain the desired airspeed and altitude d Cyclic climb to a pushover break This maneuver is used to rapidly climb over an obstacle and increase altitude to evade an enemy threat followed by a descent to mask the aircraft 1 Initiate the maneuver by smoothly applying aft cyclic and collective as necessary to begin an ascent As airspeed decreases trading airspeed for altitude maintain attitude within limits and aircraft in trim As aircraft reaches the appropriate altitude apply collective as necessary to maintain RPM R and torque within limits 2 Initiate the descent by applying forward cyclic while maintaining torque as necessary and maintain aircraft in trim Pub
270. ics listed below The aircraft operator s manual is the reference for the following academic training topics e Aircraft improvements and differences from UH60A L e Operating limitations restrictions and capabilities e Emergency procedures b Flight training The NCM will receive 1 hour of flight training in the aircraft As a minimum the NCM will perform the tasks in table A 5 page 4 Publication Date TC 3 04 33 A 3 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Appendix A c IP qualification The following outlines the only authorized methods to become an instructor pilot IP in the H 60M 1 For Aviators previously qualified as an IP in the H 60A L complete the H 60M series transition at USAACE or approved NETT 2 Complete the IP qualification as approved by G3 5 7 DAMO AV IAW AR 95 1 3 H 60M Series qualified Aviators that are also qualified as an IP in the H 60A L M Series IP training and validation may be conducted locally by an SP At a minimum the validation will include M specific ATM tasks and emphasis on aircraft systems differences 60 IP Transition will be annotated on the individual s the DA Form 7122 R and the remark included during the individual s next DA Form 759 closeout 4 For Aviators that are previously H 60M qualified that are not qualified as an H 60 IP attend the course of instruction at USAACE designed for H 60 IP qualification Once IP qualified S
271. ight controls HUD qualification training may be conducted concurrently with NVG refresher and mission training Note The academic training and all training flights except the last one may be conducted by a HUD qualified NVG UT providing the RCM receiving the training is designated NVG RL 2 A HUD qualified NVG IP SP must conduct the last flight Note Once qualified the RCM has no currency or evaluation requirements for HUD operations unless specified by the commander Academic training must be completed before flight training starts a Academic training Using either the HUD computer based trainer CBT or other training aids the trainee will receive instruction in the following subject areas e AN AVS 7 HUD system components e HUD symbology e HUD system operations programming adjusting and operating b HUD flight training 1 Initial qualification will be in accordance with table B 1 Initial qualification will be annotated on the DA Form 7122 R and DA Form 759 Some RCMs may require additional flight periods to achieve a satisfactory level of proficiency with the ANVIS HUD ANVIS HUD training requires the RCM to develop new scanning habits Time must be allowed to absorb this new information and develop the new scan patterns 2 HUD qualification Units using a HUD modified SFTS will use the training program in table B 1 Table B 1 Heads up display qualification Training day 1 2 3 Aircraft 1 0 1 0 1
272. il takeoff airspeed is achieved Use the pedals to maintain heading aligned with the desired takeoff direction The tailwheel may come off the surface as the stabilator begins to produce lift with forward airspeed 3 Upon reaching takeoff airspeed adjust the collective to maximum torque available or as planned briefed and cyclic as necessary to allow the aircraft to become airborne Depending on liftoff speed the stabilator may cause a slight nose down attitude At approximately 20 feet above the surface apply forward cyclic to maintain an in ground effect level acceleration to the maximum rate of climb airspeed Place the aircraft in trim as soon as maximum rate of climb airspeed is achieved after the aircraft becomes airborne commensurate with surface obstacles Trade off altitude as necessary to gain airspeed if the area is clear of obstacles Maintain heading with pedals so the aircraft is aligned with the runway surface takeoff direction when the aircraft is below maximum rate of climb airspeed should the takeoff need to be aborted Upon reaching maximum rate of climb airspeed adjust the attitude to maintain the maximum rate of climb airspeed and maintain power as necessary until reaching the desired level off altitude and maintain aircraft in trim 4 Maintain the takeoff power setting until reaching climb airspeed Adjust power as required to establish the desired rate of climb and cyclic to maintain the desired airspeed Alternate attention b
273. ile is flown at high gross weight and low airspeed Also density altitude is greatly increased in the vicinity of a major fire Performance planning must receive special emphasis CONDITIONS In an H 60 helicopter with an operational cargo hook and water bucket STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 Rated a Conduct premission planning to determine fuel and bucket cinching requirements Verify the aircraft will remain within gross weight and center of gravity CG limitations for the duration of the flight b Conduct a thorough crew briefing c In conjunction with the nonrated crewmembers NCMs complete the required checks to ensure proper system operation prior to mission departure d Operate the water bucket system per manufacture specifications e Recognize and respond to a water bucket system malfunction f Use dipping procedures appropriate for the water bucket type g Hook up and hover 1 Maintain vertical ascent heading 10 degrees 2 Maintain altitude of load 5 feet above ground level AGL 1 foot 3 Complete hover power and GO NO GO checks h En route Maintain safe load obstacle clearance minimum 50 feet above highest obstacle AHO 1 Approach and water release 1 Maintain a constant approach angle to ensure load safely clears obstacles 2 Maintain ground track alignment with selected approach path 3 Execute a smooth and controlled pass or termination ov
274. iliary power unit APU should be on to prevent a blackout condition should the main generators go offline REFERENCES Appropriate common references Publication Date TC 3 04 33 5 15 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 5 TASK 4204 Perform Compasses Turn Rate And Vertical Gyros Automatic Heading Reference System AHRS Checks A L CONDITION In an H 60 helicopter STANDARDS Appropriate common standards DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a The maintenance test pilot MP should direct assistance from the rated crewmember RCM and nonrated crewmember NCM as required b The RCM and NCM should assist the MP as directed 2 Procedures Perform the check according to the maintenance test flight MTF manual with the following additional information a Brief the RCM on the conduct of the maneuver Direct the RCM to assist with gyro mode selection switch functions and to confirm instrument indications as necessary Direct the NCM to remain secured assist with clearing the aircraft and maintain obstacle avoidance b Note and compare the standby magnetic compass heading with horizontal situation indicator HSI heading indications at both the pilot and copilot stations c Direct the RCM to set MODE SEL TURN RATE and VERT GYRO switches at the pilot s station to ALTR and note that the legend lights indicate appropriately Perform pedal turn to the left of the initial heading
275. ilities The PC ensures that crewmembers take advantage of periods of low workload to review or rehearse upcoming flight segments Crewmembers should continuously review remaining flight segments to identify required adjustments making certain their planning is consistently ahead of critical lead times c After a mission or mission segment the crew should debrief review and critique major decisions their actions and task performance This should include identifying options and factors that were omitted from earlier discussion and outline ways to improve crew performance in future missions Remember this discussion and critique of crew decisions and actions must remain professional Finger pointing is not the intent and shall be avoided the emphasis should remain on education with the singular purpose of improving crew and mission performance Publication Date TC 3 04 33 6 1 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 6 6 2 PRINCIPLES Broadly defined aircrew coordination is the cooperative interaction between crewmembers necessary for the safe efficient and effective performance of flight tasks The essential principles and qualities of aircrew coordination figure 6 1 Crew Coordination Principles Combine to Produce Coordinated Objectives Sustaifi a Climate of Ready amp Prompt Assistance Communicate Effectively amp Timely 25 20 Se Ep 7
276. imum fuel flow for a specific weight and altitude In addition total drag is at its lowest and at this airspeed the aircraft will remain aloft for the longest period of time 0 Item 25 CRITICAL TORQUE DUAL ENGINE Critical torque CT is the dual engine torque value which when exceeded may not allow the aircraft to maintain RPM within normal limits under single engine operations in the same flight conditions k Item 26 MAX ALLOWABLE GWT and OPTIMUM IAS AT MAX ALLOWABLE GWT DUAL ENGINE The maximum allowable gross weight the aircraft is capable of flying at cruise conditions and the associated maximum endurance airspeed Note The torque change to compensate for drag alternative or sling load configuration at MAX END IAS is often negligible and not computed 1 Item 27 R C IAS TORQUE DUAL ENGINE Ias that allows the aircraft to climb from one altitude to a higher altitude in the least amount of time when using maximum torque available Note The torque change to compensate for drag alternative or sling load configuration at MAX END IAS is often negligible and not computed m Item 28 MAX ALTITUDE MSL MAX ENDURANCE IAS DUAL ENGINE The maximum altitude the aircraft is capable of flying at maximum endurance airspeed Note Several different cruise charts may have to be referenced when computing the MAX ALTITUDE MEAN SEA LEVEL MSL It is recommended to start with the 10 000 FOOT CRUISE chart and forecast temperat
277. ined either with or without stores record NA in MAX ALTITUDE MSL SINGLE ENGINE block Item 36 MAX ANGLE Use the AIRSPEED FOR ONSET OF BLADE STALL chart in the aircraft operator s manual chapter 5 to compute the maximum bank angle for the planned cruise IAS as described below 1 Step 1 Enter the chart at the cruise PRESSURE ALTITUDE 1 000 FT item 16 cruise data Move right to the cruise temperature FAT C item 17 cruise data 2 Step 2 Move down to the GROSS WEIGHT 1 000 LB at the AIRCRAFT GWT item 3 departure data then move left to the ANGLE OF BANK DEG chart 3 Step 3 Reenter the chart at the INDICATED AIRSPEED KTS at the planned cruise airspeed item 19 cruise data then move up to the ANGLE OF BANK DEG chart Record derived MAX ANGLE or 60 degrees whichever is less Item 37 V amp IAS Use the AIRSPEED OPERATING LIMITATIONS chart in the aircraft operator s manual chapter 5 to compute the Vne as described below 1 Step 1 Enter the chart at the cruise FREE AIR TEMPERATURE item 17 cruise data Move right to the cruise PRESSURE ALTITUDE 1 000 FT item 16 cruise data 2 Step 2 Move down to the GROSS WEIGHT 1 000 LB at the AIRCRAFT GWT item 3 departure data If the COMPRESSIBILITY LIMITS FAT or the MACH LIMIT dashed temperature line 10 to 50 C is reached prior to the aircraft GROSS WEIGHT 1 000 LB stop there 3 Step 3 Move left to the MAXIMUM INDICATED
278. ing equipment forward arming and refueling point free air temperature flight director display control panel frequency hopping nonrated crewmember instructor flight information handbook flight information publication forward looking infrared field manual flight management system field of view flight plan flight path stabilization fast rope insertion and extraction system generator global positioning system gross weight height above landing health indicator test high mobility multipurpose wheeled vehicle pressure altitude height pressure Headquarters hour horizontal situation indicator TC 3 04 33 Glossary 3 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Glossary HVR hover HVR VHLD Hover velocity hold HUD heads up display IAF initial approach fix IAS indicated airspeed IATF individual aircrew training folder ICP interface control panel ICS intercommunication system IE instrument examiner IF intermediate fix IFF identification friend or foe IFR instrument flight rules IGE in ground effect inadvertent instrument meteorological condition ILS instrument landing system IMC instrument meteorological condition INI initialization IP instructor pilot IR infrared IRP intermediate rated power ITO instrument takeoff IVHMS integrated vehicle health monitoring system JOG joint operations graphic JSIR joint spectrum interference resolution JP1 02 KIAS knots indicated airspee
279. ing light and searchlight should be operational If a night vision goggle NVG filter is installed it should be removed 3 Hovering with minimum drift is difficult and requires proper scanning techniques and crewmember coordination when NVG are used If possible an area with adequate ground contrast and reference points should be used 4 Visual obstacles such as shadows should be treated the same as physical obstacles 5 Spatial disorientation can be overwhelming during overwater operations at night If there are visible lights on the horizon or if the shoreline can be seen the pilot may opt to approach the survivor s so the aircraft is pointed toward these references if the wind permits If no other references exist deploy chemlights to assist in maintaining a stable hover TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training Training will be conducted in the aircraft 2 Evaluation Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft REFERENCES Appropriate common references FM 4 02 2 and FM 4 02 6 4 154 TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 TASK 2061 Operate Forward Looking Infrared System CAUTION During takeoff do not rotate forward while on the main landing gear to preclude contacting the FLIR turret on the ground During landings do not make a hard landing compressing the struts or heavy braking to preclude contacting the FLIR turret
280. ing on the ground move the aircraft laterally to dump the water out of the bucket and repeat the fill up procedure Note Avoid flight over populated areas Note go around should also be initiated if visual contact with the water release area is lost or any crewmember announces climb climb climb This phrase will only be used when there is not enough time to give detailed instructions to avoid the obstacle Post mission a Ensure water bucket is serviceable TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 b Derig aircraft and water bucket Ensure all documentation is complete on water bucket usage and inspection SAND DUST SMOKE CONSIDERATIONS If during the approach visual reference with the water release area or obstacles is lost initiate a go around or instrument takeoff ITO as required immediately Be prepared to transition to instruments Once visual meteorological conditions VMC are regained continue with the go around If required releasing the water reduces the gross weight GWT by 5 000 to 6 000 pounds and minimizes power demand MOUNTAINOUS AREA CONSIDERATIONS If at any time during an approach the aircraft does not have sufficient power and turbulent conditions or wind shift creates an unsafe condition perform a go around immediately If required releasing the water reduces the GWT by 5 000 to 6 000 pounds and minimizes power demand
281. ing operating procedure SP standardization instructor pilot SPIES special patrol infiltration exfiltration system SQ FT square feet STS status TACAN tactical air navigation Glossary 6 TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Glossary TAS TC TDH TEMP TERPS TGT TR TRANS TRQ TSP U S USAASA USAASD E USAACE USAR UT VFR VMC VOR VREF VSI XFD SECTION Il TERMS AF ATRQ DRAG MACH Np Nr ram air Vu Publication Date true airspeed training circular time distance heading temperature terminal instrument procedures turbine gas temperature technical manual torque ratio transmit torque training support package United States United States Army Aeronautical Services Agency United States Army Aeronautical Services Agency Detachment Europe United States Army Aviation Warfighting Center United States Army Reserve unit trainer visual flight rules visual meteorological conditions VHF omnidirectional range radio beacon velocity reference vertical situation indicator crossfeed Change in flat plate drag area Change in torque Force of aerodynamic resistance caused by the violent currents behind the shock front JP1 02 The ratio of an aircraft s true speed as compared to the local speed of sound at a given time or place Power turbine speed Rotor speed Any air system which uses the air pressure
282. ing techniques 6 2 E evaluation principles 3 1 evaluation sequence 3 3 Publication Date Index evaluator 4 3 4 4 F flight evaluation 2 3 3 1 3 7 G grading considerations 3 1 L leadership 6 2 6 4 M mission training 2 4 B 1 P performance task 1 1 2 6 premission planning 4 150 4 168 Q qualification training 2 1 5 2 B 1 C 1 TC 3 04 33 R refresher training 2 2 S situational awareness 4 46 4 133 4 134 4 136 4 137 4 138 4 196 6 2 6 3 6 4 6 statement and directive 6 2 technical task C 2 U unexpected event 6 1 6 2 W workload distribution 6 3 Index 1 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 _33 UH60 FAD 20120522 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 TC 3 04 33 Publication Date By order of the Secretary of the Army GEORGE W CASEY JR General United States Army Chief of Staff Official JOYCE E MORROW Administrative Assistant to the Secretary of the Army DISTRIBUTION Active Army Army National Guard and U S Army Reserve To be distributed in accordance with the FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 PIN XXXXXX 000 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 H 60 PERFORMANCE PLANNING CARD For use of this form see TC 3 04 33 the proponent agency is TRADOC DEPARTURE MAX TORQUE AVAILABLE
283. ining program ATP NCMs must complete academic and flight training and pass the required written examinations within 90 consecutive days from the start of training USAR 1 year ARNG tefer to appropriate regulations NVG qualification Initial NVG qualification and aircraft NVG qualification will be according to TC 3 04 11 and this ATM The NVG TSP can be obtained by writing to the Commander United States Army Aviation Center ATTN ATZQ ATB NS Fort Rucker AL 36362 5000 or atzqatbns conus army mil The NVG TSP may be obtained through Army Knowledge Online AKO from the Night Vision Devices Branch Knowledge Center at https www us army mil suite kc 5826250 1 Initial NVG qualification Initial NVG qualification training will be conducted according to this ATM a Academic training The crewmember will receive training and demonstrate a working knowledge of the topics outlined in paragraph 3 4b of this ATM Academic training must be completed prior to commencement of flight training b Flight training e Rated crewmembers RCMs will complete as a minimum 10 flight hours of training on the tasks outlined in table 2 1 The evaluation may be applied to the 10 hour training requirement e Nonrated crewmembers NCMs will demonstrate proficiency in all tasks outlined for NCMs in table 2 1 There is no minimum flight hour requirement e NVG progression For progression to RL 2 a crewmember must complete an NVG evaluation
284. intain aircraft in trim with the pedals Perform instrument procedures per AR 95 1 FM 3 04 240 aeronautical information manual AIM FAA Instrument Flying Handbook FAA Instrument Procedures Handbook and Department of Defense flight information publication DOD FLIP b When expecting to use the automatic direction finder ADF ensure that the ADF will receive on the desired band and the number 2 bearing pointer points at the selected station c When expecting to use the VHF omnidirectional range radio beacon VOR instrument landing system ILS receiver ensure that the VOR is operational and the vertical situation indicator VSI and horizontal situation indicator HSI give the proper indications per the appropriate aircraft operator s manual d Before using a selected NAVAID for navigation tune and identify the NAV AID After identifying the desired station and the position of the aircraft in relation to the desired course turn to an appropriate intercept heading Maintain the intercept heading until approaching an on course indication Depending on the rate of closure start a turn to intercept the desired course e Maintain heading to track the desired course If the navigational instruments show an off course condition turn as necessary toward the course to reintercept If navigational instruments do not indicate movement toward the course within a reasonable time increase the intercept angle When reintercepting the course turn to
285. ion malfunction 3 Respond to emergency malfunction as briefed ensuring compliance with M A L E format brief and the appropriate immediate action procedures outlined in the aircraft operator s manual checklist CL DESCRIPTION 1 Task 4200 and 4202 will be conducted in a compatible flight simulator only a During the conduct of these maneuvers the ME will induce a malfunction or critical situation in order to evaluate the MTP s response b The MTP will respond to emergency malfunction as briefed 2 Task 4220 4228 4236 and 4254 can be conducted in either a compatible flight simulator or the aircraft a When conducting these maneuvers in a compatible flight simulator the ME may actually induce an emergency critical situation associated with the check or the flight profile in order to evaluate the MTP s response b When conducting the maneuver in the aircraft the ME must verbally induce an emergency critical situation associated with the check or the flight profile in order to evaluate the MTP s response c In either situation the MTP will respond to emergency malfunction as briefed Note When verbally inducing an emergency critical situation the intent of the procedure is for the ME to assess the MTP s response by correctly performing the pre briefed steps associated with the M A L E format brief At no time will the actual E P be performed while in flight except verbally Publication Date TC 3 04 33 5 5 FINAL
286. ion requirements if the Publication Date TC 3 04 33 2 5 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 2 2 5 2 6 crewmember s proficiency is in question throughout the ATP year The crewmember is responsible for maintaining proficiency in each task on the task list in the modes specified 2 The minimum iteration requirement for all performance tasks is one iteration in each mode or condition of flight listed in tables 2 4 through 2 6 and those tasks from table 2 7 designated by the commander on the crewmember s DA Form 7120 1 R DA Form 7120 2 R Additional iterations should be added based on individual crewmember proficiency 3 The minimum iteration requirement for all technical tasks is one iteration in any mode or condition Additional iterations should be added based on individual crewmember proficiency 4 MPs MEs will perform a minimum of four iterations of maintenance test pilot tasks 4000 series annually MEs will perform two iterations from each crew station with access to the flight controls annually d Hood weather requirements All aviators will complete hood or weather requirements as determined by the commander This requirement may be completed in the aircraft or simulator TASK LISTS Tables 2 4 through 2 8 list base and mission tasks a Base tasks Tables 2 4 through 2 6 list the required performance and technical base tasks for RCMs and NCMs for RL progression An
287. ions for those additional tasks These tasks will be assigned 3000 series numbers Note When developing 3000 series tasks the commander may only expand but not substitute or change the standards for 2000 series tasks published in this manual b Task title The task title identifies a clearly defined and measurable activity Titles may be the same in several ATMs but tasks may be written differently for the specific airframe c Conditions The conditions specify the common conditions under which the task will be performed Reference will be made to a particular helicopter within a design series when necessary References to the H 60FS in the conditions do not apply to NCM conditions must be met before task iterations can be credited Normally conditions are specified for wartime missions of the aircraft 2 Common conditions are a In a mission aircraft with mission equipment and crew items required by AR 95 1 and publications b Under visual meteorological conditions VMC or instrument meteorological conditions Day night employment 4 In any terrain or climate e CBRN including MOPP equipment employment f Electromagnetic environmental effects Common training evaluation conditions are a When a UT IP SP IE or ME is required for the training of the task then that individual will be at one set of the flight controls while the training is performed Evaluators trainers
288. ircraft operating limits c The nonrated crewmember NCM will maintain airspace surveillance during the VMC portion of the maneuver During simulated IMC the P and NCM will focus primarily outside the aircraft to provide adequate warning of traffic or obstacles They will announce when their attention is focused inside the aircraft and again when attention is reestablished outside 2 Procedures a On the runway or takeoff pad align the aircraft with the desired takeoff heading Set the attitude indicator for takeoff wings level on the horizon Initiate the takeoff by increasing the collective smoothly and steadily until takeoff power is reached Set power as required to accelerate to the desired climb airspeed and maintain the desired climb rate Adjust the pitch attitude 3 to 5 degrees below the horizon to establish the initial accelerative climb attitude Visually maintain takeoff clearance and alignment on takeoff and transition to the flight instruments before entering IMC Maintain the heading course required by the departure procedure or air traffic control ATC instructions When the desired climb airspeed is reached adjust cyclic to maintain airspeed and adjust collective to maintain the desired climb rate Note The takeoff may be initiated from the ground or a hover b An ITO may be accomplished at a hover by pressing the go around button on the cyclic or FD DCP The pilot on the controls must closely monitor the primary f
289. ired position Using the white light will impair night vision for several minutes Therefore exercise added caution if resuming flight before reaching full dark adaptation CONFINED AREA CONSIDERATIONS Determine a suitable axis and path for a go around For multiaircraft operations determine the number of aircraft that the area can accommodate safely SNOW SAND DUST CONSIDERATIONS Devaluate surface conditions for the likelihood of encountering a whiteout brownout Determine a suitable axis and path for a go around MOUNTAIN PINNACLE RIDGELINE CONSIDERATIONS When practical position the aircraft on the windward side of the area evaluate suitability paying particular attention to PA and winds Determine a suitable axis and escape route for a go around Operations at high altitudes are more likely to expose the crews to visual detection radar or heat seeking weapons TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training Training may be conducted in the aircraft or simulator 2 Evaluation Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft REFERENCES Appropriate common references 4 64 TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 TASK 1058 Perform Visual Meteorological Conditions Approach CONDITIONS In an H 60 helicopter given visual meteorological conditions VMC conditions with the landing area reconnaissance complete STANDARDS Appropriate common standards
290. is required Offset direction Maneuver in a specified direction with reference to a target Outside Primary focus of attention is outside the aircraft Command to place the P radio transmit selector switch to a designated position will be followed by radio position numbers on the intercommunication panels 1 2 3 Tells the other crewmember to place a frequency in a specific radio Put me up Release Command for the planned or expected release of an external load Remington No ordnance remaining except gun or self protect ammunition Report Command to notify Roger Message received and understood Say again Repeat your transmission Intentional horizontal movement of an aircraft perpendicular to its heading will Slide be followed by the word right or left Slow down Command to reduce ground speed Speed up Command to increase ground speed 1 A S Weapons impact 2 surface to surface Informative call to observer or spotter five seconds prior Splash to estimated time of impact 3 air to air A A Target destroyed Stand by Wait duties of a higher priority are being performed and request cannot be 6 6 TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Aircrew Coordination Table 6 1 Examples of standard words and phrases Standard word or phrase Meaning of standard word or phrase complied with at this tim
291. is required to be evaluated 1 Instrument flight evaluation the listed evaluation S Standardization flight evaluation NG NVG annual NVG PFE Task Task Title Day Inst Night NVG Eval 1000 Participate in a Crew Mission Briefing X S 1004 Plan a Visual Flight Rules Flight X S 1006 Planan Instrument Flight Rules Flight X 1001 Administer Flight Evaluation X S orl 1003 Conduct Flight Instruction X Sorl 1010 Prepare a Performance Planning Card X S I 1011 Determine Dynamic Inflight Performance X S 1012 Verify Aircraft Weight and Balance X S 1013 Operate Mission Planning System X S 1014 Operate Aviation Life Support Equipment X S 1016 j Perform Internal Load Operations X S 1020 Prepare Aircraft for Mission X S 1022 Perform Preflight Inspection X S 1024 Falli through Before Leaving X S NG 1025 Operate Integrated Vehicle Monitoring System X S 1026 Maintain Airspace Surveillance x x x 5 1028 Perform Hover Power Check X S I NG 1032 Perform Radio Communication Procedures X S I 1034 Perform Ground Taxi X X X S 1038 Perform Hovering Flight X X X S NG 1040 Perform Visual Meteorological Conditions Takeoff X X X S NG 1044 Navigate By Pilotage And Dead Reckoning X X X S 1046 Perform Electronically Aided Navigation X S NG 1048 Perform Fuel Management Procedures X 5 1 NG 1052 Meteorological Conditions Flight X X X S NG 1054 Select Landing Zone Pickup Zone Holding Area X 1058 Perfor
292. itoring of performance e What are the lessons learned 1 Each crewmember states in own words 2 Are changes necessary to a Crew coordination techniques b Flying techniques c SOP d Doctrine ATM TMs 3 Determine effect of segment actions and interactions on the overall mission a Each crewmember states in own words b Lessons learned 1 Individual level 2 Crew level 3 Unit level 4 Advise operations chain of command of significant lessons learned Publication Date TC 3 04 33 4 109 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 TASK 2010 Perform Multiaircraft Operations CONDITIONS In An H 60 Helicopter STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 Rated crewmember RCM a Participate in a formation flight briefing in accordance with unit SOP b Maneuver into the flight formation c Change position in the flight formation when required d Maintain proper horizontal and vertical separation for the type of formation flight being conducted e Announce if visual contact is lost with other aircraft f Perform techniques of movement if required 2 Nonrated crewmember a Assume a position in the helicopter as briefed to observe other aircraft in the formation b Announce if visual contact is lost with other aircraft DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a The pilot on the controls P will foc
293. ity it may be necessary to transition to instruments for most of the takeoff Note Hover out of ground effect OGE power may be required for this task NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLE NVG CONSIDERATIONS At night and during periods of reduced visibility fly instruments or cross check the flight instruments while in the holding pattern The P will advise when he has the lineup line in sight The P will transition outside and make flight control adjustments as necessary to lineup on final and to remain aligned with the lineup line The P will continue to assist by monitoring the flight instruments calling out airspeed and calling out altitude as necessary To assist during low levels of illumination the AN AVS 7 ANVIS HUD hover symbology can aid in maintaining position and hover altitude for night vision goggle NVG operations Proper scanning techniques are necessary to detect aircraft drift and to avoid spatial disorientation 4 162 TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 OVERWATER CONSIDERATIONS Overwater flight at any altitude is characterized by a lack of visual cues and therefore has the potential of causing visual illusions Be alert to any unannounced changes in the flight profile and be prepared to take immediate corrective actions The radar altimeter select low bug should be set to assist in altitude control Hazards to terrain flight such as harbor light
294. just for ETF Enter the bottom of the CRUISE chart at the ETF for engine 1 and follow the slant of the line to the intersection of the planned CRUISE IAS SINGLE ENGINE item 30 2 Step 2 Read straight down do not follow the slant of the line to the TORQUE PER ENGINE a line and double the value Record MAX TORQUE AVAILABLE SINGLE ENGINE 3 Step 3 Repeat Steps 1 2 for the other engine if the ETFs differ Note 1 The maximum torque available 30 MIN for the T700 engine can also be derived from the CL when ETF values are between 1 0 and 0 9 utilize ETF instead of ATF and interpolate as required Note 2 Adjust the maximum torque available as required for planned use of engine bleed air accessories anti ice cockpit cabin heaters AMOGS OBOGS etc according to the operator s manual q Item 32 CRUISE TORQUE CONT TORQUE AVAILABLE SINGLE ENGINE Use the appropriate CRUISE chart to compute the cruise torque and the continuous torque available as described below 1 Clean and high drag configuration a Step 1 Enter the CRUISE chart at the selected cruise IAS in item 30 above Move left or right as appropriate to the GW 1 000 LB at the AIRCRAFT GWT item 3 departure data b Step 2 Move straight down do not follow slant of line to the TORQUE PER ENGINE and double the value Record the CRUISE TORQUE SINGLE ENGINE c Step 3 Enter the CRUISE chart at the selected IAS in item 30 above Move left or right as a
295. keletal vascular and nerve injury by both overzealous application and the patient s resistance to the restraints Publication Date TC 3 04 33 4 181 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 c Additional Enemy Prisoner of War EPW restraint Be aware of local protocols and requirements rules of engagement detainee operations when using restraints from confinement units or when EPW s are received from units that have field expedient restraints placed on them Ensure they do not interfere with medical treatment 3 In flight care a Continue treatment and monitoring of all patients b Relay patient information and ETA using correct radio procedures c Comply with instructions from medical control and advise them of any pertinent changes in patient s 4 Unloading aircraft a Upon landing direct escort ambulatory patients away from the aircraft b Unload litter patients as required c Give appropriate documentation and patient information to the receiving medical authorities TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training Training may be conducted in the aircraft or academically 2 Evaluation Evaluation of medical requirements must be completed by a 68W FI SI or other qualified medical personnel REFERENCES Appropriate common references medical equipment manufacturer s instructions Medical equipment checklist FM 4 02 2 JP 4 02 and STP 8 91W15 SM TG 4 182 TC 3 04 33 P
296. l conditions 4 Determine approximate wind direction and velocity at touchdown point and identify other pertinent wind characteristics in proximity to landing zone LZ 5 Assess the LZ size axis surface conditions and obstacles 6 Plan ingress and egress routes to include escape routes required above and below effective translational lift ETL 7 Confirm the winds and tentative plan formulated in the high reconnaissance by performing a thorough low reconnaissance DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a The crew will confirm the location of plotted hazards and call out location of unplotted hazards b On approaching the landing area the crew will identify the LZ and determine its suitability for landing and takeoff c For power critical landings The pilot on the controls P will establish a high reconnaissance pattern appropriate for the terrain and wind Using tabular data or other in flight dynamic updates such as EDM with IPAC or H 60M with FMS software the pilot not on the controls P will determine whether out of ground effect OGE capability exists and the maximum power available The P P will assess the wind in and around the LZ using as necessary wind terrain analysis visible indications and cockpit indications The P P will determine suitable ingress and egress routes and select the landing point The routing should reflect power available wind conditions and escape options available for an aircraft at maximum gross
297. l immediately establish perimeter defense as briefed The site layout and FARE system setup will be according to TC 3 04 111 FM3 04 113 and unit SOP Note Task 1016 contains procedures that may be used in performing this task NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLE NVG CONSIDERATIONS Certain lighting configurations can look like an inverted Y Lighting configuration of the H 60s should be briefed to all aircrews prior to conducting operations Publication Date TC 3 04 33 4 167 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training Training will be conducted in the aircraft 2 Evaluation Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft REFERENCES Appropriate common references 4 168 TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 TASK 2076 Perform Caving Ladder Operations WARNING Ensure that the SPIES master and crew chief wear safety harnesses secured to tie down rings anytime cabin doors are open WARNING Ensure aircraft is clear of water throughout the maneuver to ensure clearance and stabilator does not contact water CONDITIONS In an H 60 helicopter with caving ladder equipment installed STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 Rated a Conduct a thorough crew briefing b During extraction maintain altitude o
298. lateral or vertical and are most effective when combined such as changing direction and altitude simultaneously Jinking is used to disrupt deny the enemy a weapon s firing solution by moving the aircraft away from the predicted point of impact intercept Properly executed jinking maximizes errors in the enemy weapon system s firing solution by forcing the gunner to correct for azimuth range altitude and changing velocity constantly and simultaneously This maneuver incorporates a change in direction with a optional climb or descent every several seconds Jinks should be random in direction so as not to become predictive The jinking maneuver is a positive but not a violent maneuver Jinking will be ineffective if the helicopter does not displace over the ground and cause the enemy to shift his or her aiming point Therefore excessively tight turns should normally be avoided as they result in the helicopter failing to displace out of the enemy s weapon s field of view 4 124 TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 Note Prolonged jinking may dissipate the aircraft s kinetic energy and my make the aircraft an easier target 2 Countering barrage fire If engaged by accurate barrage fire depart the area of fire as quickly as possible via the most direct path Since barrage fire is being aimed into a box turn only to avoid areas of concentrated fire
299. lements of the IFR flight planning b The other RCM will complete the assigned elements and report the results to the PC 2 Procedures Using appropriate military Federal Aviation Administration FAA or host nation weather facilities obtain information about the weather Compare destination forecast and approach minimums and determine whether an alternate airfield is required Ensure that the flight can be completed per AR 95 1 Check the NOTAMs and other appropriate sources for any restrictions that apply to the flight Obtain navigation charts that cover the entire flight area and allow for changes in routing or destination that may be required because of the weather Select the route s or course s and altitude s that will best accomplish the mission When possible select preferred routing Determine the magnetic heading ground speed and ETE for each leg to include flight to the alternate airfield if required Compute the total distance and flight time Calculate the required fuel using a CPU 26A P computer Weems plotter or equivalent or approved mission planning software Complete the appropriate flight plan and file it with the appropriate agency TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training Training will be conducted academically 2 Evaluation Evaluation will be conducted academically REFERENCES Appropriate common references Publication Date TC 3 04 33 4 11 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60
300. lerative attitude that keeps the tail clear of all obstacles Consider variations in the terrain and obstacles when determining tail clearance Apply aft cyclic as required to slow to the desired airspeed or to a full stop while adjusting the collective to maintain the tail clear of obstacles Maintain heading and make all control movements smoothly If the aircraft attitude is changed excessively or abruptly it may be difficult to return the aircraft to a level attitude and over controlling may result Note Hover out of ground effect OGE power may be required for this task NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLE NVG CONSIDERATIONS Because of the limited field of view of the NVG avoid making abrupt changes in aircraft attitude An extreme nose high attitude limits the forward field of view and may cause disorientation Maintain proper scanning techniques to ensure obstacle avoidance and tail rotor clearance TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training Training may be conducted in the aircraft or simulator 2 Evaluation Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft REFERENCES Appropriate common references 4 122 TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 TASK 2040 Perform Evasive Maneuvers CONDITIONS In a helicopter or appropriate simulator in a simulated tactical environment familiar with classified evasive tactics techniques and procedures TTP and all
301. lication Date TC 3 04 33 4 185 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 WARNING Excessive bank angles may not be sustainable with only the application of power Airspeed kinetic energy or altitude potential energy may also not be available to trade for lift These factors must be evaluated before and during the maneuver Do not allow high sink rates to develop as recovery altitude or power may not be available to recover These conditions are aggravated as helicopter gross weight and density altitude increase e Dive dive recovery This maneuver is used at altitudes above terrain flight to rapidly mask from a threat by placing the aircraft in a dive This maneuver can be employed when necessary to break contact with enemy fire while using suppressive fire A straight ahead dive is rarely tactically feasible and the maneuver usually incorporates a turn The pilots must be aware of the tendency for RPM R to build in turns with high rates of descent 1 To dive the aircraft as a result of potential enemy contact apply forward cyclic to obtain the desired dive angle Adjust the collective to as necessary to facilitate a rapid descent and maintain the aircraft in trim 2 If the aircraft has been observed by enemy threat it may be necessary to turn an angle of approximately 30 to 45 degrees to evade while minimizing the profile of the aircraft and orienting crew served weapons for suppres
302. light before reaching full dark adaptation NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLE NVG CONSIDERATIONS ROLLING TAKEOFF 1 If sufficient illumination or NVD resolution does not exist a rolling takeoff should not be performed 2 Reduced visual references during the takeoff and throughout the ascent at night may make it difficult to maintain the desired ground track Knowledge of the surface wind direction and velocity will assist in establishing the crab angle required to maintain the desired ground track 3 The landing light or searchlight is recommended at night to view obstacles and maintain awareness of the rotor tip path plane Ensure ground clearance with the searchlight or landing light as the helicopter lifts off the ground SNOW SAND DUST CONSIDERATIONS As the aircraft leaves the surface maintain heading with the pedals and a level attitude with the cyclic as the aircraft clears the snow sand dust cloud and clears the barriers accelerate to climb airspeed and trim the aircraft Note In some cases applying collective to blow away loose snow sand dust from around the aircraft is beneficial before performing this maneuver Note Be prepared to transition to instruments and execute an instrument takeoff ITO if ground reference is lost Note At night use of the landing search or anti collision lights may cause spatial disorientation while in blowing snow sand dust SNOW SAND DUST CONSIDERATIONS ROLLING TAKEOFF This task may be u
303. light display PFD to ensure aircraft is conducting the climb correctly and be prepared to assist the aircraft if necessary TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training Training may be conducted in the aircraft or simulator 2 Evaluation Evaluation may be conducted in the aircraft or simulator REFERENCES Appropriate common references 4 90 TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 TASK 1174 Perform Holding Procedures CONDITIONS In an H 60 helicopter in instrument meteorological condition IMC or simulated IMC and given holding instructions and appropriate Department of Defense flight information publication DOD FLIP STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 Tune and identify the appropriate navigational aids NAVAIDs 2 Enter the holding pattern 3 Time and track holding pattern legs 4 Send the appropriate report to air traffic control ATC per DOD FLIP DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a Before arrival at the holding fix the pilot in command PC will analyze the holding instructions and determine the holding pattern and proper entry procedures The PC will brief the other crewmembers on the proposed entry outbound heading and inbound course The PC may delegate this task to another rated crewmember RCM b The pilot not on the controls P will select radio frequencies and monitor radio
304. ll crewmembers are familiar with paradrop safety actions emergency procedures and communication procedures b The PC will verify the aircraft is rigged properly The pilot on the controls P will remain focused primarily outside the aircraft throughout the maneuver Publication Date TC 3 04 33 4 157 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 c The pilot not on the controls P and nonrated crewmember NCM will assist in clearing the aircraft and will provide adequate warning of obstacles and traffic d The P will ensure that the jumpmaster or NCM retrieves the static lines as soon as the last parachutist has cleared the aircraft e The NCM or the jumpmaster will acknowledge all communications from the P and P The NCM will inform the P or P when all parachutists have exited the aircraft report status of parachutes and when the deployment bags have been recovered 2 Procedures Maintain altitude airspeed and ground track as determined during premission planning and jumpmaster s instructions Perform in flight procedures per FM 3 05 211 and FM 3 21 220 a The crew will conduct the paradrop per the procedures covered in the briefing and the references listed below The PC will check that the jumpmaster or NCM retrieves the static lines as soon as the last parachutist has cleared the aircraft b The NCM will announce JUMPERS AWAY upon the first jumper leaving the aircr
305. lot to proceed at an optimum airspeed altitude minimize downwash effect conserve fuel and expedite movement from one point to another d Hovering turns Apply pressure to the desired pedal to begin the turn Use pressure and counter pressure on the pedals to maintain the desired rate of turn Coordinate cyclic control to maintain position over the pivot point while maintaining altitude with the collective Hovering turns can be made around any vertical axis for example the nose mast tail of the aircraft or a point in front of the aircraft However turns other than about the center of the aircraft will increase the turn radius proportionately eM Coupled hovering turns Change aircraft heading by adjusting the collective trim beeper Publication Date TC 3 04 33 4 47 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 Note Cyclic turns should only be used when necessary Note When landing from a hover to an unimproved area the crew must check for obstacles under the aircraft Note The P should closely monitor the collective during coupled hover operations near the ground NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLE NVG CONSIDERATIONS 1 Movement over areas of limited contrast such as tall grass water or desert tends to cause spatial disorientation Seek hover areas that provide adequate contrast and use proper scanning techniques If disorientation occurs apply sufficient power and execute an in
306. lue provides a method to verify the aircraft weight is at or below maximum weight and is capable of lifting to an IGE or OGE altitude The hover altitude is normally 10 feet but may be adjusted based on conditions GO is computed using the departure PA item 1 and temperature item 2 TC 3 04 33 4 15 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 Note For sling load operations select an altitude that will place the load at an altitude of 10 feet Note MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE GWT OGE IGE was determined in item 9 using maximum PA and temperature When the actual temperature is less than the maximum the torque required to hover at a given gross weight is less During the hover power check exceeding the GO NO GO torque value prior to the WHEEL HEIGHT FT used during planning indicates the aircraft is heavier than the MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE GWT OGE IGE as applicable when maximum PA and FAT conditions are encountered Note If MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE GWT item 9 was limited by the maximum gross weight per the operator s manual chapter 5 exceeding this torque value prior to the WHEEL HEIGHT FT used during planning indicates the aircraft is above the maximum structural weight limit k Item 11 MAX HOVER HEIGHT IGE Maximum hover height when aircraft gross weight exceeds max allowable gross weight OGE and power is not available for an OGE hover Note If the blade erosion kit and or externally mounted MEDEVAC equipment is installed
307. ly make a radio call to the formation The P will adjust to an altitude that will afford visual acquisition above or below the briefed cruise altitude and attempt reorientation with the formation 2 Cruise Immediately make a radio call to the formation Lead will announce heading altitude and airspeed The formation should avoid any abrupt or drastic changes in the flight path until all aircraft have rejoined the flight The aircraft that has lost visual contact with the flight will immediately assume the flight s heading and airspeed and maintain horizontal separation as 4 110 TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 briefed If enemy and terrain allow the aircraft that has lost visual contact will also maintain vertical separation by adjusting to an altitude other than the briefed en route altitude which will afford visual acquisition of the flight Unit SOPs must state the procedures for reestablishing contact with the flight Considerations should include but are not limited to rallying to a known point use of covert overt lighting and ground rally Mission enemy terrain and weather troops and support available time available civil considerations METT TC power available and ambient light will influence how contact is reestablished Situations may occur when an aircraft rejoins the flight in a position other than briefed Only after the entire flight is f
308. m Visual Meteorological Conditions Approach X X X S NG 1062 Perform Slope Operations X X X S NG 1064 Perform A Roll On Landing X X X S NG 1068 Perform Go Around X X X S 1070 Respond To Emergencies X X X X S NG 1082 Perform Autorotation X X X S 1142 Perform Digital Communications X 1155 Negotiate Wire Obstacles X 1162 Perform Emergency Egress X S n Date TC 3 04 33 2 7 Publicatio FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 2 Table 2 4 Rated crewmember base task list Legend Day Day mode of flight Inst Instrument mode of flight Night Night unaided mode of flight NVG NVG mode of flight Eyal Maneuver listed is required to be evaluated Instrument flight evaluation the listed evaluation Standardization flight evaluation NG NVG annual NVG PFE Task Task Title Day nst Night NVG Eval 1166 Perform Instrument Maneuvers X 1167 Perform Flight Maneuvers Using Standby Flight X Sor Instrument System H 60m 1168 Perform Command Instrument System Procedures A L X Sorl 1169 Perform Flight Director Operations H 60M X S 1170 Perform Instrument Takeoff X 1174 Perform Holding Procedures X 1176 Perform Nonprecision Approach X 1178 Perform Precision Approach X 1180 Perform Emergency Global Positioning System X Recovery Procedure 1182 Perform Unusual Attitude Recovery X X X X Sorl 1184 Inadvertent Instrument Meteorological X X X S
309. man will move to his or her left which is to the right of the aircraft and lie face down on the ground The signalman will remain in place and lie face down on the ground Note Control switches will not be moved without verbal announcement first If the crewmember pendant is used the crewmember must be trained according to the unit standing operating procedure SOP Note Sling extenders or reach pendants will be used to ensure load clearance when transporting the following M119 105 forward firing position any built up high mobility multipurpose wheeled vehicle HMMWV Avenger ambulance shelter and so forth or any other equipment that requires additional clearance Note Self hookup operations are authorized provided planning briefing and training has been done according to the unit SOP Self hookup is used to support gun raids forward arming and refueling point FARPs and so forth when support personnel are not available The type of load as well as the size and height must be considered before attempting a self hookup Some loads are more prone to entangle the sling straps than others A shepherd s hook Q Tip or similar device may be used by the NCM to grab the clevis Hands and arms will not be used to grab the clevis 3 The following standard words and phrases are some examples of terminology used for sling load operations e Hook is armed Load is hooked Load under t
310. manual as appropriate Phase 4 Debriefing Upon completing the evaluation the evaluator will 1 Discuss the examinee s strengths and weaknesses 2 Offer recommendations for improvement 3 Tell the examinee whether he she passed or failed the evaluation and discuss any tasks not performed to standards 4 Complete the applicable forms and ensure that the examinee reviews and initials the appropriate forms Note The evaluator will inform the examinee of any restrictions limitations or revocations the evaluator will recommend to the commander following an unsatisfactory evaluation HANDS ON PERFORMANCE EVALUATIONS Standardization Flight Evaluation This evaluation is an examination of flight tasks and procedures conducted in each series group in which a rated crewmember is required to perform duties Nonrated crewmembers may complete annual standardization requirements in any H 60 series helicopter in which qualified The flight evaluation will consist of the tasks marked with an 5 in the Eval column of tables 2 4 through 2 6 and those tasks designated by the commander in table 2 7 except as stated in paragraph d below Publication Date TC 3 04 33 3 7 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 3 b Instrument Flight Evaluation This evaluation is an examination of flight tasks and procedures conducted in each aircraft category in which a RCM is required to perform duties The e
311. ment of the Army civilians DACs 9 hours of NVG flight of which a minimum of 6 hours must be flown at night in the aircraft from a crew station with access to the flight controls while using NVG The other 3 hours may be flown in the H 60FS 2 Nonrated crewmember Crewmembers who are authorized to perform duties in the back of the aircraft has 24 hours 12 hours USAR and ARNG in the aircraft while performing crew duties and complying with AR 600 106 and DOD 7000 15 or RL 1 NCMs 5 hours at night while performing crew duties and wearing NVG a Door Gunners must be integrated into the ATP and qualified per FM 3 04 140 Once qualified and trained they must complete a minimum of one iteration of the tasks listed in table 2 6 Commanders should specify annual evaluation requirements b TIs and maintenance personnel flying for pay must be integrated into the ATP and complete a minimum of one iteration of the tasks listed in table 2 6 Commanders should specify annual evaluation requirements 3 Flight surgeons MO must be integrated into the ATP Semi annual flying minimums are 24 hours for Active Duty and 12 hours for ARNG USAR Annual flying hour minimums are 48 hours for Active Duty 10 hours night 24 hours 5 hours night for ARNG USAR IAW AR 600 105 b Annual simulation device flying hour requirements All RCMs will complete simulator requirements listed below 1 All active and reserve RCMs within 200 statute miles SMs
312. mically 2 Evaluation Evaluation will be conducted academically REFERENCES Appropriate common references and the appropriate ALSE technical manuals Publication Date TC 3 04 33 4 31 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 TASK 1016 Perform Internal Load Operations CONDITIONS In an H 60 helicopter loaded with passengers cargo STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 Rated a Perform or ensure that a thorough passenger briefing has been conducted and that a passenger manifest is on file according to AR 95 1 Conduct the passenger briefing per the appropriate aircraft operator s manual checklist CL and unit standing operating procedure SOP b Ensure that the passengers cargo is restrained c Ensure that floor loading limits are not exceeded 2 Nonrated a Perform a thorough passenger briefing and ensure that a passenger manifest is on file according to AR 95 1 Conduct the passenger briefing per the appropriate aircraft operator s manual CL and unit SOP b Load the aircraft per the load plan if applicable c Ensure that floor loading limits are not exceeded d Secure passengers cargo according to the appropriate aircraft operator s manual DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a The pilot in command PC will formulate a load plan ensure that a DD Form 365 4 Weight and Balance Clearance Form F Tactical Transport is veri
313. mly visible objects may be easier to detect using peripheral vision but may tend to disappear when viewed directly Off center viewing techniques are used to locate and orient on objects 3 NVD Using NVDs degrades distance estimation and depth perception Aircraft in flight may appear closer than they actually are due to the amplification of navigation lights and the lack of background objects to assist in distance estimation and depth perception Weapons flash may temporarily impair or shut down NVG g Training and evaluation requirements Training and evaluation requirements define whether the task will be trained evaluated in the aircraft simulator or academic environment Listing aircraft simulator under the evaluation requirements does not preclude the evaluator from evaluating elements of the task academically to determine depth of understanding or planning processes Some task procedures allow multiple ways to achieve the standards Chapter 2 provides the modes and conditions of flight in which the task must be evaluated tables 2 4 through 2 7 pages 2 7 to 2 10 The commander may also select mission and additional tasks for evaluation h References The references listed are sources of information relating to that particular task Certain references apply to many tasks In addition to the references listed with each task the following common references apply as indicated 1 All flight tasks tasks with APU engines operating a
314. my Model HH 60 A Helicopter HH 60L Helicopter 30 June 2010 TM 1 1520 280 10 Operator s Manual for Helicopters Utility Tactical Transport UH 60M NSN 1520 01 492 6324 EIC RSP HH 60M 1520 01 515 4615 EIC RSQ 14 August 2009 TM 1 1520 280 MTF Maintenance Test Flight Manual Helicopter Utility Tactical Transport UH 60M NSN 1520 01 492 6324 EIC RSP HH 60M NSN 1520 01 515 4615 14 August 2009 TM 1 1680 377 13 amp P Interactive Electronic Technical Manual IETM for Air Warrior 15 December 2009 TM 1 6625 724 13 amp P Operator s Aviation Unit and Intermediate Maintenance Manual Including Repair Parts and Special Tools List for Test Set Aviation Vibration Analyzer AVA with Version 7 01 PN 29313107 NSN 6625 01 282 3746 07 March 2002 TM 9 1095 206 12 amp P Operator s and Aviation Unit Maintenance Manual Including Repair Parts and Special Tools List for Dispenser General Purpose Aircraft M130 PN 9311430 NSN 1095 01 036 6886 18 July 1995 TM 11 5855 263 10 Operator s Manual for Aviator s Night Vision Imaging System ANVIS AN AVS 6 V 1 NSN 5855 01 138 4749 EIC IPR AN AVS 6 V 2 5855 01 136 4748 EIC IPQ AN AVS6 V 1A 5855 01 439 1745 EIC IPW TO 12S10 2AVS6 1 01 February 2004 TM 11 5855 300 10 Operator s Manual for Heads Up Display AN AVS 7 NSN 5855 01 350 0349 EIC N A Heads Up Display AN AVS 7 V 5855 01 424 2284 EIC N A Heads Up Display AN AVS 7 V 2 5855 01 424 2285 EIC N A H
315. n 3 Visual Sighting of a friendly aircraft ground position Opposite of BLIND Weapons hot cold off Weapon switches are in the ARMED SAFE or OFF position Wilco have received your message understand and will comply Winchester No ordnance remaining Increase decrease the sensor s focal length ZOOM IN OUT is normally followed by ONE TWO THREE or FOUR to indicate the number of fields of view FOVs to change Note It is recommended only one change in or out at a time be used for the FOV Zoom In Out Publication Date TC 3 04 33 6 7 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 _33 UH60 FAD 20120522 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Appendix A Aircraft Series Qualification 1 ADDITIONAL AIRCRAFT SERIES QUALIFICATION Additional aircraft series qualifications will be done according to an approved USAACE POI TSP and this ATM A qualified SP IP SI or FI will conduct all qualifications An entry will be made on the DA Form 7122 R upon the completion of the training At the crewmember s next closeout the qualification will be documented in Part V remarks section of the DA Form 759 A 2 MISSION IDENTIFIERS Mission identifiers such as MH UH HH and VH are mission identifiers Aviators are considered trained when selected mission tasks have been evaluated by an SP IP SI FI A 3 60 DIFFERENCES TRAINING Prior to flight R
316. n and proper sequencing and timing of actions by the crewmembers TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training Training will be conducted academically 2 Evaluation Evaluation will be conducted academically REFERENCES Appropriate common references FM 3 04 300 and DA Form 5484 4 6 TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 Table 4 1 Suggested format of a crew mission briefing checklist Crew Mission Briefing Checklist 1 Mission overview a Flight Routes b Weather departure enroute destination and void times c Highest risk associated with mission 2 Required items mission equipment and personnel 3 Analysis of the aircraft a Logbook and preflight deficiencies b Performance planning 1 Comparison of computed ETF ATF with logbook 2 Recomputation of PPC if necessary 3 Max torque available and GO NO GO data 4 Single engine capability MIN MAX IAS b Emergency SE IAS Airspeed to maintain between SE MIN MAX IAS based on the mission and briefed for purposes of crew coordination c Mission deviations based on aircraft analysis 4 Crew actions duties and responsibilities a Aircrew coordination two challenge rule terminology b Transfer of flight controls P c Airspace surveillance procedures d Brief emergency actions 1 Mission considerations 2 Inadvertent IMC 3 Egress procedures and
317. n position neutralize the flight controls and apply brakes as necessary to ensure no forward movement Note When landing in deep snow the aircraft wheels skis may settle at different rates and the aircraft will normally terminate in a tail low attitude Note During sand dust landings all doors and windows should be closed and vent blowers turned off Note Hovering OGE reduces available ground references and may increase the possibility of spatial disorientation Be prepared to transition to instruments and execute an instrument takeoff if ground reference is lost Note At night using the landing search or anti collision light may cause spatial disorientation while in blowing snow sand dust CONFINED AREA CONSIDERATIONS An approach to the forward one third of the useable landing area will reduce the approach angle and minimize power requirements Before beginning the approach the crew will determine and brief an escape route in case a go around is necessary During the approach continue to determine the suitability of the area and the possible need for a go around If possible make the decision to go around before descending below the barriers or going below effective translational lift ETL After touchdown check aircraft stability as the collective is lowered MOUNTAIN PINNACLE RIDGELINE CONSIDERATIONS Select a shallow to steep approach angle depending on the wind density altitude gross weight and obstacles Before beginni
318. n the mission and phase of the operation Different phases of the mission may require different actions For example actions enroute to an objective may require forces to bypass and report while actions at the objective may require destroying all enemy within the fire distribution plan Situations not covered in the mission brief should consider generic actions as outlined in 3 90 a Deploy to cover and report b Maintain contact and develop the situation c Recommend or execute a COA NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION DEVICE NVD CONSIDERATIONS Threat elements will be harder to detect Crewmembers must maintain situational awareness TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training may be conducted in the aircraft or a suitable simulator 4 128 TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 2 Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft REFERENCES Appropriate common references FM 5 0 and FM 3 90 Publication Date TC 3 04 33 4 129 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 TASK 2048 Perform Sling Load Operations WARNING When performing this task with cabin doors open ensure that personnel in the cabin area are wearing safety harnesses secured to tie down rings or are seated in seats with seat belts on CAUTION A static electricity discharge wand will be used according to FM 4 20 197 CONDIT
319. n torque limit During normal aircraft operations the aircraft operator s manual chapter 5 torque limitations shall not be exceeded Note Adjust CONTINUOUS TORQUE for planned use of engine bleed air accessories anti ice cockpit cabin heaters AMOGS OBOGS according to the operator s manual Alternative or external load configuration Note If the new torque value exceeds the dual engine transmission torque limit the planned cruise airspeed must be reduced Note The adjusted cruise torque reflects the power required to overcome the added drag g Item 22 CRUISE FUEL FLOW DUAL ENGINE Note Adjust as required for FAT and or planned use of engine bleed air accessories anti ice cockpit cabin heaters AMOGS OBOGS according to the operator s manual h Item 23 MAX RANGE IAS TORQUE DUAL ENGINE Airspeed which yields the maximum distance per pound of fuel for a specific configuration weight and altitude The airspeed is derived from the cruise chart for a no wind condition 4 18 TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 Note A method of adjusting the maximum range airspeed to reduce flight time and minimize loss in range is to increase IAS by 2 5 knots for every 10 knots of effective headwind and decrease IAS by 2 5 knots for every 10 knots of effective tailwind i Item 24 MAX ENDURANCE IAS TORQUE DUAL ENGINE This IAS and torque yields the min
320. nal area of expertise a dominant topic during the evaluation 3 All participants must completely understand the purpose of the evaluation 4 Cooperation by all participants is necessary to accomplish the evaluation objectives The emphasis is on all participants not just on the examinee 5 The evaluation must produce specific findings to identify training needs Any crewmember affected by the evaluation needs to know what is being performed correctly and incorrectly and how improvements can be made b The evaluation will determine the examinee s ability to perform essential tasks to prescribed standards Flight evaluations will also determine the examinee s ability to exercise crew coordination in completing these tasks c The guidelines for evaluating crew coordination are based on an analysis of how effectively a crew performs together to accomplish a series of tasks The evaluator must determine how effectively the examinee employs aircrew coordination as outlined in chapter 6 of this ATM d In all phases of the evaluation the evaluator is expected to perform as an effective crewmember However at some point during the evaluation circumstances may prevent the evaluator from performing as an effective crewmember In such cases a realistic meaningful and planned method should be developed to pass this task back to the examinee effectively In all other situations the evaluator must perform as outlined in the task descrip
321. nalyzing the tactical situation the wind the long axis of the takeoff area and the lowest obstacles and will confirm that required power is available by comparing the information from the performance planning card PPC to the hover power check and or dynamic performance update if applicable b After assessing the landing zone LZ wind and obstacles the pilot on the controls P will select the type of takeoff level acceleration constant angle vertical or rolling take off The P will then determine the ETL point for the takeoff selected and establish an abort plan Note In having to determine the ETL point the P is forced to accurately consider the effects of control inputs wind and surface considerations In considering a nap of the earth NOE deceleration as part of the abort plan the P must consider the amount of power and tail rotor authority available for the abort and the amount of airspeed at the time of the abort 4 50 TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 Note For training any under or over estimation of the point must be explained in the post task analysis following the takeoff maneuver The amount of power determined necessary for the maneuver would also be the hypothetical limit for establishing the takeoff escape plan Power used beyond that determined necessary would have to be explained in the takeoff post task analysis Note W
322. nance test flight manuals chapter 5 of this ATM and applicable aircraft operator s manual Topics in this subject area are for MEs and MPs only 12 e Engine start e Instrument indications e Electrical system e Auxiliary power unit APU system Power plant e Engine performance check Power train e Hydraulic system and leak detection isolation e Flight controls e Vibrations e Fuel system e AFCS system e Communication and navigation equipment e Maintenance operational check maintenance test flight MOC MTF requirements e Warning systems indications MTF weather requirements Evaluator trainer topics FAA H 8083 9A Aviation Instructor s Handbook Topics in this subject area are e The learning process e Human behavior e Effective communication TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Evaluation 3 5 C a e The teaching process e Teaching methods e The instructor as a critic e Types of evaluations e Instructional aids e Planning instructional activity e Techniques of flight instruction e Flight instructor characteristics and responsibilities Phase 3 Flight evaluation If this phase is required the following procedures apply 1 Briefing The evaluator will explain the flight evaluation procedure and brief the examinee on which tasks will be evaluated When evaluating an evaluator trainer the evaluator m
323. nates that define the routes for entry into the Doppler global positioning system GPS and approved mission planning software Consider such items as hazards checkpoints observation posts and friendly and enemy positions Review contingency procedures Note Evaluate weather impact on the mission Considerations should include aircraft performance and limitations NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLE NVG CONSIDERATIONS More detailed flight planning is required when the flight is conducted in reduced visibility at night or in the night vision goggle NVG environment NVG navigation with standard maps can be difficult because of map colors symbology and colored markers used during map preparation 4 112 TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training Training will be conducted academically 2 Evaluation Evaluation will be conducted academically REFERENCES Appropriate common references Publication Date TC 3 04 33 4 113 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 TASK 2014 Perform Electronic Countermeasures Electronic Counter Countermeasures Procedures CONDITIONS In an H 60 helicopter and given a signal operating instructions SOI STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 Test and operate aircraft avionics and voice sec
324. nd maintain team relationships Establish a positive working relationship that allows the crew to communicate openly freely and effectively in order to operate in a concerted manner where a climate of professional assistance is easily found and promptly provided b Establish and maintain efficient workloads Manage and coordinate priorities and execute the mission workload in an effective and efficient manner with the redistribution of task responsibilities as the mission situation changes Flight duty responsibilities are performed in a timely manner where mission needs are always anticipated c Exchange mission information Establish all levels of crew and mission communications using effective patterns and techniques that allow for the flow of essential data and mission advisories among all crewmembers in a timely and accurate manner d Cross monitor performance Cross monitor each other s actions and decisions to ensure workloads and crew actions are performed in a coordinated manner and to standard Cross monitoring crewmember performance keeps a crew ready to provide aircraft and mission advisories to each other and helps to reduce the likelihood of errors affecting mission performance and safety 6 4 STANDARD CREW TERMINOLOGY To enhance communication and aircrew coordination crews should use words or phrases that are understood by all participants They must use clear concise terms that can be easily understood and complied with in an e
325. nd modify the mission as briefed Note NVG tube failure is infrequent and usually provides ample warning Only occasionally will a tube fail completely in a short time Rarely will both tubes fail at the same time There is no remedy for in flight tube failure TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training Training may be conducted in the aircraft or simulator 2 Evaluation Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft only REFERENCES Appropriate common references and TM 11 5855 263 10 Publication Date TC 3 04 33 4 173 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 TASK 2086 Operate Aviator Night Vision Imaging System Heads Up Display CONDITION In an H 60 helicopter with aviator s night vision imaging system heads up display ANVIS HUD installed STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 Describe and demonstrate correct terminology and usage according to AN AVS 7 Operator s Manual 2 Program the ANVIS HUD as desired for mission requirements DESCRIPTION Perform operational procedures for the AN AVS 7 These include assembly preparation for use operating procedures and equipment shutdown Note The HUD display is considered supplemental to the NVG Therefore one RCM may fly with the HUD and the other without TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training Training may be conducted in the aircraft or simulator 2 Evalua
326. nd navigation radios and transponder as required The P will be prepared to call out the procedure to the P if asked and be in a position to assume control of the aircraft and land the aircraft if VMC is encountered 4 The NCM will position himself on the P side of the aircraft for obstruction clearance and airspace surveillance The NCM alerts the crew immediately if VMC is encountered NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLE NVG CONSIDERATIONS The P should be in a position to assume control of the aircraft when a landing environment can be determined visually aided unaided During night unaided flight consider using the searchlight to identify the landing area TRAINING CONSIDERATIONS This task will ONLY be performed under VMC or simulated IMC in a training environment Note The IAF IF FAF and MAP should be programmed into the navigation system as an additional route for the mission 4 96 TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 Note It is not necessary to hold after a missed approach The PC may elect to return to the IF at the MSA and attempt to complete the approach after coordinating with air traffic control ATC or with other aircraft using the approach procedure Note Inadvertent IMC multiship operations must be thoroughly briefed in the mission brief as a minimum on the following topics individual aircraft holding altitudes separation when individual
327. nd taxiing under the wires Note The crew must maintain proper scanning techniques to ensure obstacle avoidance and aircraft clearance NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLE NVG CONSIDERATIONS Wires are difficult to detect at night and with night vision goggles NVG Flying under wires should not be performed at night or while using NVG unless the location has been checked during daylight conditions and all hazards have been identified TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training Training may be conducted in the aircraft or simulator 2 Evaluation Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft REFERENCES Appropriate common references Publication Date TC 3 04 33 4 81 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 TASK 1162 Perform Emergency Egress WARNING Removing an injured crewmember or passenger may increase the severity of the injuries Analyze the risk of additional injury versus the risk of leaving the crewmember or passenger in the aircraft until assistance arrives CONDITIONS In an H 60 helicopter STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 Perform or describe using emergency exits on the aircraft per the appropriate aircraft operator s manual 2 Perform or describe the emergency egress of a pilot nonrated crewmember NCM or passenger from his or her seat 3 Perform or describe the emergency engine shutdown of the aircr
328. ne inoperative OEI MAX TORQUE AVAILABLE is based on TGT NG or fuel flow limiting Note Certain temperature and PA combinations will exceed the aircraft operator s manual chapter 5 torque limitations This item represents actual maximum torque available values During normal aircraft operations the aircraft operator s manual chapter 5 torque limitations shall not be exceeded Note Adjust the maximum torque available as required for planned use of engine bleed air accessories anti ice cockpit cabin heaters AMOGS OBOGS according to the operator s manual 1 Item 9 MAX ALLOWABLE GWT OGE IGE This is the maximum weight the aircraft is capable of at a 10 foot hover height for in ground effect IGE operations or to a 100 foot hover for out of ground effect OGE operations This weight will be limited by engine capabilities or aircraft structural design Note If OGE capability does not exist the MAX HOVER HEIGHT IGE item 11 must be computed Note If the blade erosion kit and or externally mounted MEDEVAC equipment is installed adjust the maximum allowable GWT according to the aircraft operator s manual If the blade erosion kit is installed adjust the maximum allowable GWT according to the aircraft operator s manual Note Tab data values represent a 100 foot hover height OGE and 10 foot hover height IGE Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 0 Item 10 GO NO GO TORQUE This va
329. ned in writing Those tasks designated as performance tasks are listed in bold type in tables 2 4 through 2 7 2 Technical tasks These tasks measure the crewmembers ability to plan preflight brief run up or operate specific onboard systems sensors or avionics in flight or on the ground These tasks are not significantly affected by the condition and mode of flight therefore may be performed or evaluated in any condition and or mode Tasks designated as technical tasks are listed in plain type in tables 2 4 through 2 7 pages 2 7 to 2 12 e Evaluation guidelines 1 Evaluations APART evaluation tasks are those that are identified with an S or T in the evaluation column of tables 2 4 through 2 6 page 2 10 Annual NVG evaluation tasks are those tasks identified with an in the evaluation column of tables 2 4 through 2 6 Tasks evaluated at night or while using NVD will suffice for tasks required in day conditions 2 Night evaluation tasks must be evaluated in that mode if designated on DA Form 7120 1 R DA Form 7120 2 R by the commander TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Training Table 2 4 Rated crewmember base task list Legend Day Day mode of flight Inst Instrument mode of flight Night Night unaided mode of flight NVG NVG mode of flight Eyal Maneuver listed
330. ner evaluator in an H 60 helicopter UH 60FS with an SP IP IE SI ME UT and a training scenario given by the trainer evaluator to the evaluatee STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 Determine appropriate training plan 2 Conduct academic training as necessary 3 Conduct flight training utilizing fundamentals of instruction 4 Conduct review and critique 5 Determine appropriate entries to be made in the individual aircrew training folder IATF DESCRIPTION 1 The trainer will brief the trainee on the training to be conducted The trainer will conduct academic training as necessary 2 Once the training is completed the trainer will conduct a debrief on the maneuvers procedures trained The trainer will determine the appropriate entries to be made in the trainees IATF TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS l Training Training will be conducted in the aircraft or simulator 2 Evaluation Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft or simulator REFERENCES Appropriate common references Publication Date TC 3 04 33 4 9 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 TASK 1004 Plan a Visual Flight Rules Flight CONDITIONS Before visual flight rules flight in an H 60 helicopter given access to weather information notices to airmen NOTAMS flight planning aids necessary charts forms and publications STANDARDS Appropriate c
331. ng axis obstacles 2 Power Requirements a Max TQ Hover TQ b Tab data OGE weight c A C weight 0 fuel wt fuel d Difference e Percent TQ f Max TQ Verbalize g Hover TQ Verbalize 3 Wind a Assessment of the direction and velocity of the wind by cockpit indicators visual indicators GPS last known or forecast wind or flight maneuvers b Analysis of terrain trees buildings and their effects upon wind creating updrafts downdrafts headwinds tailwinds crosswinds and demarcation lines from a large scale down to the touchdown point 4 Route a In Out Escape Wind should dictate route in out and escape b In calm wind use the route that affords the best escape 5 Low Reconnaissance Verify wind escape and touchdown point 6 Approach Takeoff Predicted expended actual Publication Date TC 3 04 33 4 63 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLE NVG CONSIDERATIONS 1 Unimproved and unlit areas are more difficult to evaluate at night because of low contrast Knowledge of the various methods for determining the height of obstacles is critical to successfully completing this task Visual obstacles such as shadows should be treated the same as physical obstacles 2 When performing operations during unaided night flight ensure that the searchlight or landing light white light is in the des
332. ng the approach the crew will determine and brief an escape route in case a go around is necessary During the approach continue to determine the suitability of the intended landing point The rate of closure may be difficult to determine until the aircraft is close to the landing area Reduce airspeed to slightly above ETL until the rate of closure can be determined Before reaching the near edge of the landing area the descent should be stopped and the rate of closure slowed At this point decide whether to continue the approach or make a go around If a go around is required it should be performed before decelerating below ETL If the approach is continued terminate in the landing area to a hover or to the surface After touching down check aircraft stability as the collective is lowered Note To successfully operate into small areas the P may have to place the nose of the aircraft over the edge of the landing area This may cause a loss of important visual references when on the final approach All crewmembers must assist in providing information on aircraft position in the landing area Publication Date TC 3 04 33 4 67 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 MUD MUSKEG TUNDRA CONSIDERATIONS Select a suitable area and terminate the approach to a 10 foot hover over the intended touchdown point Begin a vertical descent until the aircraft touches down Check aircraft stability while lowering
333. ning academic training will be conducted according to current United States Army Aviation Warfighting Center training support package USAACE CE qualification written examination e Operator s manual written examination b Flight training The CE will be required to demonstrate proficiency in all performance based tasks listed in the DAY and NIGHT column with an X in chapter 2 table 2 5 and demonstrate crew coordination and airspace surveillance proficiency in all other tasks listed in the DAY and NIGHT column of chapter 2 table 2 4 Technical tasks listed in chapter 2 table 2 4 and table 2 5 will be completed regardless of flight mode Flight training consists of 10 flight hours This must consist of at least 1 hour of night unaided flight time The evaluation may be a continual evaluation The commander may reduce the total flight time to no less than 6 0 hours based on a recommendation from the standardization instructor pilot SP instructor pilot IP standardization instructor SI or nonrated crewmember instructor FI concerning the crewmember s proficiency This recommendation will be annotated in the remarks section of the crewmembers DA Form 7122 R If the commander has selected chemical biological radiological nuclear CBRN requirements as part of the unit s mission essential task list all tasks with an X marked under the CBRN column will also be trained evaluated as required SECTION Il FLI
334. nsure that the automatic release is disconnected before descent is initiated For an in flight emergency if altitude cannot be maintained notify the jumpmaster immediately so automatic rip cord releases can be disconnected Ensure that static lines remain secured to the anchor point until they are recovered or the aircraft has landed If recovery of static lines is impossible execute landing with forward speed to avoid entangling deployment bags in the rotor system CAUTION The HF radio will be set to silent mode during paradrop operations If static lines become entangled on the HF antenna the NCM or jumpmaster will maintain tension on the lines until landing is accomplished CONDITIONS In an H 60 helicopter with a jumpmaster STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 Rated a Conduct a thorough crew and passenger safety briefing b Maintain briefed airspeed not to exceed a maximum airspeed of 90 knots indicated airspeed KIAS during jumper deployment or as briefed by the jumpmaster c Maintain appropriate ground track over the drop zone 2 Nonrated Ensure that the aircraft is prepared for paradrop operations per the appropriate aircraft operator s manual FM 3 05 211 FM 3 21 220 and the unit standing operating procedure SOP DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a The pilot in command PC conducts or directs a crewmember to conduct a crew and jumpmaster briefing and ensures a
335. nt at Emergency Medical Technician Basic Intermediate or 4 181 Task 2122 Perform Advanced Cardiac Life 4 183 Task 2127 Perform Combat Maneuvering Flight sene 4 184 Task 2169 Perform Aerial Observation sss 4 188 Task 4000 Perform Prior to Maintenance Test Flight 5 4 Task 4001 Respond to Critical Situations During Test Flight Maneuvers 5 5 Task 4081 Perform Before Starting Engine Checks sse 5 7 Task 4088 Perform Starting Engine 5 9 Task 4090 Perform Engine Run Up And Systems 5 10 Task 4118 Perform Integrated Vehicle Health Monitoring System Operations H BOM 5 11 Task 4156 Perform hover checks ssssssssssssssee eene eene ener 5 12 Task 4193 Perform In Flight Checks ssssssssssesseeneneeeennen nnne 5 13 Task 4200 Perform Backup Tail Rotor Servo Check ssssssssseee 5 14 Task 4202 Perform Generator Under Frequency Protection Disable Low Rotor Revolutions Per Minute Checks 5 15 Task 4204 Pe
336. nt to a masked condition if the aircraft is detected or fired upon Be aware of a common tendency to move forward or rearward while vertically unmasking and remasking Establish reference points to assist in maintaining position during ascents and descents Keep aircraft exposure time to a minimum 4 120 TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 c Unmasking at a hover laterally Sometimes the aircraft may be unmasked by moving laterally from the mask Announce intent to hover the aircraft sideward to provide the smallest silhouette possible to enemy observation or fire The crew will acknowledge that they are prepared to execute the maneuver Keep aircraft exposure time to a minimum Note Hover out of ground effect OGE power may be required for this task NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLE NVG CONSIDERATIONS When hovering above 25 feet the P may have difficulty in maintaining altitude and position Use the radar altimeter to assist in maintaining altitude Use references such as lights tops of trees or manmade objects above and to the sides of the aircraft By establishing a reference angle to these objects the P can detect altitude changes when his or her perspective to these objects changes Ground objects fences trails roads provide excellent references for detecting lateral drift Proper scanning techniques must be used The P may become spatially disorient
337. ntended termination point i To the surface Proceed as for an approach to a hover except determine an approach angle that allows obstacle clearance while descending to the desired point of touchdown The decision to terminate to the surface with zero speed or with forward movement will depend on the aircraft s loading or environmental conditions j Touchdown with minimum lateral movement After surface contact ensure that the aircraft remains stable until all movement stops Smoothly lower the collective to the full down position and neutralize the pedals and cyclic Apply brakes if required Note If wind conditions may be a factor a wind evaluation should be performed Techniques for evaluating wind conditions are found in FM 3 04 203 Note Steep approaches can place the aircraft in potential settling with power conditions Note Performing this maneuver in certain environments may require hover out of ground effect OGE power Evaluate each situation for power required versus power available NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLE NVG CONSIDERATIONS 1 Altitude apparent ground speed and rate of closure are difficult to estimate at night The rate of descent during the final 100 feet should be slightly less than during the day to avoid abrupt attitude changes at low altitudes After establishing the descent during unaided flights airspeed may be reduced to approximately 50 knots until apparent ground speed and rate of closure appear to b
338. ntrols c The P will assist in monitoring the aircraft instruments The P will call out attitude torque and trim as necessary d During visual meteorological conditions VMC the P and nonrated crewmember NCM will focus primarily outside the aircraft to provide adequate warning of traffic or obstacles They will announce when their attention is focused inside the aircraft and again when attention is reestablished outside 2 Procedures To recover from an unusual attitude correct the pitch and roll attitude adjust power trim the aircraft as required to return to level flight All components are changed simultaneously with little lead of one over the other The displacement of controls used in recoveries may be greater than those for normal flight Care must be taken in making adjustments as straight and level flight is approached The instruments must be observed closely to avoid over controlling EM Coupled recovery from an unusual attitude may be accomplished by pressing in on the cyclic trim beeper Z axis The P must closely monitor the primary flight display PFD for correct aircraft response NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLE CONSIDERATIONS Instrument meteorological conditions IMC is not a prerequisite for an unusual attitude Low level ambient light may induce visual illusions and spatial disorientation During night vision goggle NVG operations video noise may contribute to loss of visual cues SNOW
339. nual and the unit SOP and assist with the refueling operation Ensure that the tanks are filled to the required level When the refueling is completed ensure that all caps are secured and remove the ground connection c The crewmember outside will inform the pilot in command PC when the refueling is completed Assist passengers in boarding the aircraft and in securing their seat belts Assist the P and P in clearing the aircraft during the departure from the refueling area Make the appropriate entries on DA Form 2408 12 NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLE NVG CONSIDERATIONS Supplement aircraft lighting at the refueling station by using an explosion proof flashlight with an unfiltered lens to check for leaks and fuel venting and for signaling as necessary TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training Training will be conducted in the aircraft 2 Evaluation Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft REFERENCES Appropriate common references DA Pam 738 751 FM 10 67 1 and FM 21 60 4 104 TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 TASK 1253 Operate Flight Management System Central Display Unit CONDITION In an H 60 helicopter STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and load configure and utilize mission information as necessary to complete assigned mission DESCRIPTION Crew actions 1 The pilot on the controls P will focus primaril
340. nvironment full of distractions Multiple terms with the same meaning should be avoided Department of Defense DOD flight information publication FLIP contains standard terminology for radio communications Operator s manuals contain standard terminology for items of equipment Table 6 1 page 6 5 is a list of other standard words and phrases that crewmembers may use 6 4 TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Aircrew Coordination Table 6 1 Examples of standard words and phrases Standard word or phrase Meaning of standard word or phrase Abort Terminate a preplanned aircraft maneuver Affirmative Yes Bandit An identified enemy aircraft Bingo Fuel state needed for recovery Blind No visual contact of friendly aircraft ground position Opposite of VISUAL Immediate action command to perform an emergency maneuver to deviate from Break the present ground track will be followed by the word right left up or down Command by the pilot on the controls for a specified procedure to be read from the checklist by the other crewmember Call out Cease fire Command to stop firing but continue to track No obstacles present to impede aircraft movement along the intended ground track Will be preceded by the word nose tail or aircraft and followed by the direction for example left right
341. ny maintenance test pilot MP tasks 1 Academic training The crewmember will receive training and demonstrate a working knowledge of the subject areas in paragraph 3 4b that apply 2 Flight training The MP ME will receive training and demonstrate proficiency in the tasks in table 2 8 2 4 CONTINUATION TRAINING REQUIREMENTS The RCM aircraft and simulation device flying hour requirements apply only to RCMs whose primary aircraft is an H 60 series helicopter Hours task iterations flown in similar series aircraft may be credited toward semiannual flying hour requirements unless directed otherwise by the commander For RCMs whose additional alternate aircraft is H 60 series helicopter commanders will establish continuation training requirements according to TC 3 04 11 a Semiannual aircraft flying hour requirements The minimum requirements are as follows 2 4 TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Training 1 Rated crewmember a FAC 1 48 hours from the pilot s or copilot s seat b FAC 2 30 hours from the pilot s or copilot s seat Note IPs SPs IEs MEs and unit trainers UTs may credit those hours they fly while performing assigned duties at any crew station designated on DA Form 7120 R during the day and night unaided toward their semiannual flying hour requirement c FAC 3 no aircraft flying hour requirements d NVG RL 1 and Depart
342. o the ARMED position The P or NCM will release the load d The P and NCM will assist in clearing the aircraft and will provide adequate warning of obstacles f The NCM will remain primarily focused on the load He will guide the P during the load pickup advise of the load condition in flight and direct the P when setting down the load 2 Procedures a Hookup and hover Set cargo hook control switches per the appropriate aircraft operator s manual Follow hand and arm signals from the signalman and commands from the NCM to hover over the load Remain vertically clear of and centered over the load When the load is hooked up remove slack from the sling and ascend vertically to a load height of 10 feet AGL Ensure aircraft limitations are not exceeded b Takeoff Establish a constant angle of climb that will permit safe obstacle clearance When above 100 feet AGL or when clear of obstacles adjust attitude and power as required to establish the desired rate of climb and airspeed Smoothly adjust flight controls to prevent load oscillation After passing above 300 feet AGL place the cargo hook arming switch to the SAFE position Note Ensure that the cargo hook arming switch is in the ARMED position when operating at altitudes below 300 feet above highest obstacle AHO c En route Maintain the desired altitude flight path and airspeed Make smooth control applications to prevent load oscillation If a lateral load oscillation occ
343. of 5 to 10 feet above the landing surface Higher altitudes make it difficult to maintain good visual references NCM will call MAINS OVER TAIL OVER and CLEAR DOWN during this phase and keep the LSE in sight Stop all aircraft movement over the center of the deck and ensure the main landing gear is within the landing circle or as directed by the LSE for landing Note The deck landing area may have a perimeter safety net perimeter markings and red lights outlining the landing area Two white lineup lines form an X through the landing area These lines contain white lights which are only visible when the aircraft is aligned on the approach path Around the center of the X is a white circle with centered amber light The landing gear will normally be in the forward portion of this circle but landing will be as directed by the LSE controller Most ships have floodlights to illuminate the landing area for unaided operations but the lights can be turned down or off for night vision goggle NVG operations LHA s have different markings Refer to NAVAIR 00 80T 106 LHA LHD NATOPS manual Note The LSE will assist during the last part of the approach with hand and arm signals c Hovering Maintain a hover until the LSE gives the signal to set the aircraft down Follow the LSE s signal to move left right aft or forward Control drift using the ship s superstructure and the horizon if visible for attitude reference while hove
344. of a compatible synthetic flight training system SFTS device will complete the following number of hours in the SFTS a FAC 1 18 hours annually b FAC 2 12 hours annually 2 RCMs outside of 200 SM Commanders should set up SFTS programs when it is cost effective and feasible 3 ARNG RCMs refer to NGR 95 1 4 FAC 3 10 hours semiannually regardless of distance from a SFTS device This is authorized to be prorated per TC 3 04 11 5 RCMs may apply 12 hours of H 60FS time in a compatible flight simulator 2B38 2B60 toward their semiannual aircraft flying hour minimums 6 Only time flown in an H 60 series helicopter accredited SFTS devices 2B38 2B60 will be credited toward flying hour or simulation requirements 7 Commanders should consider increasing annual SFTS requirements when training other than instrument training is conducted in the SFTS for example ASE training CEFS HUD c Annual task and iteration requirements The minimum task and iteration requirements are as follows 1 DA Form 7120 1 R DA Form 7120 2 R in the crewmember s individual aircrew training folder specifies the tasks and modes conditions that the crewmember must perform Task iteration requirements will be according to TC 3 04 11 except as stated below The commander may require the crewmember to perform additional iterations of specific tasks based on crewmember proficiency The commander should consider increasing task iterat
345. of ground effect OGE power may be required for this task Note Terrain flight is considered sustained flight below 200 feet above ground level AGL except during takeoff and landing 4 118 TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLE NVG CONSIDERATIONS 1 Wires are difficult to detect with the night vision goggle 2 Use proper scanning techniques to ensure obstacle avoidance 3 During NVG terrain flight observe the NVG speed and altitude restrictions in TC 3 04 11 OVERWATER CONSIDERATIONS Overwater flight at any altitude is characterized by a lack of visual cues and therefore has the potential of causing visual illusions Be alert to any unannounced changes in the flight profile and be prepared to take immediate corrective actions The radar altimeter low bug should be set to assist in altitude control Hazards to terrain flight such as harbor lights buoys wires and birds must also be considered during overwater flight These considerations may also apply to flight over desert or broad expanses of snow especially under low ambient lighting TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training Training may be conducted in the aircraft or simulator 2 Evaluation Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft REFERENCES Appropriate common references FM 21 26 and TC 3 04 11 Publication Date TC 3 04 33 4 119
346. of recovery simultaneous or singular recovery of the patient and MO and a radio communications check should be made between the pilot and MO c General recovery procedures overwater General format is the same as over land except a smoke device may be used to determine wind direction and velocity Terminate the approach at a 100 foot hover 20 feet before reaching the patient Deploy the recovery device and allow it to contact the water before reaching the patient All crewmembers will wear floatation devices Operations become increasingly more hazardous as references are reduced open water versus a small lake or ship versus small boat sea state increases calm to chop to breaking condition with increasing wave height and visibility decreases horizon becomes same color as water water spray or rain on windshield sunny midday versus twilight Note The NCM will advise the P when the person equipment is in position on the jungle penetrator The NCM will perform hoist operations using the standard words and phrases according to the unit SOP The NCM will secure jungle penetrator or stokes litter upon completion of the hoisting operation Should difficulty in maintaining a stable hover occur the NCM will extend additional cable as slack to preclude inadvertent jerking the cable NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLE NVG CONSIDERATIONS 1 Use proper scanning techniques to avoid spatial disorientation 2 For unaided night flight the land
347. ommon standards and the following additions modifications 1 Determine whether the aircrew and aircraft are capable of completing the assigned mission 2 Determine whether the flight can be performed under visual flight rules VFR per AR 95 1 applicable Federal Aviation Regulations FARs host nation regulations local regulations and standing operating procedures SOPs 3 Determine the departure en route and destination procedures 4 Select route s and altitudes that avoid hazardous weather conditions do not exceed aircraft or equipment limitations and conform to VFR cruising altitudes per Department of Defense flight information publication DOD FLIP 5 For cross country flights determine the distance 1 nautical mile true airspeed 5 knots ground speed 5 knots and estimated time en route ETE 1 minute for each leg of the flight Compute magnetic heading s 5 degrees 6 Determine the fuel required per AR 95 1 100 pounds 7 Complete and file the flight plan per AR 95 1 and DOD FLIP 8 Perform mission risk assessment per unit SOP DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a The pilot in command PC may direct the other crewmembers to complete some elements of the VFR flight planning b The other crewmembers will complete the assigned elements and report the results to the PC 2 Procedures Using appropriate military Federal Aviation Administration FAA or host nation weather facilities obtain information about t
348. on the flight director display control panel FD DCP to be depicted on the primary flight display PFD for the approach to be flown 2 The pilot on the controls P will acknowledge and follow navigation directives issued by either the pilot not on the control P or ATC and announce any deviations 3 The P will call out all pertinent or requested approach information and procedures to the P and will advise the P of any unannounced deviations The P will monitor outside for visual contact with the landing environment If the P makes visual contact suitable to complete the landing per AR 95 1 the P will announce such and may if directed by the PC take the controls and complete the landing If visual contact is not made at the missed approach point the P will announce such and call out the missed approach procedures 4 During visual meteorological conditions VMC the P and nonrated crewmember NCM will focus primarily outside the aircraft to provide adequate warning of traffic or obstacles They will announce when their attention is focused inside the aircraft and again when attention is reestablished outside 5 For coupled approach the will configure FD DCP for the selected approach and monitor the PFD for aircraft response Note A Doppler global positioning system GPS that is not certified for instrument flight rules flight will not be used as the primary source of navigation information for operation
349. on the ground CONDITIONS In an H 60 helicopter STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 Operate the installed forward looking infrared FLIR per the appropriate aircraft operator s manual 2 Use the multifunction display MFD or installed display to view FLIR picture 3 Select menu for operating FLIR 4 Select and use the appropriate field of view FOV polarity gain and pointing control on the FLIR system 5 Select the caution advisory screen or pop up window for run up or current mission profile 6 Interpret data between the MFD display and central display unit CDU DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a During run up the pilot on the controls P and pilot not on the controls P will ensure all procedures per the appropriate aircraft operator s manual are followed to ensure no damage occurs to the FLIR turret b The P will focus primarily outside the aircraft and respond to navigation cues given by the P The P flies the mission profiles at the appropriate airspeeds altitudes and headings as directed by the P c The P selects desired FLIR menu items to view outside the aircraft d The P monitors all mission equipment and uses the FLIR and MFD e The FLIR is stowed and shut down per the appropriate aircraft operator s manual 2 Procedures Perform the turn on test the procedures and select operational modes per the appropriate technical manual Select the polari
350. onitored by the P c The P will adjust avionics to required frequencies The P will copy pertinent information and announce information not monitored by the P d During normal operations the NCM will monitor external communications so as not to interrupt when external communications are being transmitted or received Monitoring external communications may not be desirable during operations requiring extensive internal communication for example sling loads hoist rappelling or emergencies e Certain operations may require that the NCM transmit on an aircraft radio for example medical evacuation MEDEVAC The NCM will coordinate with the PC before using aircraft radios f Crew actions for two way radio failure 1 P or P will announce two way radio failure to all crewmembers 2 The PC will direct the efforts to identify and correct the avionics malfunction 3 The P will focus outside the aircraft visual meteorological conditions VMC or inside instrument meteorological condition IMC on the instruments as appropriate but should not participate in troubleshooting the malfunction 4 The P will remain focused primarily inside the aircraft to identify and correct the avionics malfunction 2 Procedures a Adjust avionics to the required frequencies Continuously monitor the avionics as directed by the PC When required establish communications with the desired facility Monitor the frequency before transmitting Transmit the
351. onmental conditions are the same as those selected in the tabular data The P will thoroughly brief the maneuver and crew duties including those duties required if an escape plan is executed Note This is a training maneuver unto itself and should not be rushed or performed haphazardly Small errors or omissions may result in incorrect power calculations The pilots must anticipate the aircraft s limits and their own limits At no time in power management training will pilots knowingly attempt to execute landing or takeoffs at less than actual torque values e The pilot on the controls P will remain focused primarily outside the aircraft throughout the maneuver for aircraft control and obstacle avoidance The P will announce his or her intent to deviate from the maneuver f The pilot not on the controls P and nonrated crewmember NCM will assist in LZ reconnaissance and clearing the aircraft They will provide adequate warning of obstacles and will acknowledge the P s intent to deviate from the maneuver 2 Procedures Gather map or photo data on potential LZ s or conduct an in flight suitability check when map or photo data is unreliable Determine the suitability by evaluating size long axis barriers surface conditions tactical situation and effects of the wind Select a flight path altitude and airspeed that afford the best observation of the landing area as required Determine an approach desired touchdown point and departu
352. ons associated with Volcano Volcano qualification will consist of the following training a Academic training Crewmembers will receive training and demonstrate a working knowledge of the topics in table B 4 Table B 4 Volcano academic training Volcano Academic Training Hours Volcano introduction and familiarization 2 0 Fault analysis emergency procedures and limitations 1 0 Preflight 1 0 Performance planning drag and weight and balance 2 0 Employment doctrine plan scenario 1 0 Pre installation requirements 0 5 Installation procedures 2 5 Loading and unloading 0 5 Programming the system 1 0 Total Hours 11 5 These apply to RCMs only b Fight Training The crewmember will receive 2 hours of flight training followed by a 1 hour evaluation flight in the aircraft At a minimum the crewmember will perform the tasks listed in table B 5 Table B 5 Volcano flight training Task Task Title 1010 Prepare a Performance Planning Card 1012 Verify Aircraft Weight And Balance 1020 Prepare Aircraft for Mission 1022 Perform Preflight Inspection 1024 Perform Before Starting Engine Through Before Leaving Helicopter Checks 1028 Perform Hover Power Check 1034 Perform Ground Taxi 1038 Perform Hovering Flight 1040 Perform VMC Takeoff 1048 Perform Fuel Management Procedures 1052 Perform VMC Flight Maneuvers 1058 Perform VMC Approach 1062 Perform Slope O
353. ontact air traffic control ATC as required Comply with ATC instructions local regulations and standing operating procedure SOP DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a The pilot on the controls pilot not on the controls P P will announce inadvertent IMC as appropriate b The pilot in command PC will announce the minimum altitude to which the crew will climb and heading if turn required for single and multiship operations as the procedure is initiated c The P will announce when he or she initiates inadvertent IMC procedures The P will announce if he or she is disoriented and unable to recover d The P will monitor the cockpit instruments to assist in recovery set the transponder to emergency make the appropriate radio calls and perform any other crew tasks as directed by the P It may be necessary for the P to take the controls and implement recovery procedures e The nonrated crewmember NCM will focus primarily outside the aircraft to provide adequate warning for avoiding terrain or obstacles The P and NCM will perform any other crew tasks as directed by the PC 2 Procedures If inadvertent IMC are encountered a Immediately adjust the pitch and roll attitude adjust power trim and airspeed as required to ensure obstacle clearance avoidance All components are changed simultaneously with little or no lead time over the other Pressing the go around button on the cyclic grip will couple the flight director to cu
354. or onboard sights sensors systems Generic postures are described below and should be considered during the mission planning process and provide actions in lieu of specific guidance in the OPORDER Mission Briefing 3 All mission roles a Aircrew coordination throughout the actions on contact sequence is of paramount importance Crews should brief and practice actions on contact to ensure efficiency and communication effectiveness In any case the person observing the enemy must communicate to the pilot on the controls P in order for the P to be able to effectively maneuver The aircrew must communicate the threat information to other aircraft in the flight and after the immediate danger is past to the appropriate outside agencies for battlefield situational awareness SA b The first crewmember to realize enemy contact will announce the nature and direction of the threat by the most immediate means available using standard SAFIRE or air attack pro words according to FM 3 54 c The pilot on the controls P will announce the direction of threat to other aircraft and his or her intent The P will remain focused outside the aircraft during the event and should be aware that crewmembers involved in conducting suppressive fire may be unavailable for assisting in obstacle avoidance or noting other threat sources The P is responsible for safe performance of evasive maneuvers and AIRCRAFT CONTROL d The P will be alert for obstacles and ne
355. ormed can the mission commander proceed with the mission unless a contingency has been briefed 3 Approach Immediately make a radio call to the formation and execute a go around unless an alternate course of action has been briefed d All multi aircraft operations will be briefed using a unit approved multi aircraft mission briefing checklist Mandatory briefing items that must be included in all multi aircraft briefings are e Formation types e Altitude s Airspeed s Aircraft lighting e Lead change procedures e Lost communication procedures e Loss of visual contact procedures Actions on contact e Inadvertent IMC procedures e Downed aircraft personnel recovery procedures NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLE NVG CONSIDERATIONS 1 Closure rates are more difficult to determine Consideration should be given to keeping formation changes to a minimum All crewmembers must avoid fixation by using proper scanning techniques Consider the use of aircraft external lighting to aid in the visual acquisition of other aircraft during loss of visual contact 2 Night During unaided night flight the crew should use formation and position lights to aid in maintaining the aircraft s position in the formation 3 NVG When conducting NVG formation flight the crew should use the infrared IR formation lights to maintain the aircraft s position in the formation Note Additional crewmember requirements are in TC 3 04 11
356. ote Although the HH is a mission identifier and would normally only require mission task training the H 60A L has a different Operators manual and Checklist TM 1 1520 253 10 and therefore requires differences training in addition to mission task training a Academic training RCM The RCM will receive training and demonstrate a working knowledge of the topics listed below The appropriate operator s manual is the reference for the following academic RCM training topics H 60A L e H 60L academics if not previously H 60L in accordance with 1 e Mission medical interior cabin systems e H 60A L avionics systems e Computer based trainer b Academic training NCM The NCM will receive training and demonstrate a working knowledge of the topics listed below The appropriate aircraft operator s manual is the reference for the following NCM academic training topics H 60A L M e Mission medical interior cabin systems e Operating limitations restrictions and capabilities e Emergency procedures c Ground training RCM Prior to flight training in a H 60A L the RCM will receive static ground training in the aircraft performing tasks 1253 Operate flight management system central display unit and Task 1254 Operate multifunction display d Flight training RCM The RCM will receive 1 hour of flight training in the aircraft As a minimum the RCM will perform the tasks listed in table A 3 Table A 3 Rated crewmember flight tasks fo
357. ow when performance planning and the hover power check indicates that out of ground effect OGE power is not available e Task 2048 Perform Sling Load Operations Task 2052 Perform Water Bucket Operations Task 2054 Perform Fast Rope Insertion and Extraction System Operations Task 2056 Perform Rappelling Operations Task 2058 Perform Special Patrol Infiltration Exfiltration System Operations Task 2060 Perform Rescue Hoist Operations Task 2076 Perform Caving Ladder Operations Standards The standards describe the minimum degree of proficiency to which the task must be done properly and correctly apply to all standards The standards are based on ideal conditions Crew actions specified in paragragh 4 le include satisfactorily performing crew coordination Many standards are common to several tasks Unless otherwise specified in the individual task the common standards below apply 4 2 1 All tasks a Do not exceed aircraft limitations b Perform crew coordination actions per chapter 6 2 Hover a Maintain heading 10 degrees b Maintain altitude 3 feet 5 feet for OGE c Do not allow drift to exceed 3 feet 10 feet for OGE hover d e Maintain a constant rate of movement appropriate for existing conditions wm wa Maintain ground track within 3 feet Note These standards require that the other crewmembers announce drift and altitude changes before exceeding the standar
358. owing additions modifications 1 Preflight all systems to be operated during APU operations 2 Operate APU systems and equipment according to the appropriate aircraft operator s manual checklist CL 3 Shut down systems equipment and APU according to the appropriate aircraft operator s manual CL 4 Enter appropriate information if required on DA Form 2408 12 DA Form 2408 13 and DA Form 2408 13 1 DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a The nonrated crewmember NCM will coordinate with and brief any additional ground support personnel prior to APU start Perform preflight inspection of the APU Ensure that the rotor blade tie downs and mooring chains are removed and that the gust lock is engaged The NCM will brief all concerned personnel on procedures to be followed in the event of an emergency The NCM will direct assistance from any additional ground support personnel to aid in keeping the APU exhaust and stabilator areas clear during the APU start sequence and any subsequent ground checks b Additional ground support personnel should assist the NCM as directed 2 Procedures Brief the additional ground support personnel as necessary Perform preflight inspection of the APU ensuring exhaust plug rotor blade tie downs mooring chains fluid levels APU accumulator pressure is a minimum of 2 800 pounds and backup hydraulic pump has been checked or removed as applicable If an additional cockpit crewmember is available direct t
359. peat steps 1 and 2 Publication Date TC 3 04 33 D 11 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Appendix D 3 Step 3 Record the MAX ALTITUDE MSL DUAL ENGINE and MAX ENDURANCE IAS that will allow flight at the AIRCRAFT GWT item 3 departure data Interpolation between the charts is authorized Note 1 Ensure FAT is adjusted for pressure altitude in the CRUISE charts Note 2 The torque change to compensate for drag alternative or sling load configuration at MAX END IAS is negligible and not computed n Item 29 MIN MAX IAS SINGLE ENGINE Use the appropriate CRUISE chart to compute the minimum maximum indicated airspeeds as described below 1 Clean and high drag configuration a Step 1 Enter the bottom of the CRUISE chart at the SE 30 MIN T700 or SE 2 5 MIN T701 line adjusted to the ETF of the weakest engine but no more than one half of transmission torque limit single engine b Step 2 Follow the slant of the line to the first intersection of the GW 1 000 LB at the AIRCRAFT GWT item 3 departure data then read left or right for minimum IAS KTS Record the MIN IAS SINGLE ENGINE c Step 3 Continue up to the second intersection of the GW 1 000 LB at the AIRCRAFT GWT item 3 departure data then read left or right for maximum IAS Record the MAX IAS SINGLE ENGINE Note If the maximum torque available line is to the left of does not intersect the GW 1 000
360. perations TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training Training will be conducted academically 2 Evaluation Evaluation will be conducted academically REFERENCES Appropriate common references and DD Form 365 4 Publication Date TC 3 04 33 4 29 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 TASK 1013 Operate Mission Planning System CONDITIONS Given approved computer and mission planning software a mission briefing signal operating instructions SOI information weather information navigational maps Department of Defense flight information publication DOD FLIP intelligence data and other materials as required STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications PWN Configure and operate the approved mission planning software Evaluate and enter all pertinent weather data as appropriate Select and enter appropriate primary and alternate routes Select and enter appropriate tactical terrain flight mission planning control features Select and enter appropriate communication data Load mission data to data transfer device if applicable 7 Print out time distance heading cards waypoint lists crew cards communication cards and kneecards as required DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions The pilot in command PC will assign tasks The crew receives the mission briefing Any crewmember may enter d
361. perations 1064 Perform Roll On Landing 1070 Respond to Emergencies 2070 Perform M 139 Volcano Operations Flight Instruction 2 0 Evaluation 1 0 Total Hours 3 0 Task applies to RCMs only Publication Date TC 3 04 33 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 B 3 _33 UH60 FAD 20120522 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Appendix C Nonrated Crewmember Training SECTION I CREW CHIEF TRAINING 1 CE AIRCRAFT QUALIFICATION TRAINING Crew chiefs must complete the aircraft qualification training listed below At the crewmembers next closeout aircraft qualification will be documented in Part V remarks section of the crewmember s DA Form 759 a Academic qualification training The crew chief must receive sufficient instruction to be knowledgeable in all applicable topics of chapter 3 and the following list of academic training subjects The subjects may be completed in any order Commanders will develop a 50 question written examination covering all applicable topics listed in chapter 3 paragraph 3 4b and the following list in addition to the operator s manual examination Crewmembers must pass each examination with a grade of at least 70 percent Training will be documented according to TC 3 04 11 chapter 3 The following academic training will be included in the commander s written examination Aircrew training program introduction e Aircrew coordination trai
362. perator s manual chapter 5 and then read left or right from the respective value for OPTIMUM IAS AT MAX ALLOWABLE GWT SINGLE ENGINE Note If the adjusted torque value does not intersect the GW 1 000 LB at the AIRCRAFT GWT item 3 departure data the aircraft cannot maintain single engine level flight for the conditions As fuel is consumed single engine capability may become possible t Item 35 MAX ALTITUDE MSL MAX ENDURANCE IAS SINGLE ENGINE Use the appropriate CRUISE chart for the single engine MAX ALTITUDE MSL calculation as described below The lowest ETF for your aircraft will be used for this computation Note 1 When the capability to maintain level flight after an engine failure or malfunction is not possible continued flight may be possible by adjusting to MAX END IAS and adjusting collective to the MAXIMUM TORQUE AV AILABLE to attain minimum rate of descent while descending to a lower PA where level flight may be possible or jettisoning the external stores Gf no allowable altitude temperature combination cruise charts yield a GWT greater than or equal to the AIRCRAFT GWT item 3 departure data Note 2 The torque change to compensate for drag alternative or sling load configuration at MAX END IAS is often negligible and not computed 1 Step 1 Enter the appropriate CRUISE chart at the MAX END AND R C line Move left or right along that line until you intercept the GW 1 000 LB at the AIRCRAFT GWT item 3 departur
363. performing flight duties when the wet bulb globe temperature is above 75 degrees Fahrenheit c Commander s may allow both pilots to fly while wearing MOPP IV Publication Date TC 3 04 33 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 _33 UH60 FAD 20120522 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 3 Evaluation This chapter describes evaluation principles and grading considerations It also contains guidelines for conducting academic and hands on testing Evaluations are a primary means of assessing flight standardization and crewmember proficiency Evaluations will be conducted according to AR 95 1 TC 3 04 11 and this ATM 3 1 3 2 EVALUATION PRINCIPLES a The value of any evaluation depends on adherence to fundamental evaluation principles These principles are described below 1 The evaluators must be selected not only for their technical qualifications but also for their demonstrated performance objectivity and ability to observe and to provide constructive comments These evaluators are the SPs IPs IEs MEs SIs and FIs who assist the commander in administering the ATP 2 The evaluation method must be based on uniform and standard objectives In addition it must be consistent with the unit s mission and must strictly adhere to the appropriate SOPs and regulations The evaluator must ensure a complete evaluation is given in all areas and refrain from making a perso
364. pics from the subject areas in paragraphs 3 4b 1 through 5 relative to instrument meteorological condition IMC flight and flight planning If the evaluated crewmember is an IP SP IE the IE will evaluate the ability of the IP SP IE to instruct instrument related tasks 4 APART MP ME evaluation The ME will evaluate a minimum of two topics from the subject areas in paragraphs 3 4b 1 through 4 and 11 with specific emphasis on how they apply to maintenance test flights Additionally evaluate topics in paragraph 3 4b 12 when the examinee is an ME 5 Other ATP evaluations The SP IP SI FI will evaluate a minimum of two topics from each subject area in paragraph 3 4b that apply EVALUATION SEQUENCE The evaluation sequence consists of four phases The evaluator will determine the amount of time devoted to each phase a Phase 1 Introduction In this phase the evaluator 1 Will review the examinee s individual flight records folder IFRF and IATF records if required to verify that the examinee meets all prerequisites for designation and has a current DA Form 4186 Medical Recommendation for Flying Duty 2 Will confirm the purpose of the evaluation explain the evaluation procedure and discuss the evaluation standards and criteria to be used b Phase2 Academic evaluation topics The tasks identified with an asterisk apply to RCMs only 1 Regulations and publications AR 95 1 DA Pam 738 751 Department of Defense fli
365. plete the flight without the planned use of the required reserve 4 58 TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 Note Crews should verify ability to transfer fuel from external to internal tanks before using external tank fuel quantities in fuel reserve burnout computations Note Do not perform fuel consumption checks while transferring fuel from external fuel tank s to internal fuel tanks c Fuel quantity and consumption Periodically monitor the fuel quantity and consumption rate If the fuel quantity or flow indicates a deviation from computed values repeat the fuel consumption check to determine if the amount of fuel is adequate to complete the flight Periodically check individual fuel tank indicators to determine that the system is operating properly Note If an emergency or urgent situation requires placing an ENG FUEL SYS selector to cross feed for example fuel filter bypass caution light recalculate burnout time and reserve entry time based on the usable fuel remaining d Main fuel balance operations Place the ENG FUEL SYS selector of the lowest fuel indicator to crossfeed XFD After the fuel quantities equalize return the selector to direct DIR e Auxiliary fuel management Follow procedures outlined in the appropriate aircraft operator s manual when using the external extended range fuel system When using nonstandard auxiliary fuel system
366. pons Note Crewmembers will not use friendly type graphic control measures icons symbols to mark enemy locations and vice versa to avoid fratricide and other unnecessary confusion 5 Maneuvers a Unguided weapons Unguided weapons such as small arms unguided rockets and tanks require the enemy gunner to predict an intercept point by estimating where the target aircraft will be at the TOF of the projectiles Once fired the rounds cannot be corrected The two basic strategies of defeating unguided weapons are to present the most difficult targeting ballistic solution possible and then to change the enemy s ballistic solution as often as possible The pilot presents the enemy with the most difficult target by maneuvering in three dimensions Unguided weapons are generally employed in three basic methods aimed fire curtain fire and barrage fire each requires a different countermeasure Curtain and barrage fire may not be specifically aimed at an individual aircraft but rather fired into a predicted or suspected air avenue of approach that the enemy believes will be over flown by the aircraft 1 Countering aimed fire When encountering accurate aimed fire the crew should immediately alert the flight break away from the enemy fire by jinking until the aircraft exits the enemy WEZ while suppressing with organic weapons if feasible Jinking is defined as deliberate controlled changes of multiple axes in order to elude Turns can be
367. possible an area with adequate ground contrast and reference points should be used TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training Training will be conducted in the aircraft 2 Evaluation Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft REFERENCES Appropriate common references the rappelling airworthiness release TC 21 24 and USSOCOM 350 6 Publication Date TC 3 04 33 4 149 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 Chapter ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 4 TASK 2058 Perform Special Patrol Infiltration Exfiltration System Operations WARNING Ensure that the SPIES master and crew chief wear safety harnesses secured to tie down rings anytime cabin doors are open CAUTION Ensure that SPIES rope remains secured to the cargo hook until the aircraft has landed If recovery of SPIES rope is impossible execute a roll on landing to avoid entanglement in the rotor system CONDITIONS In an H 60 helicopter with special patrol infiltration exfiltration system SPIES equipment installed STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 Rated a Conduct a crew and passenger safety briefing b In flight maintain a minimum of 100 ft separation between extraction personnel and highest obstacles c Maintain airspeed 5 knots Maximum airspeed with team members attached is 70 knots indicated airspeed KIAS in moderate climates and 50 KIAS in cold climates d During hover
368. ppropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 Rated a Maintain altitude and airspeed appropriate for the selected mode of flight terrain weather visibility and mission enemy terrain and weather troops and support available time available civil considerations METT TC b Maintain aircraft in trim during contour and low level flight and when appropriate for nap of the earth NOE flight 2 Nonrated Maintain constant scan of assigned sector DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a The pilot on the controls P will focus primarily outside the aircraft and acknowledge all navigational and obstacle clearance instructions given by the pilot not on the controls P The P will announce the intended direction of flight or any deviation from instructions given by the P During terrain flight the P is primarily concerned with threat and obstacle avoidance b The P will provide adequate warning to avoid obstacles detected in the flight path or identified on the map The P and nonrated crewmember NCM will assist in clearing the aircraft and provide adequate warning of obstacles unusual attitudes altitude changes or threat The P and NCM will announce when their attention is focused inside the aircraft and again when attention is reestablished outside c During contour flight the P will advise the P whenever an unannounced descent is detected If the descent continues without acknowledgement or corrective a
369. ppropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 Rated a Describe the purpose of installed ASE b Perform describe preflight inspection turn on test operation emergency procedures and shutdown of installed ASE c Employ describe using installed ASE 2 Nonrated a Prepare equipment for operation b Employ describe using installed ASE DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a The pilot in command PC will ensure that crewmembers understand the employment of installed ASE during the conduct of the mission b The PC will also ensure that all ASE payloads and settings are per the mission briefing 2 Procedures Perform or describe preflight inspection turn on test operation emergency procedures and shutdown of installed ASE equipment Evaluate and interpret the ASE visual and aural indications TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training Training may be conducted in the aircraft simulator or academically 2 Evaluation Evaluation may be conducted in the aircraft simulator or academically REFERENCES Appropriate common references AFTTP 3 1 computer based ASE trainer CBAT programs equipment operator s manuals and the unit s S 2 TACOPS officer 4 102 TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 TASK 1190 Perform Hand And Arm Signals CONDITIONS Given a hand and arm signals from FM 21 60 to identify or pe
370. ppropriate to the MCP line and adjust for the ETF of the weakest engine d Step 4 Move straight down do not follow the slant of the line to the TORQUE PER ENGINE to read the CONT TORQUE Record the CONT TORQUE AVAILABLE SINGLE ENGINE Note 1 Compare the cruise torque to the CONT TORQUE AVAILABLE to determine whether the aircraft will be operating in a time limited condition above maximum continuous power for this IAS Note 2 The continuous torque available may exceed the transmission torque limit During normal aircraft operations the aircraft operator s manual chapter 5 torque limitations shall not be exceeded Note 3 Adjust the continuous torque available as required for planned use of engine bleed air accessories anti ice cockpit cabin heaters AMOGS OBOGS etc according to the operator s manual Publication Date TC 3 04 33 D 13 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Appendix D 5 Note 4 For alternative or external load configurations refer to the operator s manual chapter 7 7 section VI DRAG Determine and add together the appropriate drag multiplying factors 2 Alternative or sling load configuration a Step 1 Enter the appropriate cruise chart at the selected single engine cruise IAS in item 30 above then move left or right to the curved dashed line Move up to read the A TRQ FOR DRAG AREA OF 10 SQ FT OF AF b Step 2 Multiply the A
371. procedure 6 Arrive at the minimum descent altitude MDA prior to reaching the MAP 7 Execute a missed approach upon reaching the MAP if a safe landing cannot be done 8 During the missed approach immediately establish a climb using an appropriate rate of climb airspeed until established at the minimum safe altitude MSA DESCRIPTION 1 Before the flight the crew should review the recovery procedure in conjunction with the map to familiarize themselves with the procedure and with local terrain and obstructions in the vicinity of the procedure The pilot in command PC performs a thorough map reconnaissance to determine the highest obstruction in the area of operations 2 Before initiating the procedure the pilot on the controls P must climb to the prescribed MSA proceed toward the IAF and make the appropriate radio calls During the procedure the P will focus primarily inside the aircraft on the instruments The P will adjust the aircraft ground track to cross the IAF IF and then the FAF on the prescribed course When over the FAF the P begins the final descent as appropriate 3 The pilot not on the controls P remains primarily focused outside the aircraft to provide adequate warning for avoiding obstacles hazards and will announce when his or her attention is focused inside the cockpit The P and nonrated crewmember NCM will monitor the aircraft instruments during the procedure and the P will tune the communication a
372. propriate cruise chart to compute the maximum range indicated airspeed as described below 1 Clean and high drag configuration a Step 1 Find the intersection of the GW 1 000 LB at the AIRCRAFT GWT item 3 departure data and the MAX RANGE line b Step 2 Move left or right to find the MAX RANGE IAS Record MAX RANGE IAS DUAL ENGINE c Step 3 At the intersection of the GW 1 000 LB at the AIRCRAFT GWT item 3 departure data and the MAX RANGE line move down to the TORQUE PER ENGINE line then read torque for the maximum range indicated airspeed Record MAX RANGE TORQUE DUAL ENGINE 2 Alternative or external load configuration a Step 1 Insert the change in square feet of drag into the formula found in the operator s manual chapter 7 7A 6 KTS 10FT X AF b Step 2 Subtract the airspeed change from the results of the formula in step 1 above from the clean or high drag configuration MAX RANGE IAS DUAL ENGINE Example You are flying with both cargo doors open The change in flat plate drag area AF from the operator s manual chapter 7 DRAG is 6 0 square feet The equation using the 10 method would be as follows 6 KTS 10 FT X 6FT drag 3 6 KTS Reduce maximum range airspeed by approximately 4 knots i Item 24 MAX ENDURANCE IAS TORQUE DUAL ENGINE Use the appropriate CRUISE chart to compute maximum endurance indicated airspeed and torque as described below 1 Clean and high drag config
373. r HSI during low level flight the P may include headings The P should use electronically aided navigation to help arrive at a specific checkpoint or turning point c The P P and nonrated crewmember NCM should use standardized terms to prevent misinterpretation of information and unnecessary cockpit conversation The crew must look far enough ahead of the aircraft at all times to assist in avoiding traffic and obstacles 2 Procedures a During NOE and contour flight identify prominent terrain features that are located some distance ahead of the aircraft and which lie along or near the course Using these terrain features to key on the P maneuvers the aircraft to take advantage of the terrain and vegetation for concealment If this navigational technique does not apply identify the desired route by designating a series of successive checkpoints To remain continuously oriented compare actual terrain features with those on the map An effective technique is to combine using terrain features and rally terms when giving directions This will allow the P to focus his or her attention outside the aircraft b For low level navigation the time and distance can be computed effectively This means that the P can fly specific headings and airspeeds Note Each of the methods for stating heading information is appropriate under specific conditions When a number of terrain features are visible and prominent enough for the P to recognize t
374. r H 60A L series qualification Task Task Title 1016 Perform internal load operations 1022 Perform preflight inspection 1024 Perform before starting engine through before leaving helicopter checks 1032 Perform radio communication procedures 1062 Perform slope operations 1162 Perform emergency egress A 2 TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Aircraft Series Qualification Table A 3 Rated crewmember flight tasks for H 60A L series qualification Task Task Title 1168 Perform command instrument system procedures 1253 Operate flight management system central display unit 1254 Operate multifunction display Flight Instruction Hours Qualification training 1 0 If conducting an H 60L qualification in a H 60L all tasks in tables A 1 and A 3 must be completed Minimum flight training required is 1 0 d Flight training NCM The NCM will receive 1 hour of flight training in the aircraft As a minimum the NCM will perform the tasks listed in table A 4 Table A 4 Nonrated crewmember flight tasks for H 60A L series qualification Task Task Title 1016 Perform internal load operations 1020 Prepare aircraft for mission 1022 Perform preflight inspection 1024 Perform before starting engine through before leaving helicopter checks 1026 Perform airspace surveillance 1032 Perform radio communication procedures 1162
375. r and given the appropriate aircraft operator s manual checklist CL STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 Perform procedures and checks per the appropriate aircraft operator s manual CL and health indicator test HIT check procedures 2 Enter appropriate information on DA Form 2408 12 DA Form 2408 13 DA Form 2408 13 1 and the HIT log DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a Each crewmember will complete the required checks pertaining to theassigned crew duties per the appropriate aircraft operator s manual CL Crewmembers will coordinate with each other before entering data into aircraft systems b The pilot not on the controls P will read the checklist and announce auxiliary power unit APU and engine starts c The appropriate crewmember s will clear the area around the aircraft before APU start and each engine start d A nonrated crewmember NCM will perform duties as required by his or her duty position and as directed by the pilot in command PC according to the unit standing operating procedure SOP while maintaining situational awareness e The PC will ensure the appropriate information is entered on DA Form 2408 12 DA Form 2408 13 DA Form 2408 13 1 the HIT log according to the unit SOP and DA Pam 738 751 f Secure the aircraft after completing the flight per the appropriate aircraft operator s manual theIETM EM 0271 TM 1 1500 250 23 and the unit SOP 2 P
376. r cues given by the other crewmembers Crewmembers will assist in clearing the aircraft and provide adequate warning of traffic or obstacles They also will announce when their attention is focused inside the aircraft 2 Procedures a Visual search is the systematic visual coverage of a given area so that all parts of the area are observed The purpose of visual search is to detect objects or activities on the ground b During missions involving direct observation the aircrew is concerned with detection identification location and reporting c Detection Detection requires determining that an object or an activity exists d Identification Major factors in identifying a target are size shape and type of armament Targets are classified as friendly or enemy e Location The exact location of targets is the objective of the mission Depending on the nature of the targets the observer may be required to locate the center of mass f Reporting Spot reports provide commanders with critical information while conducting missions The method of spot reporting is specified by the requesting agency Reports of no enemy sightings are frequently just as important as actual enemy sightings g The ability of an observer to search a given area effectively depends on several factors In addition to the limitations of the human eye itself the most important of these factors are altitude airspeed terrain and meteorological conditions and visual cu
377. r full increase collective until all slack is removed from the suspension cable and the lip of the bucket is clear of the water Maintain heading with pedals Apply additional collective to raise the filled bucket clear of the water s surface to a height of 5 feet Ensure the bucket is holding the water and monitor aircraft instruments to ensure aircraft limitations are not exceeded 6 Take off Establish a constant angle of climb that will permit safe obstacle clearance When above 100 feet AGL or when clear of obstacles adjust attitude and power as required to establish the desired rate of climb and airspeed Smoothly adjust flight controls to prevent bucket oscillation Note Ensure that the cargo hook arming switch is in the ARMED position when operating at altitudes below 300 feet AHO and in the SAFE position above 300 feet AHO 7 En route Maintain the desired altitude flight path and airspeed Make smooth control applications to prevent bucket oscillation If a lateral bucket oscillation occurs reduce airspeed If a fore and aft oscillation occurs begin a shallow turn while reducing airspeed Note Recommended en route airspeed with loaded or unloaded water bucket is 80 knots indicated airspeed KIAS Note When flying with the bucket empty open the bucket to allow streamlining This prevents the bucket from twisting and pinching the cables 8 Approach and water release Altitude and airspeed affect the dump pattern It i
378. r her attention outside using the horizon as the primary reference for these maneuvers b Decelerating turn The decelerating turn is used to rapidly change the direction of the aircraft at low level altitudes while trading airspeed energy to maintain safe operational altitude The angle of bank forward airspeed gross weight and environmental conditions at the initiation of the maneuver will determine the type amount of deceleration necessary to slow the aircraft to maintain altitude 1 At cruise altitudes apply aft and directional cyclic to initiate the turn 2 At terrain flight altitudes consider the desired direction and magnitude of the turn before initiating the maneuver Angles of bank should be lower than those used during cruise flight since sufficient recovery altitude may not be available 3 Adjust the flight controls as necessary to maintain the pitch attitude and altitude and to maintain the aircraft in trim Note Recovery is affected by applying opposite cyclic roll and forward cyclic when reaching the desired heading and adjusting the collective to obtain the desired airspeed and altitude c Break turn The break turn is used at terrain and cruise flight altitudes to rapidly change the direction of the helicopter while maintaining or gaining airspeed As altitude allows this turn also enables a simultaneous three axis change of position and direction This maneuver is effective when performing evasive maneuvers to qu
379. r more tasks checks are not performed to standard the evaluation will be graded unsatisfactory However when reevaluated only those unsatisfactory checks will be reevaluated Evaluations may be conducted in aircraft that are MTF status at the discretion of the ME h An MP who flies both the H 60A L and H60M may complete the annual maintenance test flight evaluation in an H 60M and not have to complete ATM Task 4228 Perform Absorber Vibration Check and Tuning in an H 60A L Evaluation of the procedure will be conducted in accordance with the H 60A L Maintenance Test Flight Manual with respect to the different cockpit configurations This will allow for an HG0M MP ME to complete the evaluation in one aircraft References The references are sources of information relating to that particular task In addition to the common references listed in chapter 4 of this ATM the following references apply to all MP tasks 5 2 1 TM 1 1520 237 MTF 2 TM 1 1520 253 MTF 3 TM 1 1520 280 MTF TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Maintenance Test Pilot Tasks 4 Aircraft historical records 5 TM 1 1500 328 23 6 DA Pam 738 751 7 Applicable 23 series manuals 8 TM 1 6625 724 13 amp P 9 Applicable airworthiness directives or messages 5 2 TASK LIST The following numbered tasks are H 60 maintenance test pilot tasks Publication Date TC 3 04 33 5 3 FINAL
380. r to paragraph 2 5d 2 for guidance on technical tasks b NVG mission training NVG mission training will be according to the commander s aircrew training program TC 3 04 11 and this ATM When commanders determine a requirement for using NVG in mission profiles they must develop a mission training program and specify mission additional NVG tasks as required Before undergoing NVG mission training the RCM must complete qualification or refresher training RL 3 base tasks from table 2 4 page 2 7 and must be NVG current in the H 60 1 Academic training The crewmember will receive training and demonstrate a working knowledge of the appropriate subject areas listed in paragraph 3 4b of this ATM Special emphasis should be placed on considerations pertaining to subject areas 3 4b 8 and 10 2 Flight training The crewmember will receive flight training and demonstrate proficiency in the mission additional NVG tasks as specified by the commander on the individual s DA Form 7120 1 R DA Form 7120 2 R for the crewmember s position There is no minimum flight hour requirement 3 NVG progression For progression to NVG RL 1 a crewmember must complete an NVG evaluation given at night by an NVG IP SP FI or SI as appropriate For a RCM not previously ANVIS HUD qualified he she will complete ANVIS HUD qualification according to appendix B before progressing to NVG RL 2 c MP and ME mission training Commanders are not authorized to delete a
381. raining may be conducted in the aircraft or simulator 2 Evaluation Evaluation may be conducted in the aircraft or simulator REFERENCES Appropriate common references Publication Date TC 3 04 33 4 91 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 TASK 1176 Perform Nonprecision Approach CONDITIONS In an H 60 helicopter given approach information and appropriate Department of Defense flight information publication DOD FLIP STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications Perform the approach Intercept and maintain nondirectional beacon NDB courses within 5 degrees of course centerline Intercept and maintain VHF omnidirectional range radio beacon VOR or global positioning system GPS course line within 5 degrees of course centerline 4 Intercept and maintain localizer courses within 2 5 degrees of course centerline 5 During airport surveillance radar ASR approaches make immediate heading and altitude changes issued by air traffic control ATC and maintain heading 5 degrees 6 Comply with descent minimums prescribed for the approach 7 Perform the correct missed approach procedure as published or per ATC instructions upon reaching the missed approach point MAP if landing cannot be completed per AR 95 1 DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a The pilot in command PC is responsible for ensuring that the approach is reviewed and is brie
382. rake Operations Performance tasks are required to be performed both Day Night and NVG if specified by the commander during RL progression training 2 6 2 7 CURRENCY REQUIREMENTS a Aircraft currency will be according to AR 95 1 Those crewmembers whose currency has lapsed must complete an evaluation given in the aircraft by an IP SP FI or SI as appropriate Commanders should consider selecting tasks from each mode of flight day night and instrument and evaluating tasks from each selected mode during the currency evaluation These requirements will be outlined in the unit standing operating procedure SOP Currency in any one mission series aircraft for which the rated crewmember is qualified will satisfy the requirement for all aircraft within the same group Nonrated crewmembers may maintain currency in any H60 helicopter in which qualified Mission series aircraft are grouped as follows 1 UH 60A L HH 60A L MH 60A L VH 60A L 2 UH 60M HH 60M VH 60M 3 MH 60K 4 MH 60M b To be considered night vision goggles NVG current a crewmember must take part every 60 days in at least a 1 hour flight in the aircraft at night while wearing NVG NVG currency may be accomplished within any H 60 series in which qualified and current A RCM must be at a crew station with access to the flight controls Using the H 60FS to maintain currency is not authorized A NCM must perform designated duties in a crew station authorize
383. rance Form F Tactical Transport is computed using standard average or estimated weight for personnel equipment and fuel Actual mission weight could vary from that on the DD Form 365 4 If the load configuration is different than that on the 365 4 the PC may use the appropriate DD Form 365 4 from the aircraft logbook and add additional weights of cargo and personnel then subtract indicating fuel or use the HOVER chart from the CL to compute the adjusted ZERO FUEL WEIGHT Note The PC must adjust for certain hover conditions such as wind and surface condition when utilizing the hover method 4 16 TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 Note Although data needed to compute ZERO FUEL WEIGHT is noted at a hover the calculation should be made when practical Item 15 REMARKS examples of these may include drag factors fuel requirements for the mission GO NO GO for sling loads and EMER SE IAS Note The EMER SE IAS is the emergency single engine indicated airspeed IAS based on the mission and briefed to the crew for the purpose of crew coordination This airspeed is selected from the MIN MAX IAS SINGLE ENGINE range computed in item 29 CRUISE data and is used immediately following an emergency that requires adjustment to single engine airspeed When an aircraft does not have single engine capability MAX ENDURANCE IAS DUAL ENGINB item 24 or the O
384. rations that the P s and NCM s focus be primarily outside to provide warning to the P of obstacles or hazards during the mine delivery phase Publication Date TC 3 04 33 4 165 Fl NAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training Training will be conducted in the aircraft 2 Evaluation Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft REFERENCES Appropriate common references FM 3 34 210 and Volcano airworthiness release 4 166 TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 TASK 2075 Perform Fat Hawk Operations CONDITIONS In an H 60 helicopter with extended range fuel system installed STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 Rated a Conduct permission planning to include required load configuration as briefed Verify the aircraft will remain within gross weight and center of gravity CG limitations for the duration of the flight b Conduct a thorough crew and support personnel safety briefing c Ensure the aircraft is configured and fueled for the mission d Ensure that the passengers and cargo are restrained e Set up the micro forward area refueling equipment FARE system 2 Nonrated a Load the aircraft per the load plan if applicable b Ensure that floor loading limits are not exceeded c Secure passengers
385. re path The tactical technical and meteorological elements must be considered in determining suitability Note wind conditions will be a factor a wind evaluation should be performed Techniques for evaluating wind conditions are found in FM 3 04 203 Note Depending on the mission an in flight suitability check may not be feasible Suitability may be determined by a map reconnaissance Make a final determination of suitability upon arrival to the landing zone pickup zone LZ PZ a Tactical 1 Mission Determine whether the mission can be done from the selected LZ Consider flight time fuel number of sorties and access routes 2 Location To reduce troop fatigue consider distance of PZ or LZ from supported unit or objective Also consider the supported unit s mission equipment and method of travel to from PZ LZ 3 Security Consider size and proximity of threat elements versus availability of security forces The supported unit normally provides security Consider cover and concealment key terrain avenues of approach and departure The area should be large enough to provide dispersion b Technical 1 Number and type of aircraft Determine if the size of the LZ can support all the aircraft at once or if they must rotate into LZ for in flight linkup 2 Landing formation Plan landing formation for shape and size of LZ 4 62 TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 Chapter
386. re to facilitate timely counter battery fire from friendly field artillery b AAA guns The crew should use the unguided weapons countermeasures above to defeat the guns projectiles themselves For radar aided directed AAA systems use the radar countermeasures listed below c SACLOS Missiles SACLOS weapon systems include ATGM and certain antiaircraft missiles These systems can vary from slow speed ATGMs 100 meters per second to very high speed antiaircraft missiles 700 meters per second and may use wires radio or laser for the command link These systems are countered by departing the missile engagement zone MEZ or WEZ prior to weapons impact Regardless of the type of SACLOS missile the weakest part of the guidance system is the enemy gunner Older ATGMs glide during most of their flight resulting in low energy and poor missile maneuverability This combined with relatively high latency within the guidance systems means the missile can be readily out flown by the targeted aircraft With high speed high G SACLOS antiaircraft systems the missiles themselves are more difficult to be out flown by a helicopter due to its maneuverability speed and decreased reaction time by the aircrew d Radar guided weapons See Classified Army Aviation TTP e Heat seeking IR missiles See Classified Army Aviation TTP f Fixed wing Fighter aircraft are characterized by their high performance with high attack speeds Their ability to move vertically in
387. ress Flight Instruction Hours Qualification training 1 0 A 4 TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Appendix B Aircraft System Equipment Qualification B 1 AIRCRAFT SYSTEM EQUIPMENT QUALIFICATIONS Equipment system qualifications will be conducted according to the appropriate TSP new equipment training NET interim statement of airworthiness qualification or AWR as applicable If a TSP is applicable it may be obtained by writing to Commander United States Army Aviation Center ATTN ATZQ TDS T Fort Rucker Alabama 36362 5000 As new equipment is fielded the level of training required will be determined by Commander United States Army Aviation Center Fort Rucker Alabama A qualified SP IP SI or FI will conduct all qualifications Document additional qualifications on Part V remarks section of DA Form 759 closeout and DA Form 7122 R B 2 M240H MACHINE GUN Qualification for the M240H machinegun will be in accordance with FM 3 04 140 B 3 ANVIS HEADS UP DISPLAY QUALIFICATION TRAINING Qualification training will provide the aviators with the knowledge skills and techniques required to integrate heads up display HUD operations into NVG flight Training in the aircraft will be with the aviator at a station with access to the flight controls and wearing ANVIS with HUD attached A HUD qualified IP SP or UT will be at the other station with access to the fl
388. ress and fatigue e Middle ear discomfort e Spatial disorientation e Principles and problems of vision 6 Aerodynamics FM 3 04 203 and appropriate aircraft operator s manual Topics in this subject area are e Relative wind e Retreating blade stall e Airflow during a hover e Compressibility e Total aerodynamic force e Settling with power e Dynamic roll over e Transverse flow e Translating tendency Autorotation e Dissymmetry of lift e Effective translational lift 7 Night mission operations FM 3 04 203 and FM 3 04 93 Topics in this subject area are e Unaided night flight e Night vision limitations and techniques e Visual illusions e Types of vision e Distance estimation and depth perception e Use of internal and external lights e Dark adaptation night vision protection and central night blind spot e Night terrain interpretation map preparation and navigation 8 Tactical and mission operations FM3 04 113 FM 3 04 126 FM 4 20 197 FM 55 450 2 2 0 FM 3 52 FM 90 4 TC 3 04 11 The Army Aviator s Handbook for Maneuvering Flight and Power Management appropriate aircraft operator s manual chapter 4 of this ATM and unit SOP Topics in this subject area are ASE employment e Tactical formation e Downed aircraft procedures e Fratricide prevention e Communication security COMSEC e Terrain flight planning and safety e Mission equipment
389. rew station s Proficiency must be demonstrated in each performance and technical base task listed in table 2 5 page 2 10 and table 2 6 page 2 11 An X under the mode of flight for performance tasks specifies the mode in which the task will be performed Technical tasks may be trained and evaluated in any condition or mode refer to paragraph 2 5d 2 for guidance on technical tasks NCMs must demonstrate crew coordination and airspace surveillance proficiency in all other flight tasks listed in table 2 4 AII standards of each flight task must be trained to proficiency Table 2 3 is a guide for developing refresher flight training for NCMs Actual hours will be based on individual proficiency b NVG refresher training The crewmember must complete the training outlined below NVG considerations for each task when applicable are in chapter 4 1 Academic training The crewmember will receive training and demonstrate a working knowledge of the appropriate topics listed in paragraph 3 4b prior to commencement of flight training Publication Date TC 3 04 33 2 3 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 2 2 Flight training Crewmembers will demonstrate proficiency in all tasks outlined for the appropriate crewmember in table 2 1 There is no minimum flying hour requirement During NVG training base tasks training must be complete prior to performing mission tasks with the exception of Task 2081 an
390. rform STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 Rated Identify at a minimum the hand and arm signals required for moving an aircraft left right forward or backward and for takeoff and landing per FM 21 60 2 Nonrated Identify and perform at a minimum the hand and arm signals required for moving an aircraft left right forward or backward and for takeoff and landing per FM 21 60 DESCRIPTION Identify or perform the hand and arm signals required to move an aircraft from one point to another TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training Training will be conducted academically 2 Evaluation Evaluation will be conducted academically REFERENCES Appropriate common references and FM 21 60 Publication Date TC 3 04 33 4 103 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 TASK 1194 Perform Refueling Operations CONDITIONS In an H 60 helicopter and refueling equipment STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 Ensure that safety procedures are complied with per FM 10 67 1 and the appropriate aircraft operator s manual TC 3 04 111 and FM3 04 113 2 If installed ensure that all doors and windows are closed on the refueling side for hot refueling operations 3 Ensure that the aircraft is refueled per FM 10 67 1 the appropriate aircraft operator s manual TC 3 04 111 FM3 04 113 and t
391. rform Compasses Turn Rate and Vertical Gyros Automatic Heading Reference System AHRS Checks 5 16 Task 4220 Perform Maximum Power Check sse 5 17 Task 4228 Perform Vibration Absorber Check and Tuning 5 18 Task 4236 Perform Autorotation Revolutions Per Minute 5 19 iv TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Contents Task 4254 Perform Vh Check nennen nnne nentes tenens 5 20 Task 4284 Perform Engine Shutdown Checks sse 5 21 Task 4288 Perform Gust Lock Rotor Brake Operations 5 22 Figures Figure 4 1 Sample DA Form 5701 60 R page 1 4 13 Figure 4 2 Sample DA Form 5701 60 R page 2 4 14 Figure 4 3 Example maximum torque available 4 25 Figure 4 4 Maximum out of ground effect hover weight and torque required chart 4 27 Figure 4 5 Maximum out of ground effect hover weight and torque required chart tenue EE 4 28 Figure 4 6 Final approach segment sse nennen 4 135 Figure 4 7 altitude calculation diagram
392. riate for conditions Maintain the desired ground track within 3 feet DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a The pilot on the controls P will ensure that the parking brake is released and the tail wheel is locked or unlocked as required before starting the ground taxi The P will announce his or her intent to begin ground taxi operations the intended direction of any turns and that the aircraft is clear of all traffic and obstacles The P will remain focused primarily outside the aircraft b The pilot not on the controls P and nonrated crewmember NCM will help clear the aircraft and provide adequate warning of traffic and obstacles They also will announce when their attention is focused inside the aircraft and again when attention is reestablished outside 2 Procedures Ensure the area is suitable for ground taxi operations Initiate the taxi by centering the cyclic and increasing the collective slightly to start forward movement If required adjust lateral cyclic pedals or both to release the tail wheel lockpin Avoid droop stop pounding contact by using proper cyclic and collective control applications Ensure that both sets of brakes operate properly conditions permitting Use left or right pedal input to turn the aircraft and lateral cyclic as necessary to maintain a level fuselage attitude in the turns To regulate the taxi speed use a combination of collective slight forward cyclic and brakes Be aware that high gross weights
393. ring d Landing In rough seas attempt to land when the ship is at the apex of a pitch up Watch the LSE and listen to guidance from the ship s tower Lower the collective and perform a controlled touchdown with the main wheels inside the landing deck circle When the landing gear is on the deck smoothly lower the collective to the full down position Maintain the cyclic centered and ignore aircraft motion Wait until the wheels are chained or moored before exiting the aircraft Note The requirements for chocks and chains and use of a LSE will be determined at the presail meeting and is dependent on the ship captain s requirements The NATOPS manual sets a common standard for fleet operations but we must comply with each ship s standard as set by the captain e Takeoff The P will show his or her hands during the day or will flash a light at night to indicate to the LSE which aviator is at the controls When cleared for takeoff increase power and smoothly ascend to a hover height of 10 feet keeping the LSE in sight Slide left or right as directed to clear any obstruction and depart the ship at a 45 degree angle from the bow NCM will call CLEAR OF THE DECK The ship can be used for an attitude reference during acceleration During conditions of reduced visibility it may be necessary to transition to instruments for most of the takeoff The ship can be used for an attitude reference during acceleration During conditions of reduced visibil
394. rocedures Perform the before starting engine through before leaving helicopter checks per the aircraft operator s manual CL The call and response method should be used as appropriate The crewmember reading the checklist will read the complete checklist item The crewmember performing the check will answer with the appropriate response For example for the call Anti collision position lights as required the response might be Anti collision lights both night position lights steady bright Responses that don t clearly communicate action of information should not be used For example when responding to the call Systems check replying with check doesn t clearly indicate that the systems are within the normal operating range A response of All in the normal operating range communicates more accurate information Perform the HIT check and when complete record data on the HIT log After the flight enter all information required on the appropriate Department of the Army DA forms NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLE NVG CONSIDERATIONS Before starting the engines ensure that internal and external lights are operational and set Internal lighting levels must be high enough to easily see the instruments and to start the engines without exceeding operating limitations SNOW SAND DUST CONSIDERATIONS Ensure all rotating components and inlets exhausts are clear of ice and or snow before starting APU engines TRAINING AND EVALUATION
395. rom the MAP The MAX length is 10 NM The optimum length is 5nm The width is 2 4 NM 1 2nm on either side of centerline Minimum Descent Altitude MDA Final Approach Segment A Highest obstacle within this area Determine highest obstacle from 3 nm before FAF to 3 nm past MAP A Figure 4 6 Final approach segment Determine figure 4 7 1 Determine the for the landing area 2 The minimum distance is 3 NM and the MAX distance is 7 5 NM from the MAP The optimum distance is 5 NM The holding pattern leg will not exceed 3 NM The width is 4 NM 2 NM on either side Solution A rounded up nearest 100 feet B 1000 feet C MAHF Altitude A Highest obstacle within 10 NM centered on the MAHF Figure 4 7 MAHF altitude calculation diagram d Missed Approach Segment figure 4 8 page 4 136 1 The missed approach segment will start at the MAP and ends at a holding point designated by a MAHF 2 Optimum routing is straight ahead within 15 of the final approach course to a direct entry A turning missed approach may be designated if needed for an operational advantage but is not discussed in this task due to the complexity of determining obstacle clearance 3 The area of consideration for missed approach surface and the 20 to 1 obstacle clearance evaluation for all rotary wing Publication Date TC 3 04 33 4 135 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_
396. ropriate navigational publications STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 Tune and identify appropriate navigational aids NAVAIDs 2 Determine intercept and maintain the desired course 5 degrees 3 Maintain the desired heading 5 degrees 4 Maintain the desired distance measuring equipment DME arc 1 nautical mile 5 Identify station passage DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a The pilot on the controls P will remain focused inside the aircraft and will monitor radios and air traffic control ATC information The P will acknowledge all directives given by ATC or the pilot not on the controls P The P will announce airspeed heading and altitude changes and any deviation not directed by ATC or the P b The P will select and announce radio frequencies The P also will monitor radios and ATC information not monitored by the P The P will confirm airspeed heading and altitude changes c During visual meteorological conditions VMC or simulated IMC the P and nonrated crewmember NCM will focus primarily outside the aircraft to provide adequate warning of traffic or obstacles They will announce when their attention is focused inside the aircraft and again when attention is reestablished outside 2 Procedures a Adjust cyclic as required to maintain the desired airspeed and heading Adjust collective as required to maintain the desired climb descent rate or altitude and ma
397. rotation should be determined using outside visual references and cockpit indications as necessary Pilots should avoid focusing on the radar altimeter during critical phases of the maneuver 1 Crew actions a The pilot on the controls P will enter the autorotation and remain focused primarily outside the aircraft throughout the maneuver and will announce autorotation The P will monitor revolutions per minute rotor RPM trim airspeed and announce the intended point of termination The P will acknowledge any announced warnings recommendations or control input made by the pilot not on the controls P b The P will monitor RPM R aircraft trim and airspeed and provide adequate warning for corrective actions If time permits lock shoulder harnesses place transponder to emergency and make a mayday call If the P must make a control input to prevent exceeding any limitations the P will announce his or her actions to the P The P will cross monitor and back up the performance of the emergency procedures and flight control inputs and confirm actions per the checklist time permitting c The P and nonrated crewmember NCM will confirm the suitability of the landing area assist in clearing the aircraft and provide adequate warning of obstacles d The NCM will prepare the passengers for an emergency landing During the descent the NCM will keep communications to a minimum to allow the P or P to attempt communication
398. rrent heading and set the following flight parameters 1 Level roll attitude 2 70 indicated airspeed IAS 3 750 feet per minute FPM rate of climb c Complete the inadvertent IMC recovery per local regulations and policies NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLE NVG CONSIDERATIONS When using night vision goggles NVG it may be possible to see through thin obscuration such as fog and drizzle with little or no degradation The NVG may be removed or flipped up once stable flight is established It may be beneficial for the P not to 4 100 TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 completely remove his or her NVG The NVG may assist in recovery by allowing the P to see through thin obscuration that would otherwise prevent him from seeing the landing environment Note If IMC conditions are entered with the searchlight or landing light on spatial disorientation may occur TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training Training may be conducted in the aircraft or simulator 2 Evaluation Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft REFERENCES Appropriate common references Publication Date TC 3 04 33 4 101 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 TASK 1188 Operate Aircraft Survivability Equipment CONDITIONS In an H 60 helicopter equipped with aircraft survivability equipment ASE STANDARDS A
399. ry Note When it is necessary to perform a roll on landing because of a single engine failure the P should not decelerate the aircraft below minimum single engine indicated airspeed IAS until the aircraft is at a point from which obstacles in the flight path will be cleared and a safe landing can be assured DROOP STOP POUNDING DSP AERODYNAMIC BRAKING 1 DSP is a phenomenon that can occur when there is excessive downward blade travel causing the blades to strike the droop stops when they are in the fly position The conditions which combine to induce this type DSP include excessive aft cyclic low collective and all wheels on the ground The maneuver that is most likely to produce DSP is the roll on landing in conjunction with aerodynamic braking however DSP can also occur during taxi and down slope landings Aerodynamic braking is a procedure that uses the aerodynamic forces of the rotor system to slow or stop the aircraft Once the tail wheel is on the ground using the aft cyclic in conjunction with an increase in collective will slow or stop the aircraft 2 Aerodynamic braking is permissible while the tail wheel is on the ground before main gear contact Once the main wheels contact the ground the cyclic must be centered collective lowered center cyclic before lowering the collective and brakes applied only when collective is full down as required If a pilot attempts to slow the aircraft after main wheel contact by using aft
400. ry from the maneuver c The pilot not on the controls P will maintain airspace surveillance and monitor instruments to ensure torque trim airspeed RPM R maneuver parameters and aircraft limitations are not exceeded The P will announce when his or her attention is focused inside the cockpit The P will provide adequate warning to avoid enemy obstacles or traffic detected in the flight path and if any deviation is necessary to complete the maneuver d The nonrated crewmember NCM will maintain airspace surveillance offer threat advisories and engage threat targets as necessary 2 Procedures a Combat flight maneuvers Combat flight maneuvers should be employed in concert with Task 2042 in order to mask the helicopter or evade enemy threat systems The maneuvers described are typically initiated at cruise airspeeds greater than 100 knots indicated airspeed KIAS During training the maneuvers should be initiated between the minimum and maximum single engine airspeed Aircrews 4 184 TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 must be familiar with aerodynamic factors such as mushing transient torque and blade stall before performing these maneuvers Consider using maximum rate of climb airspeed as much as possible during these maneuvers due to the amount of excess power available and the performance characteristics while maneuvering The P will focus his o
401. s in controlled airspace however its use should be considered and planned for as a backup system 4 94 TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training Training may be conducted in the aircraft or simulator 2 Evaluation Evaluation may be conducted in the aircraft or simulator REFERENCES Appropriate common references Publication Date TC 3 04 33 4 95 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 TASK 1180 Perform Emergency Global Positioning System Recovery Procedure CONDITIONS In an H 60 helicopter in visual meteorological conditions VMC or simulated instrument meteorological condition IMC given an approved emergency global positioning system GPS recovery procedure STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 Enter or confirm the appropriate waypoints initial approach fix IAF intermediate approach fix IF final approach fix FAF missed approached point MAP into the navigation system 2 Execute the procedure according to an approved recovery procedure 3 Maintain a briefed airspeed not to exceed 90 knots indicated airspeed KIAS appropriate for the conditions during all segments of the approach 4 Maintain the prescribed course 5 degrees 5 Comply with the descent minimums prescribed for the
402. s use the appropriate manufacturer s operator s manuals TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training Training may be conducted in the aircraft or simulator 2 Evaluation Evaluation may be conducted in the aircraft or simulator REFERENCES Appropriate common references and the manufacturer s operator s manual Publication Date TC 3 04 33 4 59 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 TASK 1052 Perform Visual Meteorological Conditions Flight Maneuvers CONDITIONS In an H 60 helicopter given visual meteorological conditions VMC conditions STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and rated only enter operate in and depart a traffic pattern DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a The pilot on the controls P will remain focused primarily outside the aircraft The P will announce and clear each turn climb and descent b The pilot not on the controls P and nonrated crewmember NCM will assist in clearing the aircraft and will provide adequate warning of traffic and obstacles They will announce when their attention is focused inside the aircraft and again when attention is reestablished outside 2 Procedures Adjust cyclic as required to maintain the desired airspeed course ground track or heading as appropriate Adjust collective as required to maintain the desired climb descent rate or altitude and maintain aircraft in trim with the pedals Perform traffic pattern
403. s The P will announce ATC information not monitored by the pilot on the controls P The P also will compute outbound times and headings to adjust for wind and direct the P to adjust the pattern as necessary c The P will fly headings and altitudes and will adjust inbound and outbound times as directed by ATC or the P The P will announce any deviation as well as ATC information not monitored by the P d During simulated IMC the P and nonrated crewmember NCM will focus primarily outside the aircraft to provide adequate warning of traffic or obstacles They will announce when their attention is focused inside the aircraft and again when attention is reestablished outside 2 Procedures Upon arrival at the holding fix turn if required to the predetermined outbound heading or track and check the inbound course Maintain the outbound heading or track as published or as directed by ATC After the appropriate time outbound turn to the inbound heading and apply normal tracking procedures to maintain the inbound course Note the time required to fly the inbound leg and adjust outbound course and time if necessary When holding at a NAVAID begin timing the outbound leg when abeam the station This is indicated by the 2 bearing pointer or the TO FROM indicator indicating a FROM indication When holding at an intersection begin timing the outbound leg upon establishing the outbound heading TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training T
404. s buoys wires and birds must also be considered during overwater flight TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training Training may be conducted in the aircraft or simulator 2 Evaluation Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft REFERENCES Appropriate common references JP 3 04 NAVAIR 00 80T 106 NAVAIR 00 80T 122 NAEC ENG 7576 and FM 1 564 Publication Date TC 3 04 33 4 163 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 TASK 2070 Perform M 139 Volcano Operations CONDITIONS In an H 60 helicopter with M 139 Volcano System installed STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 Rated a Conduct permission planning to include required load configuration for size of minefield to be emplaced Verify the aircraft will remain within center of gravity CG limitations for the duration of the flight b In conjunction with the nonrated crewmember s NCMs complete the required M 139 checks to ensure proper system operation prior to mission departure c Operate the M 139 Volcano System per the appropriate aircraft operator s manual checklist CL and airworthiness release d Recognize and respond to a Volcano System malfunction e Perform or describe appropriate emergency procedures per the appropriate aircraft operator s manual CL f Deploy a minefield in the designated location orientation and length maintaining ground
405. s manual CL NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLE NVG CONSIDERATIONS Take special precautions to identify the correct switches levers when performing emergency procedures at night or while wearing night vision goggles NVG TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training Training will be conducted in the aircraft simulator or academically 2 Evaluation Except for ECU DECU Lockout evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft unless flight activity category FAC 3 or instrument annual proficiency and readiness test APART is allowed in the simulator REFERENCES Appropriate common references 4 76 TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 TASK 1082 Perform Autorotation CONDITIONS In an H 60 helicopter and given an emergency procedure requiring autorotation STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 Identify the malfunction determine the appropriate emergency procedure and perform or describe the appropriate procedures outlined in the aircraft operator s manual checklist CL 2 Select a suitable landing area 3 Adjust airspeed appropriate to ensure landing area 4 Perform a deceleration and termination as directed by the instructor pilot IP or as appropriate for the type of emergency per the appropriate aircraft operator s manual DESCRIPTION WARNING The deceleration altitude during an auto
406. s most concentrated at lower altitudes AGL and at a hover The pattern will spread with altitude and speed The PC will determine the most appropriate height and speed for the pattern desired or according to the mission briefing When the approach angle is intercepted decrease the collective to establish the descent When passing below 300 feet AGL place cargo hook in ARM position Maintain entry airspeed until apparent ground speed and rate of closure appear to be increasing Progressively decrease the rate of descent and forward airspeed until a momentary hover is attained with the water bucket between 20 to 50 feet above intended release point This method is effective for spot fires For water release on a fire line or large area maintain water bucket at 20 to 50 feet above intended release point and airspeed between slightly above effective translational lift not to exceed 50 KIAS for more effective coverage Confirm all water releases with NCM Note The bucket manufacturer does not recommend dumping at airspeeds above 50 KIAS Note There is a delay of appropriately 0 5 to 1 0 second between the activation of the dump switch and the discharge of the water Note If the bucket fails to open attempt to establish a hover Lightly BOUNCE the bottom of the bucket on the ground and then repeat the water drop release procedure If the bucket sill does not open establish a hover Gently lower the bucket to the ground With the bucket rest
407. s outside the aircraft 2 Procedures a Recognize the emergency and enter autorotation or during training select the correct entry point An autorotation may be done either straight in or with turn When executing an autorotation with turn aircrews must be aware of the tendency for RPM R to increase Smoothly lower the collective at a moderate rate to the full down position Apply pedal as required to maintain the aircraft in trim Adjust the cyclic to assume airspeed appropriate for the conditions and initiate a turn if necessary Note When turning to the right an increase in RPM R will develop rapidly in relation to the rate of cyclic application The RPM R increase can be quite rapid with a corresponding rapid right turn The increase in RPM R will even be further aggravated with heavy gross weight aircraft and high density altitude Adjust the collective as necessary to prevent rotor overspeed Publication Date TC 3 04 33 4 77 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 Note When executing an autorotation with turn to the left a slight to moderate increase in RPM R will normally occur However when right lateral cyclic is rapidly applied from a left turn condition into a right turn condition an even greater increase in RPM R will be evident The increase in RPM R will even be further aggravated with heavy gross weight aircraft and high density altitude Adjust the collectiv
408. s required d The nonrated crewmember NCM will remain focused primarily outside the aircraft to assist in clearing and to provide adequate warning of obstacles Note If an adjusted zero fuel weight is required the data should be recorded when time permits and for accuracy conducted into the wind 2 Procedures a Use the hover height computed during performance planning when performing this task unless the mission or terrain constraints dictate otherwise b At desired hover height monitor the aircraft instruments and verify the power check Compare the actual performance data to that computed Note If the torque required to maintain a stationary hover does not exceed the GO NO GO torque OGE any maneuver requiring OGE IGE power or less may be attempted If the torque required to maintain a stationary hover exceeds the GO NO GO torque OGE but does not exceed the GO NO GO torque IGE all IGE maneuvers may be attempted If the torque required to maintain a stationary hover exceeds the GO NO GO IGE and structural limits have been exceeded further flight is prohibited until appropriate maintenance action is performed Publication Date TC 3 04 33 4 41 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training Training may be conducted in the aircraft or simulator 2 Evaluation Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft unless flight activity category
409. s to the decision maker which is usually the PC or may be the AMC in a mission related situation Specific goals include the following Publication Date TC 3 04 33 6 3 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 6 1 Situational Awareness Crewmembers must anticipate the need to provide information or warnings to the PC or P during critical phases of the flight or mission The PC must encourage crewmembers to exercise the freedom to raise issues or offer information about safety or mission related matters In turn the crewmembers will provide the required information and warnings in a timely and professional manner None of this could be accomplished without cross monitoring performance and crew tasks 2 Mission Changes and Updates Crewmembers should routinely update each other while highlighting and acknowledging mission changes They must take personal responsibility for scanning the entire flight environment considering their assigned workload and areas of scanning Each crewmember needs to appropriately adjust individual workload and task priorities with minimal verbal direction from the PC when responding to emergencies and unplanned changes of the mission 3 Offer Assistance A crewmember will provide assistance information or feedback in response to another crewmember A crewmember will also offer assistance when he detects errors or sees that another crewmember needs help In the case wher
410. sed in environments where these conditions are present It may allow the aircraft to get ahead of the blowing conditions into clear air before takeoff This maneuver should be aborted if visual cues become lost when power is applied Extreme care should be taken to confirm that the snow sand or dust conditions do not cover rough areas in the takeoff path that could damage the aircraft CONFINED AREA CONSIDERATIONS Confirm the takeoff plan prior to departure perform a hover power check re position the aircraft if desired to afford a shallower departure angle and minimize power requirements during departure adjust the cyclic and the collective as required to establish a constant departure angle to clear obstacles all crewmembers must focus primarily outside for obstacle avoidance MOUNTAIN PINNACLE RIDGELINE CONSIDERATIONS Analyze winds obstacles and density altitude Perform a hover power check or determine power requirements through dynamic in flight update methods Determine the best takeoff direction and path for conditions After clearing any obstacle s accelerate the aircraft to the desired airspeed Note Where drop offs are located along the takeoff path the aircraft may be maneuvered down slope to gain airspeed 4 54 TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 MUD MUSKEG TUNDRA CONSIDERATIONS Perform one of the following takeoff techniques 1 From
411. servation work sector is subdivided into two smaller sectors the acquisition sector and the recognition sector The acquisition sector is the forward 90 degree area of the observation work sector This is the primary search area and is at the approximate 10 to 2 clock position and has no overlap in the center of the aircraft The recognition sector is the remainder of the observation work sector w Stationary technique This technique is used at NOE altitudes with the aircraft hovering in a concealed position When using the stationary technique the crew makes a quick overall search for sightings unnatural colors outlines or movements The P starts scanning from the 12 o clock position through 90 degrees on his or her side of the aircraft searching an area approximately 50 meters in depth This scan continues outward from the aircraft increasing the depth of the search area by overlapping 50 meter intervals until the entire search area has been covered The pilot not on the controls P will duplicate the same technique on his or her side of the aircraft The crew chief CE and other crewmembers if assigned will perform as directed by the PC TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training Training may be conducted in the aircraft simulator or academically 2 Evaluation Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft simulator or academically REFERENCES Appropriate common references and FM 17 95 Publication Date TC
412. side 4 136 TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 Initial Approach Fix IAF Initial Approach Segment NOTE IAF will not exceed 90 from final approach course 45 is recommended Determine highest obstacle from 1 nm before IAF to the IF A Figure 4 10 Initial approach segment g Determine the MSA for the Landing Area figure 4 11 1 Use the off route obstruction clearance altitude or off route terrain clearance altitude elevation from the enroute low altitude ELA chart for the area of operations if AVAIL 2 Select the highest altitude within 30 NM of the MAP a If an ELA is not AVAIL the minimum sector altitude will be determined by adding 1000 feet to the MAX elevation figures MEF When a MEF is not AVAIL apply the 1000 feet rule to the highest elevation within 30 NM of the MAP b Minimum sector altitudes can be established with sectors not less than 90 and with sector obstacle clearance having a 4 NM overlap Use the figure below for determining MSA Solution A rounded up nearest 100 feet B 1000 feet C MSA A Highest obstacle within 30 NM centered on the MAP Figure 4 11 MSA calculation diagram 2 Procedure a The Procedures Diagram figure 4 12 page 4 148 Publication Date TC 3 04 33 4 137 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4
413. sion It should include all factors of the mission and incorporate all crewmembers The results of the review should be passed to operations and flight standards TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training Training will be conducted academically 2 Evaluation Evaluation will be conducted academically REFERENCES Appropriate common references 4 108 TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 Table 4 3 Suggested format for a crew level after action review checklist Crew Level After Action Review Checklist 1 Restate mission objectives with METT TC considerations 2 Conduct review for each mission segment a Restate planned actions interactions for the segment b What actually happened 1 Each crewmember states in own words 2 Discuss impacts of crew coordination requirements aircraft equipment operation tactics commander s intent and so forth c What was right or wrong about what happened 1 Each crewmember states in own words 2 Explore causative factors for both favorable and unfavorable events 3 Discuss crew coordination strengths and weakness in dealing with each event d What must be done differently the next time 1 Each crewmember states in own words 2 Identify improvements required in the areas of team relationships mission planning workload distribution and prioritization information exchange and cross mon
414. sion and annual proficiency and readiness test APART evaluations This does not mean that both standardization and instrument flight evaluation need to be completed in both seats As long as both seats have been evaluated during some portion of the above evaluations the requirements for both seat evaluation have been met Maintenance test pilot MP ME RL progression and APART evaluations will be conducted according to chapter 5 of this ATM 1 2 SYMBOL USAGE AND WORD DISTINCTIONS a Symbol usage 1 The diagonal means one or the other or both For example IP SP may mean IP or SP or it may mean IP and SP 2 M Denotes applicable only to H 60M series aircraft 3 A L Denotes applicable only to H 60A L series aircraft 4 ATM tasks listed in bold denote performance tasks b Word distinctions 1 Warnings cautions and notes These words emphasize critical and important instructions a A warning indicates an operating procedure or a practice that if not correctly followed could result in personal injury or loss of life b caution indicates an operating procedure or a practice that if not strictly observed could result in damage to or destruction of equipment c note highlights essential information that is not of a threatening nature 2 Will must shall should and may a Will must or shall are used to indicate mandatory actions b Should is used to indicate a nonmandatory but preferred method of
415. sive fire 3 Recover at an altitude that will allow sufficient time to arrest the sink rate after collective and cyclic have been applied to recover from the dive Note During this maneuver airspeed will increase rapidly Ensure airspeed does not exceed velocity never exceed V wx by initiating a recovery prior to the limit Note If mushing occurs apply forward cyclic to increase lift on the rotor system NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLES CONSIDERATIONS Rapid evasive maneuvers will be more hazardous due to division of attention limited visibility and aircraft limitations Be particularly aware of aircraft altitude and three dimensional position in relation to threat obstacles and terrain Proper sequence and timing is critical in that the P must announce intentions prior to initiating maneuvers that might cause spatial disorientation Select a reference point to maintain orientation on threat or friendly troops to aid in maintaining situational awareness SA Reference points may be acquired by selecting a global positioning system GPS reference point or prominent terrain feature As airspeed increases altitude above the obstacles should also increase Bank angles should be commensurate with ambient light and altitude above the terrain High bank angles will result in an inaccurate readout from the radar altimeter and therefore will be unreliable Using NVG without HUD symbology display will require greater crew workload to monitor torqu
416. sk must be accomplished Standards are based on ideal conditions to which the task must be accomplished The common standards listed in chapter 4 apply to all tasks listed in this section unless specifically stated otherwise The following common standards apply to all MP tasks 1 Perform procedures and checks per applicable MTF manual 2 Brief the RCM NCM on the procedures applicable warnings and cautions for the task to be performed 3 Perform crew coordination actions per the task description and chapter 6 4 Assess and address any malfunctions or discrepancies as they occur and apply appropriate corrective actions or troubleshooting procedures 5 Use the oral call out and confirmation method and announce the initiation and completion of each check 6 The MP must occupy the left seat for the following tasks 4200 4202 4220 4228 and 4236 The MP may perform other maintenance tasks from either seat This restriction does not apply to initial ME training evaluations 7 The MP ME will guard the collective anytime the engine power control levers are manipulated 8 Tasks 4001 4200 4202 4220 4228 4236 and 4254 require additional information for the crew The MP will ensure the crew is familiar with the following e Maneuver RCM NCM responsibilities e Abort criteria e Limitations e Emergency procedures e Description The description explains how the elements of the task should be done to meet the standards W
417. soft rough or sloping terrain may require using more than normal power Note During taxi with the tail wheel unlocked fuselage roll attitude is controlled with the cyclic The attitude indicator inclinometer as well as outside visual cues may be used to reference fuselage roll attitude The normal method for ground taxi is with the tail wheel in the unlocked position Note While ground taxiing minor heading changes may be made with the tail wheel locked However care should be taken not to break or bend the tail wheel locking pin A slight fuselage roll in the opposite direction may indicate excessive pedal input with the tail wheel locked Excessive collective application may activate the drag beam switch Note Depending on ground velocity emergency stops may be performed by lowering the collective and applying the wheel breaks or by bringing the aircraft to a hover Note Excessive cyclic input and insufficient collective application may result in droop stop pounding or main rotor contact with mission equipment DROOP STOP POUNDING DSP DSP is a phenomenon that can occur when there is excessive downward blade travel causing the blades to strike the droop stops when they are in the fly position The conditions which combine to induce this type DSP include excessive aft cyclic low collective and all wheels on the ground The maneuver that is most likely to produce DSP is the roll on landing in conjunction with aerodynamic braking
418. sonnel on procedures to be followed in the event of an emergency The NCM will direct assistance from any additional ground support personnel to aid in installing and loading the weapon The NCM will ensure that the proper amount of ammunition is loaded onboard the aircraft according to the mission briefing 2 Procedures Brief additional ground support personnel as necessary Perform installation and preflight inspection of the weapon ensuring that the gun is safetied to the pintle Ensure that the ejector control bag and ammunition can is installed During loading of ammunition observe all safety precautions After loading the ammunition ensure the safety button is in S position To initiate the firing sequence push the safety button to the F position press the trigger fully and hold Low cycle rate of fire of the machine gun allows firing of single rounds or short bursts The trigger must be completely released for each shot Conduct weapons engagement according to the mission briefing ROE and crew briefing After acquiring and identifying the target estimate range and ensure that the target is within the weapons field of range and 4 178 TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 the kill zone is within the weapons effective range Use correct firing techniques and ballistic corrections to successfully suppress neutralize or destroy as applicable the threat Consi
419. speed 5 kilometers per hour KPH g Submit scatterable minefield warning SCATMINWARN report See table 4 4 2 Nonrated a In conjunction with the rated crewmember s RCMs complete required M 139 checks to ensure proper system operation prior to mission departure b Load and inventory 87 87 1 88 mine canisters c Set dispenser control unit DCU to mission parameters d Operate the M 139 Volcano System per the appropriate operator s manual CL e Recognize and respond to a Volcano System malfunction f Perform or describe appropriate emergency procedures per the appropriate operator s manual CL DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a The pilot on the controls P will focus primarily outside the aircraft to provide obstacle clearance throughout the maneuver and maintain ground speed 5 KPH and altitude 10 feet during the mine dispensing pass b The pilot not on the controls P will provide adequate warning to avoid obstacles detected in the flight path and will announce when his or her attention is focused inside the cockpit and again when attention is reestablished outside P will back up the P with altitude and ground speed calls using the AN ASN 128 Doppler or AN ASN 128B Doppler global positioning system GPS ground speed display to match the DCU ground speed setting and the AN APN 209 radar altimeter for height above the ground The P will complete and send the SCATMINWARN message c The NCM will operate the
420. st rope master FRM 4 144 TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 c The pilot not on the controls P and nonrated crewmember NCM will assist in clearing the aircraft and will provide adequate warning of obstacles They will also assist the P in maintaining a stable hover and monitor aircraft systems for normal indications d When utilizing two NCM s each NCM will make specific calls informing the pilots per briefed procedures One NCM will clear the tail while the other assists the P on placement over the insertion point Both NCMs will perform airspace surveillance and obstacle avoidance at all times constant scanning is required One NCM will be responsible for passing the 10 6 and 1 minute calls to the passengers One NCM will be responsible for making the rope calls this does not prevent the other NCM from providing additional guidance e The NCM s will use pre established procedures and communications including hand and arm signals between each other and the fast rope master The NCM will control when ropes are deployed released or retrieved NCMs must verify with the other NCM via hand and arm signals or ICS before releasing fast rope Fast rope master controls personnel movement and exiting of ropers e NCM will inform PC once both ropes are clear of the aircraft or once both ropes have been retrieved back into the aircraft or ropes are secure
421. stablishing a reference angle to these objects the P can detect altitude changes when his or her perspective to these objects changes Ground objects fences trails roads provide excellent references for detecting lateral drift Proper scanning techniques must be used The P may become spatially disoriented when alternating his or her viewing perspective between high and low references The AN AVS 7 ANVIS HUD hover symbology can aid in maintaining position and hover altitude for night vision goggle NVG operations and assist in maintaining position over the insertion point during adverse environmental conditions blowing dust sand or snow or low levels of illumination Proper scanning techniques are necessary to detect aircraft drift and to avoid spatial disorientation Proper scanning techniques are necessary to detect aircraft drift and to avoid spatial disorientation If possible an area with adequate ground contrast and reference points should be used TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training Training will be conducted in the aircraft 2 Evaluation Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft Publication Date TC 3 04 33 4 145 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 REFERENCES Appropriate common references the FRIES airworthiness release TC 21 24 and USSOCOM 350 6 4 146 TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD
422. stores support system ESSS stores and sling load Use the actual weight of the aircraft and all additions for these computations d Item 4 STORES WEIGHT Planned weight of any jettisonable items such as external loads ESSS wing stores and volcano e Item 5 FUEL WEIGHT Total planned fuel weight internal and external at takeoff f Item 6 ATF ETF Aircraft torque factor ATFf is the ratio of individual aircraft s power available to a specification power at 35 degrees celsius The ATF is an average of both engines and allowed to range from 90 to 1 0 Engine torque factor ETF is the ratio of individual engine torque available to specification torque at a reference temperature of 35 degrees celsius The ETF is allowed to range from 85 to 1 0 The ATF and ETF values are found on the engine health indicator test HIT log g Item 7 TORQUE RATIO Torque ratio TR is the ratio of torque available to specification torque at the desired ambient temperature and incorporates ambient temperature effects on engine performance The tr equals the ATF ETF for temperatures of 35 degrees celsius and above h Item 8 MAX TORQUE AVAILABLE The maximum torque available is also referred to as intermediate rated power IRP 30 minute limit T700 and T701 or maximum rated power MRP 10 minute limit T701 The maximum torque available 2 5 minute limit T701 is also referred to as SINGLE ENGINE CONTINGENCY POWER 2 5 minute limit or one engi
423. strument takeoff ITO Task 1170 If a go around is not feasible try to maneuver the aircraft forward and down to the ground to limit the possibility of touchdown with lateral or aft movement 2 When performing operations during unaided night flight ensure that the searchlight or landing light white light is in the desired position Using the white light will impair night vision for several minutes Therefore exercise added caution if resuming flight before reaching full dark adaptation SNOW SAND DUST CONSIDERATIONS 1 During ascent to a hover if visual references do not deteriorate to an unacceptable level continue ascent to the desired hover altitude 2 For hover taxi During takeoff to a hover simultaneously accelerate the aircraft to a ground speed that keeps the snow sand dust cloud aft of the main rotor mast For coupled hover taxi Prior to takeoff select the hover display the primary flight display PFD to obtain cues for maintaining position and velocity reference VREF During takeoff to a hover press in on the cyclic trim beeper Z axis and adjust to an appropriate altitude Move the cyclic trim beeper in the desired direction to accelerate the aircraft to a ground speed or velocity reference VREF that keeps the snow sand dust cloud aft of the main rotor mast Hover velocity hold HVR VHLD will be displayed on the appropriate FD DCP and will maintain the aircraft at the desired velocity until th
424. t 6 minutes out and 1 minute out alert calls P will make a smooth progressive deceleration and descent to arrive at the insertion point at the appropriate altitude and airspeed for insertion PIC will give the execution command SWIMMERS SWIMMERS SWIMMERS b The approach should be made into the wind Approach speed is 80 knots indicated airspeed KIAS maximum from the release point to the area of cast operations The approach is situational dependent and may be either a visual meteorological condition VMC or a terrain flight approach After arrival at the insertion location slow to the desired airspeed and altitude 10 ft above the water line AWL and 10 knots ground speed KGS c When utilizing two NCM s one NCM will make specific calls and inform the pilots One NCM will clear the tail while the other assists the P on monitoring the insertion point and aircraft altitude Both NCMs will perform airspace surveillance and obstacle avoidance at all times One NCM will be responsible for passing the 10 6 and 1 minute calls to the passengers One NCM will be responsible for making the swimmers call SWIMMERS AWAY when the first swimmer exits the aircraft NCM will announce SWIMMERS CLEAR when the last swimmer has exited the aircraft NCM will attempt to account for swimmers in the water and notify the P this does not prevent the other NCM from providing additional guidance NCM will use pre established procedures and comm
425. t Table B 3 Flight tasks for initial extended range fuel system qualification Tasks Task Titles 1010 Prepare a performance planning card 1012 Verify aircraft weight and balance 1020 Prepare aircraft for mission 1022 Perform preflight inspection 1024 Perform before starting engine through before leaving helicopter checks 1028 Perform hover power check 1034 Perform ground taxi 1038 Perform hovering flight 1040 Perform VMC takeoff 1048 Perform fuel management procedures 1052 Perform VMC flight maneuvers 1058 Perform VMC approach 1062 Perform slope operations 1064 Perform a roll on landing 1070 Respond to emergencies 2066 Perform extended range fuel system operations Total hours 1 0 These tasks are performed by RCMs only Task applies to External tanks only B 5 VOLCANO MINE DELIVERY SYSTEM The Volcano TSP outlines procedures that units will use for initial volcano qualification The TSP may be obtained by writing to Commander U S Army Aviation Center ATTN ATZQ TDS T Fort Rucker Alabama 36362 5000 This training provides the crewmember with the knowledge skills and techniques required for installation loading preflight in flight system operations B 2 TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Aircraft Series Qualification emergency procedures and basic employment considerati
426. tack event are critical in performing EVM in a timely manner Alerting the rest of the flight maximizes mission survivability by providing early warning and reaction time and perhaps maneuver space with the goal of minimizing other aircrews exposure to the WEZ if not enabling them to avoid the WEZ altogether The threat must be both directive telling the flight what you want them to do and descriptive telling the flight why to build the flight s situational awareness Always preface threat calls with the flight call sign to avoid potential confusion in situations where multiple flights are using the same frequency a Aircrew coordination throughout the EVM sequence is of paramount importance Crews should brief and practice actions during EVM to ensure efficiency and communication effectiveness In any case the person observing the enemy fire must communicate to the P in order for the P to be able to Publication Date TC 3 04 33 4 123 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 effectively execute EVM The aircrew must communicate the threat information to other aircraft in the flight and after the immediate danger is past to the appropriate outside agencies for battlefield situational awareness SA b The first crewmember to realize enemy fire will announce the nature and direction of the threat by the most immediate means available c The pilot on the controls P will announc
427. tail wheel is locked The P will verbally relay the signalman s signals if the P loses visual contact with the LSE c The P and nonrated crewmember NCM will assist in clearing the aircraft and will provide adequate warning of obstacles unannounced drift and changes in altitude They will announce when their attention is focused inside and again when attention is reestablished outside and will acknowledge all P directions They will assist the P in ensuring that the main wheels are within the landing deck circle or as directed by the LSE before touchdown 2 Procedures a Before the approach When cleared to land adjust airspeed as necessary descend to 200 feet above the water line AWL and enter the landing pattern The LSE will expect the pilot in the seat nearest the bow of the ship upon landing to be at the flight controls for the first landing Make a standard rate turn or less in the appropriate direction and cross perpendicular to the ships wake and then begin the turn to final When the ship is underway it will be necessary to make lateral corrections to maintain Publication Date TC 3 04 33 4 161 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 alignment with the landing deck lineup lines An alternate technique is to lead the ship by initiating the approach to a point forward of the flight deck b During the approach Cross the deck edge no faster than a brisk walk at an altitude
428. te common references 5 16 TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Maintenance Test Pilot Tasks TASK 4220 Perform Maximum Power Check CONDITION In an H 60 helicopter STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and these additions modifications 1 Verbally confirm all bleed air is turned OFF prior to start of the task 2 Accurately determine ETF and ATF values DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a The maintenance test pilot MP should direct assistance from the rated crewmember RCM and nonrated crewmember NCM as required b The RCM and NCM will assist the MP as directed c After the flight check complete verify data values utilizing applicable charts 2 Procedures a IVHMS will used if installed operational and authorized b If IVHMS is not operational or authorized perform the check according to the applicable maintenance test flight MTF manual c Once the flight check is complete the MP will ensure the data values are accurately derived in order to complete the entire procedure TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training Training may be conducted in the aircraft or simulator 2 Evaluation Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft REFERENCES Appropriate common references Publication Date TC 3 04 33 5 17 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 5 TASK 4228 Perform Vibration Absorb
429. tem 12 departure data using arrival forecast PA and FAT Item 44 MAX ALLOWABLE GWT OGE IGE Compute the maximum allowable gross weight the same as item 9 departure data using arrival forecast PA and FAT Item 45 MAX HOVER HEIGHT IGE Compute the maximum hover height the same as item 11 departure data using arrival forecast PA and FAT Item 46 MIN SE AIRSPEED IAS WO W STORES Compute the minimum single engine airspeed the same as item 13 departure data using arrival forecast PA and FAT IN FLIGHT UPDATES Note Updates Care should be taken to monitor performance requirements in the accomplishment of the mission The PPC should be updated in flight or on the ground as the mission progresses if the requirements below are met Updates are required when there is intent to land or takeoff and operating within 3 000 pounds of the MAX ALLOWABLE GWT OGE and there is an increase of 1 000 feet pressure altitude and or 5 degrees Celsius from the planned PPC TABULAR PERFORMANCE DATA See Task 1011 for an example of performance presented in the operator s and crewmembers CL Publication Date TC 3 04 33 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 data _33 UH60 FAD 20120522 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Glossary SECTION I ACRONYMS AND ABBREVIATIONS AC ACCUM ADF ADMIN AFCS AFMS AGL AHO AIM ALSE ALT AMC AMCOM AMP ANVIS APART APU ARNG ASE ASR ATC
430. the time of each takeoff b Initiate an alternate course of action if the actual fuel consumption varies from the planned value and the flight cannot be completed with the required reserve c Balance manage fuel tank levels if appropriate to maintain aircraft within center of gravity CG limits d Verify that the aircraft will remain within weight and CG limitations for the duration of the flight e Recognize and respond to ERFS malfunctions f Perform or describe appropriate emergency procedures per the appropriate aircraft operator s manual CL 2 Nonrated a Complete all preflight duties per the appropriate aircraft operator s manual CL and unit standing operating procedure SOP b Recognize and alert the pilot not on the controls P to ERFS malfunctions DESCRIPTION Monitor the main fuel quantity indicators and the auxiliary fuel management panel to ensure that the system is operating normally Operate the fuel management system panel in the AUTO or MANUAL mode as required TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training Training may be conducted in the aircraft or simulator 2 Evaluation Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft REFERENCES Appropriate common references 4 160 TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 TASK 2068 Perform Shipboard Operations WARNING Do not move the cyclic with the pitch and roll of the
431. ther aircraft weight exceeds maximum gross weight 2 Verify aircraft operating weight 3 Determine sufficient power is available to perform the mission DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a The pilot in command PC will determine whether the aircraft is capable of completing the assigned mission and will ensure that aircraft limitations will not be exceeded b The pilot on the controls P will announce his or her intent to bring the aircraft to a stationary hover for a hover power check During the ascent check for proper center of gravity CG and control response Remain focused outside the aircraft and announce when the aircraft is stabilized at the desired hover altitude Use a 10 foot stationary hover in the direction of takeoff preferably into the wind when performing a hover power check Note A 3 to 5 knot crosswind or tailwind may increase torque required by up to 4 over zero wind values c The pilot not on the controls P will monitor the aircraft instruments and verify the power check The P will compare the actual hover performance data to the computed data on the performance planning card PPC and announce the results to the P If GO NO GO in ground effect IGE or out of ground effect OGE torque is indicated prior to reaching the planned hover height used during performance planning the P will tell the P to stop the hover power check and land the aircraft The PC will confirm the GO NO GO torque and adjust the mission a
432. tion Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft REFERENCES Appropriate common references and TM 11 5855 300 10 4 174 TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 TASK 2098 Perform Aerial Radio Relay CONDITIONS In an H 60 helicopter equipped with a retransmission capability STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 Identify and tune the appropriate frequency 2 Establish contact with the message sender 3 Authenticate if required 4 Establish contact with the message receiver 5 Configure the aircraft radios for radio relay DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a The pilot on the controls P will remain focused primarily outside the aircraft to provide obstacle clearance b The pilot not on the controls P will configure the required radios and establish contact with the desired stations for retransmission c The P and nonrated crewmember NCM will monitor aircraft instruments assist in clearing the aircraft and provide adequate warning to avoid traffic and obstacles 2 Procedures Set aircraft radio for retransmit mode selector RETRANS or set appropriate receiver transmitter to the desired retransmit frequency Set the radio retransmission selector switch to radios used Establish communication between each relay radio station by using appropriate intercommunication system ICS transmit TRANS s
433. tion or as directed by the examinee The examinee must know that he is being supported by a fully functioning crewmember GRADING CONSIDERATIONS a Academic evaluation The examinee must demonstrate a working knowledge and understanding of the appropriate subject areas in paragraph 3 4b b Flight evaluation 1 Academic Some tasks are identified in TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS as tasks that may be evaluated academically For these tasks the examinee must demonstrate a working knowledge of the task Evaluators may use computer based instruction mock ups or other approved devices to include the aircraft or simulator to determine the examinee s Publication Date TC 3 04 33 3 1 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 3 knowledge of the task 2 In the aircraft or in the simulator Tasks which require evaluation under these conditions must 3 3 be performed in the aircraft or the H 60FS Task standards are based on an ideal situation Grading is based on meeting the minimum standards The evaluator must consider deviations high wind turbulence or poor visibility from the ideal during the evaluation If other than ideal conditions exist the evaluator must make appropriate adjustments to the standards CREWMEMBER EVALUATION Evaluations determine the crewmember s ability to perform the tasks on the DA Form 7120 1 R and DA Form 7120 2 R and check understanding of required aca
434. ttings greater than the critical torque indicate the pilot is operating outside the aircraft low ETF single engine capability If operating dual engine above the CT and an engine fails malfunctions or must be shut down the pilot must immediately adjust torque airspeed and or gross weight to achieve single engine capability Item 26 MAX ALLOWABLE GWT and OPTIMUM IAS AT MAX ALLOWABLE GWT DUAL ENGINE Use the appropriate CRUISE chart to compute the MAX ALLOWABLE GWT as described below 1 Clean and high drag configuration a Step 1 Enter the bottom of the CRUISE chart at the TORQUE AVAILABLE 30 MIN T700 or 10 MIN T701 line adjusted for the ATF b Step 2 Follow the slant of the line up to the intersection of the MAXIMUM END and R C line and read maximum gross weight If the maximum torque available line is to the right of the GW 1 000 LB lines enter the maximum gross weight according to the operator s manual chapter 5 limits Record MAX ALLOWABLE GWT DUAL ENGINE c Step 3 Re enter the cruise chart at the intersection of the MAX ALLOWABLE GWT DUAL ENGINE line as determined in step 2 above and the MAXIMUM END and R C line Read right or left as required to the IAS KTS scale for OPTIMUM IAS AT MAX ALLOWABLE GWT Record OPTIMUM IAS AT MAX ALLOWABLE GWT DUAL ENGINE Note The torque change to compensate for drag alternative or sling load configuration at MAX END IAS is often negligible and not computed
435. ty FOV and gain to best fit the current mission profile Know and understand factors and or emergencies adversely affecting the MFDs which could result in degraded mission performance or the mission being aborted Know and understand takeoff and landing procedures that could cause damage to the FLIR system turret The proper shutdown procedures will be performed per the technical manual NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLE NVG CONSIDERATIONS Ensure MFD lighting adjustment is set at an acceptable level for night or night vision goggle NVG operations TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training Training will be conducted in the aircraft 3 Evaluation Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft REFERENCES Appropriate common references and the appropriate manufacturer s references Publication Date TC 3 04 33 4 155 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 TASK 2063 Operate Storm Scope Weather Mapping System CONDITION In an H 60 helicopter STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 Operate the storm scope weather mapping system per the appropriate technical manual TM 2 Select range and sector coverage for desired weather representation 3 Interpret cell strike data and adjust mission as appropriate to avoid severe weather DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a The pilot on the controls P will focus primarily outside the aircra
436. ual Meteorological Conditions Takeoff CONDITIONS In an H 60 helicopter given visual meteorological conditions VMC conditions and with maximum torque available known STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 Maintain aircraft in trim above 50 feet above ground level AGL or as appropriate for transition to mission profile 2 Estimate the point where the aircraft will enter effective translational lift ETL and establish an abort line to assist in determining type of takeoff 3 Determine the type of takeoff that requires the minimum amount of power to clear the obstacles taking into account gross weight power available and distance from obstacles a Constant angle b Vertical c Level Acceleration d Rolling Takeoff Additional Standards for rolling takeoff Before liftoff Establish and maintain power as necessary Maintain alignment with takeoff direction 5 degrees Accelerate to desired planned takeoff speed not to exceed 60 knots ground speed After liftoff Adjust power as required not to exceed aircraft limits Maintain ground track alignment with the takeoff direction with minimum drift Maintain maximum rate of climb airspeed 5 knots indicated airspeed KIAS Maintain aircraft aligned with runway or suitable liftoff surface below maximum rate of climb airspeed DESCRIPTION Crew actions a The pilot in command PC will determine the direction of takeoff by a
437. ual noise or other abnormalities either pilot can press the intermittent event switch HUMS E located on the instrument panel next to each flight director display control panel FD DCP to capture that event for analysis by maintenance personnel TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training Training may be conducted in the aircraft or simulator 2 Evaluation Evaluation may be conducted in the aircraft or simulator REFERENCES Appropriate common references 4 38 TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 TASK 1026 Maintain Airspace Surveillance CONDITIONS In an H 60 helicopter STANDARDS APPROPRIATE common standards and the following additions modifications 1 Brief airspace surveillance procedures prior to flight This will include scan sectors 2 Announce any unplanned drift or altitude changes clear the aircraft and immediately inform other crewmembers of all air traffic or obstacles that pose a threat to the aircraft 3 Announce when attention is focused inside the aircraft using a time limit that is appropriate for the conditions and announce when attention is focused back outside 4 Maintain airspace surveillance in assigned scan sectors DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a The pilot in command PC will brief airspace surveillance procedures prior to the flight The briefing will include areas of responsibility and scan sectors b The
438. ublication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 TASK 2122 Perform Advanced Cardiac Life Support WARNING Serious personal or patient injury can occur if improperly operating or positioning the litter lift CONDITIONS In an H 60 helicopter STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 Use litter lift system and prepare ambulatory seats for use if required 2 Operate all medical control panels and emergency stops 3 Generate oxygen using the onboard oxygen generation system 4 Administer oxygen using the oxygen delivery system ODS 5 Configure and use the medical suction system 6 Control interior cabin climate using the environmental control system ECS DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a The medical officer MO determines the condition of the patient ambulatory or litter The MO or crew chief CE during and after loading operates the litter lift system to facilitate the loading and unloading of patients The CE installs required seating for ambulatory patients b The MO or CE will operate the medical control panels to raise or lower the litter pans to the height necessary for loading Crewmembers will know positions of all emergency stops in the aircraft c The MO or CE will initiate oxygen generation by turning the oxygen generating system on Determine whether system has a charge Acknowledge built in test BIT fault
439. ude and airspeed of 10 KGS and 10 feet above water line AWL The NCM Publication Date TC 3 04 33 4 169 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 will assist in clearing the aircraft 1 provide adequate warning of obstacles and announce the water spray SPRAY AT THE TAIL SPRAY AT THE DOORS SPRAY AT THE MAINS The NCM will advise the P when the ladder is on the ground or in the water The NCM monitors drift and advise P on the progress of the extraction personnel during hook up to the ladders NCM will inform PC when personnel and ladder s are secure The P and NCM will announce when their attention is focused inside and again when reestablished outside If forward flight is required the NCM must constantly monitor the survivors and keep the P informed of their stability and height above obstacles 2 Procedures a The PC will ensure the ladder is inspected serviceable and secured to the aircraft The NCM will inspect and secure a serviceable ladder to the aircraft cabin floor Proper flotation will be attached to the ladder as necessary b The PC will inform the NCM when to deploy the ladder and establish what maximum radar altimeter reading may be achieved with the ladder safely on the ground or in the water c Once personnel in the water are located plan the approach into the wind as much as possible The approach should terminate to a hover approximately 20 feet abov
440. unications including hand and arm signals between each other and the cast master NCM will control when swimmers are deployed NCMs must verify with the other NCM via hand and arm signals or ICS before departing insertion point The cast master controls personnel movement and exiting of swimmers will inform PC once swimmer s are clear of the aircraft OVERWATER CONSIDERATIONS Overwater flight at any altitude is characterized by a lack of visual cues and therefore has the potential of causing visual illusions Be alert to any unannounced changes in the flight profile and be prepared to take immediate corrective actions The radar altimeter low bug should be set to assist in altitude control Hazards to terrain flight such as harbor lights buoys wires and birds must also be considered during overwater flight NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLE NVG CONSIDERATIONS Spatial Disorientation can be overwhelming during overwater operations at night If there are visible lights on the horizon or if the shoreline can be seen the pilot may opt to approach the cast area so the aircraft is pointed toward these references if the wind permits Proper scanning techniques are necessary TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training Training will be conducted in the aircraft 2 Evaluation Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft REFERENCES Appropriate common references FM 3 05 211 FM 3 21 220 USSOCOM REG 350 6 and FM 3 05 210 4 1
441. until both turn rate indicators indicate full deflection Stop turn and stabilize hover at the new heading Note and compare headings again Repeat to the right Check the HSI compass cards and the standby magnetic compass for smooth operation and heading comparison Confirm both turn rate indicators indicate full deflection during turns in either direction Smoothly displace the cyclic to induce 5 degree in pitch and 10 degree in roll indications Confirm both vertical situation indicators VSIs indicate appropriately Direct RCM to switch TURN RATE and VERT GYRO switches to NORM on the pilot s MODE SEL panel and note the legend lights indicate appropriately d Have the RCM guard the collective control The MP will set copilot station MODE SEL TURN RATE and VERT GYRO switches to ALTR and note that the legend lights indicate appropriately e Perform brief pedal turns to the left and right of the initial heading and confirm both turn rate indicators indicate full deflection during turns in either direction Smoothly displace the cyclic to induce 5 degree in pitch and 10 degree in roll indications Confirm both VSIs indicate appropriately Have pilot not on the controls P guard the collective control Reset copilot s station switches to NORM TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training Training may be conducted in the aircraft or simulator 2 Evaluation Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft or simulator REFERENCES Appropria
442. uration a Step 1 Enter the bottom of the appropriate cruise chart at GW 1 000 LB at the AIRCRAFT GWT item 3 departure data Move up along the arc of the gross weight line to the intersection of the MAX END AND line Move left or right as required to the IAS KTS value then read maximum endurance indicated airspeed Record MAX ENDURANCE IAS b Step 2 At the intersection of the GW 1 000 LB line and the MAX END AND line read straight down and find the torque value associated with MAX END IAS Record MAX ENDURANCE TORQUE DUAL ENGINE Publication Date TC 3 04 33 D 9 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Appendix D j k Note The torque change to compensate for drag alternative or sling load configuration at MAX END IAS is often negligible and not computed Item 25 CRITICAL TORQUE DUAL ENGINE Note Critical torque CT is the dual engine torque value which when exceeded may not allow the aircraft to maintain RPM R within normal limits under single engine operations in the same flight conditions 1 Step 1 Enter the bottom of the CRUISE chart at the lowest ETF engine and follow the SE 30 MIN line T700 or SE 2 5 MIN line T701 to the selected dual engine cruise speed IAS item 19 2 Step 2 Read straight down do not follow slant of line and record CRITICAL TORQUE DUAL ENGINE WARNING During dual engine flight conditions that require torque se
443. ure Note MAX END IAS is used to calculate MAX ALTITUDE MSL Note Ensure FAT is adjusted for pressure altitude in the CRUISE charts Note The torque change to compensate for drag alternative or sling load configuration at max END IAS is negligible and not computed n Item 29 MIN MAX IAS SINGLE ENGINE Minimum and maximum airspeeds based on gross weight power available and conditions Note Single engine level flight may not be possible at takeoff but may become possible as fuel is consumed Note The torque change to compensate for drag alternative or external load configuration at minimum indicated airspeed is often negligible and not computed Item 30 CRUISE SPEED IAS SINGLE ENGINE Select a CRUISE SPEED IAS that falls within the range of MIN MAX IAS SINGLE ENGINE item 29 above p Item 31 MAX TORQUE AVAILABLE SINGLE ENGINE Publication Date TC 3 04 33 4 19 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 Note The maximum torque available may exceed the transmission torque limit During normal aircraft operations the aircraft operator s manual chapter 5 torque limitations shall not be exceeded Note Max torque is derived from the cruise charts and takes into account the effect of ram air on engine performance at a selected airspeed Torque values may vary when flying at airspeeds other than the planned cruise airspeed Note The maximum torque available 30
444. urity equipment according to the appropriate aircraft operator s manual 2 Maintain radio discipline 3 Use the SOI 4 Recognize and respond to enemy electronic countermeasures 5 Operate Mark XII identification friend or foe IFF system DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions a The pilot in command PC will ensure assigned radio frequencies are briefed during the crew briefing The PC will indicate whether the pilot on the controls P or pilot not on the controls P will establish and maintain primary communications b The P will announce mission information not monitored by the P and any deviation from directives c The P will manage and announce radio frequencies and copy and decode pertinent information He will announce mission information not monitored by the P 2 Procedures Electronic communications should not be used in a tactical environment except when absolutely necessary If electronic communication is required the preferred method is to operate in frequency hopping FH have quick secure voice mode To eliminate confusion and reduce transmission time the crew must use approved communication words phrases and codes Plan what to say before keying the transmitter Transmit information clearly concisely and slowly enough to be understood by the receiving station Ideally keep transmissions under 10 seconds Do not pass mission critical information on unsecured nets Do not identify a unit or an individual by name during nons
445. urs reduce airspeed If a fore and aft oscillation occurs begin a shallow turn while reducing airspeed d Approach and load release Establish and maintain an approach angle that will keep the load clear of obstacles to the desired point of termination Establish a rate of closure appropriate for the conditions and the load When passing below 300 feet AGL place the cargo hook arming switch to the ARMED position Terminate the approach at a stationary hover with the load 10 feet above the intended release point Confirm with the NCM that the release point is clear Descend vertically until the load rests completely on the ground Continue descent to obtain slack in the sling and then hover laterally to ensure the clevis is clear of the load before releasing the load Confirm that the load is released before moving away from the release point Note Loads will meet external air transportability EAT requirements according to FM 4 20 197 Procedures for air transportation of hazardous material will be according to AR 95 27 Note Avoid flight over populated areas Publication Date TC 3 04 33 4 131 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 Note Before the mission the PC will ensure that all crewmembers are familiar with the hand and arm signals shown in FM 21 60 and with forced landing procedures In case of a forced landing the aviator will land the aircraft to the left of the load The hookup
446. us primarily outside the aircraft He will maintain the briefed position in the formation and announce any maneuver or formation change before execution If visual contact is lost with other aircraft the crew will immediately make a radio call to the flight and begin reorientation procedures Note The most important consideration when a crewmember has lost visual contact with the formation is to announce loss of visual contact to the other members of the crew and the rest of the flight and reorient Except for enemy contact all mission requirements are subordinate to this action b The P and NCM will provide adequate warning of traffic or obstacles detected in the flight path or identified on the map They will inform the P if visual contact is lost with other aircraft or if an enemy is sighted The NCMs will position themselves in the aircraft to observe other aircraft in the formation and assist in maintaining aircraft separation and obstacle clearance 2 Procedures a Perform formation flight in accordance with the unit standing operating procedures and the common references in this ATM b If the tactical situation requires perform techniques of movement per FM 3 04 203 Maneuver into the briefed flight formation Maintain horizontal and vertical separation for the type of formation being flown c The following procedures will be performed if visual contact is lost unless otherwise established in unit SOPs 1 Takeoff Immediate
447. ust advise the examinee that during role reversal the evaluator may deliberately perform some tasks outside standards to check the examinee s diagnostic and corrective action skills The evaluator will conduct or have the examinee conduct a crew briefing according to Task 1000 2 Preflight inspection engine start and run up procedures The evaluator will evaluate the examinee s use of the appropriate technical manuals TMs checklists CLs MTFs and the integrated electronic technical manual as appropriate The evaluator will have the examinee identify and discuss the function of at least two aircraft systems 3 Flight tasks As a minimum the evaluator will evaluate those tasks listed on the commander s task list as mandatory for the designated crew station s for the type of evaluation the evaluator is conducting and those mission or additional tasks selected by the commander The evaluator must demonstrate an ability to instruct and evaluate appropriate flight tasks Note During instrument training and instrument flight evaluations the aviator s vision may be restricted to the aircraft instruments at the discretion of the evaluator when the aircraft is not under actual IMC conditions The appropriate flight symbol will be logged on DA Form 2408 12 Army Aviator s Flight Record 4 Engine shutdown and after landing tasks The evaluator will evaluate the examinee s use of the appropriate TMs CLs MTFs and the integrated electronic technical
448. valuation consists of the tasks marked with an in the Eval column of table 2 4 except as stated in paragraph d below c MP ME Flight Evaluation This evaluation is an examination consisting of maintenance tasks conducted in each series group aircraft paragraph 2 6a 1 in which a crewmember is required to perform duties The flight evaluation will consist of the tasks in table 2 8 page 2 12 d Evaluation Requirements for H 60M Pilots also required to fly the H 60A L 1 Evaluation requirements may be met in similar aircraft This includes the standardization instrument NVG and maintenance test flight evaluation If aircraft specific tasks cannot be completed then the aviator will be considered APART complete but is considered aircraft noncurrent and must complete the tasks prior to performing duties 2 A pilot who flies both the H 60A L and H 60M may complete the standardization and or instrument evaluation in an H 60M and not have to fly in an H 60A L to complete Task 1168 Perform CIS Operations A pilot who completes the standardization and or instrument evaluation in an H 60A L will be required to complete Tasks 1025 1167 1169 1253 1254 and 1260 in an H 60M 3 An MP who flies both the H 60A L and H 60M may complete the annual maintenance test flight evaluation in an H 60M and not have to complete ATM Task 4228 Perform Absorber Vibration Check and Tuning in an H 60A L Evaluation of the procedure will be conducted in
449. ve by the torque ratio item 7 T700 to obtain maximum torque available An alternate method is to continue down to the TORQUE RATIO item 7 Move left to read the maximum TORQUE AVAILABLE per engine Record MAX TORQUE AVAILABLE For T701 enter the TORQUE CONVERSION chart at the TORQUE AVAILABLE PER ENGINE SPECIFICATION TORQUE scale with the TORQUE AVAILABLE PER ENGINE from step 2 above Move up to the TORQUE RATIO from item 7 4 Step 4 Move left and read ACTUAL TORQUE AVAILABLE Record MAX TORQUE AVAILABLE Note 1 If the ETF is different for each engine compute maximum torque available single engine for each engine using the torque ratio derived from the respective engine s ETF Note 2 Adjust the maximum torque available as required for planned use of engine bleed air accessories anti ice cockpit cabin heaters AMOGS OBOGS according to the operator s manual Note 3 If mission requirements dictate use of other than dual engine maximum torque available for example time limited operations based on continuous TGT limits or 701 30 minute TGT limits for engines with different ETFs dual engine torque available must be determined based on the engine with the lower ETF not the ATF as the lower ETF engine will encounter time limited TGT values first i Item 9 MAX ALLOWABLE GWT OGE IGE Use the appropriate HOVER chart to complete MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE GROSS WEIGHT for out of ground effect in ground effect OGE IGE
450. w threat sources encountered during the event The P will remain oriented on threat location and assist clearing the aircraft and will announce warning to avoid obstacles and when attention is focused inside the aircraft The P should note location of the threat quickly and as accurately as the situation allows Publication Date TC 3 04 33 4 127 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 Note It is imperative that all applicable crewmembers are able to quickly and accurately locate and transmit threat data in order to maintain individual and collective situational awareness during quickly changing situations Not storing reporting an enemy location may be more detrimental than the risk of taking time to note the location when contact happens The crew will transmit a report as required to other aircraft within the flight higher HQ and the owning ground unit tactical commander e Other crewmembers will remain oriented on the threat location and employ appropriate countermeasures or suppressive fire as appropriate They will announce when their attention is focused inside the cockpit for example when firing the weapons Note Crewmembers will not use friendly type graphic control measures icons symbols to mark enemy locations and vice versa to avoid fratricide and other unnecessary confusion 4 Defensive Role Defensive posture is independent of mission type Even attack aircraft may be in a de
451. ward the course and apply the appropriate drift correction normally one half of the intercept angle Continue to bracket the course by decreasing corrections until obtaining a heading that will maintain the aircraft on course Determine arrival at radio intersections per procedures in FM 3 04 240 FAA Instrument Flying Handbook FAA Instrument Procedures Handbook or AIM 4 84 TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training Training may be conducted in the aircraft or simulator 2 Evaluation Evaluation may be conducted in the aircraft or simulator REFERENCES Appropriate common references Publication Date TC 3 04 33 4 85 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 TASK 1167 Perform Flight Maneuvers Using Standby Flight Instrument System H 60M CONDITION In an H 60M helicopter without reference to the primary flight display PFD STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and maneuver the aircraft to establish and maintain the desired altitude heading and airspeed as appropriate DESCRIPTION CREW ACTIONS 1 The Electronic Standby Instrument System ESIS is designed for emergency use to land under an emergency situation where PFD information is not available 2 The pilot on the controls P maintains pitch roll and yaw attitudes utilizing cues provided by th
452. water or catch a wave Going faster or higher could result in injury to personnel The pilot cannot rely on the airspeed indicator below 40 indicated airspeed IAS the airspeed should not exceed that of a brisk walk Ground speed KGS from on board systems such as Doppler GPS navigation set for H60 A L and PFD for H 60M should be referenced Publication Date TC 3 04 33 4 171 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 c The pilot not on the controls P will provide the P with information regarding airspeed and altitude The P will also monitor the cockpit indications and announce when attention is focused inside the aircraft and again when their attention is reestablished outside The P announces the altitude above the water and ground speed at the insertion point and will turn on the windshield wipers when requested by the P will announce the water spray SPRAY AT THE TAIL SPRAY AT THE DOORS SPRAY AT THE MAINS NCM must constantly monitor the personnel and keep P informed of their progress The NCM will announce when their attention is focused inside and again when reestablished outside The NCM will assist the helocast master as necessary 2 Procedures a Hover checks will be made prior to beginning helocast operations to verify power available aircraft controllability and accuracy of the radar altimeters The PC will give the helocast master 10 minutes ou
453. weight When the wind direction and conditions are in doubt the best escape routes should dictate the approach and departure routes An example of a LZ sequence is listed at the end of this task but units may make their own table 4 2 page 4 63 The purpose of a LZ sequence is help pilots remember the crucial steps to ensure safe landings in a power critical landing Note The best possible route is that route requiring the least amount of power for the landing intended to the ground or a particular hover height without compromising a viable escape Publication Date TC 3 04 33 4 61 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 Note The difference between a go around and an escape is that a go around is a proactive maneuver with full control available while an escape is a reactive maneuver used to manage unplanned events The collective will usually be maintained or reduced during an escape maneuver d The tentative plan for the landing and takeoff is established in the high reconnaissance The low reconnaissance is performed to confirm or refute information determined in the high reconnaissance It is performed as low and as slow as good judgment dictates but not below ETL The P P must use cockpit or visual cues to confirm wind predictions verify the suitability of the landing point confirm that the escape routes identified are viable confirm the altitude of the landing point and verify envir
454. who are evaluating training NCMs must be at a crew station without access to the flight controls except Publication Date TC 3 04 33 4 1 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 d The terms without error when evaluating crew coordination conducting a local orientation flight or conducting a no notice evaluation b The following tasks require an SP IP or IE as appropriate to perform these tasks in the aircraft e Task 1070 Respond to Emergencies e Task 1082 Perform Autorotation Task 1182 Perform Unusual Attitude Recovery 3 Unless specified in the task considerations a task may be performed in any mode of flight without modifying the standards or descriptions When personal equipment NVG MOPP HUD and so forth or mission equipment water bucket ERFS and so forth is required to perform the task the availability of that equipment becomes part of the conditions 4 Simulated IMC denotes flight solely by reference to flight instruments A Vision restricting device will be utilized when logging hood on the DA Form 2408 12 5 Base tasks requiring specialized equipment do not apply to aircraft that do not have the equipment 6 NVG use may be a condition for any flight task When NVG are listed as a condition task standards will be the same as those described for performance of the task without using NVG 7 The aircrew will not attempt the tasks listed bel
455. will be more critical for target suppression or destruction During firing while wearing NVG target loss may occur momentarily due to muzzle blast and the brightness of the tracers Utilizing a laser will increase target acquisition and ballistic corrections TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training Training will be conducted in the aircraft 2 Evaluation Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft REFERENCES Appropriate common references DA Form 2408 13 1 FM 3 04 140 FM 3 06 and TM 9 1095 206 12 amp P Publication Date TC 3 04 33 4 179 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 TASK 2116 Perform an Aerial Radiological Survey CONDITION In an H 60 given a tactical map atmospheric conditions in the area to be surveyed DA Form 1971 2 R Chemical Data Sheet Monitoring or Survey or DA Form 1971 7 R NBC Observer s Initial or Follow Up Report STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 Plan and conduct a simplified or detailed aerial survey using a route course leg or point technique 2 Select a specific location for the survey meter in the aircraft to obtain accurate dose rate readings for determining the air ground correlation factor 3 Record and report information determined from the aerial survey DESCRIPTION 1 The two types of aerial surveys used by the crew are simplified and detailed The techniques used to
456. y be conducted in the aircraft or academically 2 Evaluation Evaluation may be conducted in the aircraft or academically 4 32 TC 3 04 33 Publication Date FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 REFERENCES Appropriate common references AR 95 27 DD Form 365 4 FM 55 450 2 and TM 55 1500 342 23 Publication Date TC 3 04 33 4 33 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 TASK 1020 Prepare Aircraft for Mission CONDITIONS In an H 60 helicopter and given a warning order or mission briefing and required mission equipment STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 Install secure inspect and inventory all mission equipment 2 Prepare the aircraft for the assigned mission DESCRIPTION Procedures After receiving a mission briefing determine the required mission equipment Ensure that it is installed secured inventoried and operational before flight If an airworthiness release AWR is required for mission equipment ensure that a current AWR is in the aircraft logbook and that all inspections and checks have been completed according to the AWR Check the equipment that requires aircraft power for operation per procedures in the appropriate aircraft operator s manual checklist CL or appropriate mission equipment operator s manuals TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training
457. y be less than PREDICTED HOVER TORQUE SINGLE ENGINE Note 3 PREDICTED HOVER TORQUE SINGLE ENGINE is computed using a specific wheel height If the hover torque exceeds the MAX TORQUE AVAILABLE the aircraft may still be capable of sustaining single engine hover at a lower wheel height m Item 13 MIN SE AIRSPEED IAS WO W STORES Use the appropriate CRUISE chart for departure conditions to compute the minimum single engine airspeed with external stores and without external stores as described below Note If the aircraft will be operating without external stores record NA in the with stores block 1 Step 1 Using the SE 30 MIN T700 or SE 2 5 MIN T701 line enter the bottom of the CRUISE chart at the lowest ETF 2 Step 2 Follow the slant of the line up to the first intersection of aircraft gross weight subtract STORES WEIGHT item 4 from AIRCRAFT GWT item 3 Read left or right for the IAS KTS Record MIN SE AIRSPEED IAS W O STORES If aircraft will be operating with external stores proceed with step 3 below 3 Step 3 Continue with the slant of the line to the first intersection of GW 1 000 LB at the AIRCRAFT GWT item 3 Read left or right for the IAS KTS Record MIN SE AIRSPEED IAS W STORES Note The torque change to compensate for drag alternative or external load configuration at minimum indicated airspeed is often negligible and not computed n Item 14 ZERO FUEL WEIGHT Use the appropriate
458. y outside the aircraft and respond to information given by the pilot not on the controls P The P monitors all mission equipment and uses the FMS CDU for communication navigation and mission information 2 The P will place the FMS into operation during run up and will operate in flight through shutdown by using any or all of the following functions a Enter and store data as necessary to effectively complete assigned mission Transfer data from the data transfer system data transfer unit DTS DTU to the FMS CDU and save data from the FMS to the DTS DTU as necessary b Enter and engage flight plan to include search patterns of flight plan FPN page of the FMS CDU The P should also be able to modify existing flight plans in flight to accomplish mission changes en route c Use the status STS page of the FMS CDU to determine system status and determine mission accomplishment relative to operational condition of displayed equipment d Select and set up the avionics using the communication COM page of FMS CDU e Use the navigation NAV page to select and tune the proper navigation aid f Use the features of the calculator CLC page g Fix positions and record positions as waypoints using the FIX page of the FMS CDU h Address emergency procedure associated with FMS CDU failures NIGHT OR NIGHT VISION GOGGLE NVG CONSIDERATIONS Ensure lighting is set at an acceptable level for night or night vision goggle NVG operations
459. y to become tense and as a result to over control the aircraft while performing the slope operation The P will note the aircraft attitude at a hover prior to starting descent to land on the slope b The pilot not on the controls P and nonrated crewmember NCM will provide adequate warning of obstacles unannounced drift or altitude changes The P will assist in setting the parking brakes and verify when they are set The P will note the aircraft attitude on the vertical situation indicator VSD and notify the P prior to exceeding aircraft slope limitations The P and NCM will confirm the suitability of the intended landing area and announce when their attention is focused inside the aircraft and again when attention is reestablished outside 2 Procedures a Landing Select a suitable area for slope operations If possible orient the aircraft into the wind Set the parking brakes Announce the initiation of the slope landing Smoothly lower the collective until the tail or main landing gear contacts the ground Adjust the cyclic to maintain the aircraft in a level attitude while maintaining heading with the pedals Continue lowering the collective and simultaneously apply cyclic into the slope to maintain the position of the up slope wheel until the landing gear is firmly on the ground Coordinate the collective and cyclic to control the rate of attitude change when lowering the down slope gear to the slope With the down slope gear on the
460. yed on the instrument panel DESCRIPTION 1 Crew actions The pilot on the controls P will focus primarily outside the aircraft and respond to navigation cues given by the pilot not on the controls P The P flies the mission profiles at the appropriate airspeeds altitudes and headings as directed by the P 2 Procedures Load the proper frequencies and the proper search code during the before starting engine checks Use the burst continuous home switch positions during the tracking procedure and follow the course indicator on the instrument panel to the downed crewmember location TRAINING AND EVALUATION REQUIREMENTS 1 Training Training will be conducted in the aircraft 2 Evaluation Evaluation will be conducted in the aircraft REFERENCES Appropriate common references and the appropriate manufacturer s references Publication Date TC 3 04 33 4 159 FINAL APPROVED DRAFT See TRADOC Reg 25 36 ATM_33 UH60 FAD 20120522 Chapter 4 TASK 2066 Perform Extended Range Fuel System Operations CONDITIONS In an H 60 helicopter with an extended range fuel system ERFS consisting of the appropriate fuel tanks Note ERFS encompasses any authorized extended range fuel system such as crashworthy external fuel system CEFS and internal auxiliary fuel system Robertson STANDARDS Appropriate common standards and the following additions modifications 1 Rated a Verify that the required amount of fuel is onboard at

TC 3-04.33 (H-60 ATM). - Army Aviation Support Facility #1 NYARNG

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents